Civil engineering, surveying and building Books

Book SynopsisThis key text for the building team is an authoritative guide and gives a detailed account of the team's roles and responsibilities, with best industry practice required to ensure that building projects meet clients' expectations on time, cost and quality.Table of ContentsPart I Briefing The Project Team 1 1 The Project Team 3 Introduction 3 Parties to a building contract and their supporting teams 3 Rights, duties and responsibilities 4 The employer 5 The architect/contract administrator 5 The quantity surveyor 5 The principal designer 5 The clerk of works 6 The status of named consultants 6 Unnamed consultants with delegated powers 7 The project manager 7 The principal contractor 7 Sub-contractors 9 Statutory requirements 9 The CDM regulations 10 Avoiding disputes 12 Communications 12 2 Assessing the Needs 14 The structure 14 The strategic definition 14 Contribution to the initial project brief 16 The initial programme 17 The appointment 17 Appointment documents 19 Collateral warranties 20 3 Buildings as Assets 21 Buildings as assets as well as buildings 21 Single building or programme? 22 Buildings as solutions to business challenges? 23 Everyday solutions-based thinking 24 Summary 25 Part II Available Procurement Methods 27 4 Principles of Procurement 29 Simple theory – complex practice 29 The eternal triangle 29 Other considerations 32 The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015 32 Risk 33 Accountability 33 Entering into the contract 33 Type of contract 34 Selection of the contractor – the tendering procedure 35 Establishing price and time 35 The dynamics of tendering 36 5 Basic Concepts 37 Economic use of resources 38 Labour 38 Materials 39 Plant 39 Capital 39 Contractor’s contribution to design and contract programme 40 Production cost savings 40 Continuity 41 Risk and accountability 41 Accountability 43 Summary 43 6 Accountability 45 Background 45 The modern concept of public accountability 46 Contract documentation 46 Proper price 47 Dispensing with competition 47 Inflation 47 Value for money 48 Summary 49 Contents vii 7 Value and Risk Management 50 Value management 50 Value articulation and project definition 52 Optimisation of benefits and costs 52 Learning lessons and performance optimisation 53 Risk management 54 Risk must be managed 54 Nothing ventured, nothing gained 55 Understanding the project 56 Risk management strategies 57 Allocating management actions 58 Value and risk are complementary 59 Similarities in the processes 63 The integrated process 63 8 Fixed Price and Cost Reimbursement 64 Fixed price 64 Cost reimbursement 65 Application to contract elements 65 Fluctuations 66 Target cost contracts 66 Use 67 The employer’s position 67 The contractor’s position 67 Programme 68 Summary 69 9 Fixed Price Contracts 70 JCT fixed price contracts 70 The standard building contract 71 Design and build contract 71 Major project construction contract 73 Intermediate building contract 74 Minor works building contract 75 Other fixed price contracts available 75 Advantages and disadvantages of fixed price contracts 76 Advantages 76 Disadvantages 76 10 Cost Reimbursement Contracts 77 The fee 77 The prime cost building contract 78 Characteristics of the form 78 Advantages and disadvantages of cost reimbursement contracts 79 Advantages 79 Disadvantages 80 Budget and cost control 80 Administering the contract 80 Procedure for keeping prime costs 81 Contractor’s site staff and direct workforce 81 Materials 82 Plant 82 Credits 82 Sub-letting 83 Defective work 83 Cost control 83 Final account 84 11 Target Cost Contracts 85 Guaranteed maximum price contracts 87 Competition 88 Contract 88 Advantages and disadvantages 89 Use 89 12 Management and Construction Management Contracts 90 Payment and cost control 90 Selection and appointment of the contractor 92 Contract conditions 93 Contract administration 94 Professional advisers 94 Advantages and disadvantages 95 Advantages 95 Disadvantages 95 Construction management 96 Use 97 Programme 97 13 Design and Build Contracts 99 The contract 100 Where to use DB (and when not to do so) 101 Managing the design process 102 Novation 103 Evaluation of submissions 104 Post-contract administration 104 Financial administration 104 Programme 105 Advantages and disadvantages 106 Advantages 106 Disadvantages 106 14 Continuity Contracts 107 Serial contracting 108 Purpose and use 109 Operation 109 Continuation contracts 110 Purpose and use 110 Operation 111 Term contracts 112 Purpose and use 112 JCT Measured Term Contract 113 Operation 113 15 Partnering 115 A definition 115 When to adopt a partnering approach 117 The agreement 117 JCT Partnering Charter 118 JCT Framework Agreement 118 JCT constructing excellence 119 The partnering workshop 119 The benefits 119 The risks 120 Future of partnering 121 16 EU Procurement 122 Introduction 122 The scope of procurement law 123 The general principles 123 Procedures 124 Key principles 124 Evaluating tenderers 124 Evaluating tenders 125 Framework agreements 126 Contract change 127 Cancellation of the process 127 Information obligations debrief and disclosure 127 Commencing proceedings 128 Remedies 128 Complaints to the EU commission and other challenge procedures 129 Tendering contracts 130 Notes 130 Part III Preparing For And Inviting Tenders 131 17 Procedure from Brief to Tender 133 Initial brief 133 Developing the brief 133 Feasibility stage 134 Sketch scheme 134 Costs 135 Procurement 135 Detailed design 136 Programming 137 Design team meetings 138 Drawings 138 Specifications 139 Bills of quantities 140 Specialist sub-contractors and suppliers 140 Quality assurance 140 Obtaining tenders 141 18 Pre-Contract Cost Control 142 Introduction 142 The purpose of pre-contract cost control 142 Framework for pre-contract estimating 143 Order of cost estimate 145 Information used to prepare an order of cost estimate 146 Treatment of on-costs and other costs in order of cost estimates 147 Presenting an order of cost estimate 148 Cost plans 149 Treatment of on-costs and other costs in cost plans 151 Presenting a cost plan 153 Challenges associated with the production of cost plans 155 Cash flow 155 Whole life costs 156 Summary 158 Notes 158 19 Drawings and Schedules 159 The language of drawing 159 The changing role of drawings and documents 159 Quality 162 Standards 162 Quality manuals 162 Quality procedure codes 163 Quality review 164 Types, sizes and layout of drawings 164 Size 165 Layout and revision 165 Scale 166 Nature and sequence of drawing production 167 RIBA Plan of Work 2013 167 Drawings for SBC contracts 167 Drawings for design and build or management contracts 168 Design intent information 169 Computer aided design 170 Drawing file formats and translation 171 Project extranets 171 Contents of drawings 174 Survey plan 174 Site plan, layout and drainage 175 General arrangement 175 Elevations of all parts of the building 177 Descriptive sections 177 Ceiling plans at all floor levels 177 Construction details (scale 1 : 20 and 1 : 10) 177 Large-scale details (scale 1 : 10 and 1 : 15) 178 Schedules 178 Drawings and schedules for records 179 Notes 184 20 Specifications 185 The use of specifications 185 Specifying by prescription 187 Specifying by performance 187 Specifying by description 187 Specification writing 188 Decide on format 188 Collect information 194 Input information 194 Check and test 195 Deliver 195 BIM 196 21 Building Information Modelling 197 The BIM revolution – what is BIM, and who/what is it for? 197 The role of government and its BIM strategy 199 The levels of BIM adoption 202 The BIM journey 203 Plan of work, deliverables and work stages 203 Loading the model: language and libraries 205 Bringing different software programmes together – the search for interoperability 206 Operation and maintenance 207 Terms of appointment and changes to other business practices 208 Level 3 and the future 209 Epilogue 209 Notes 210 22 Bills of Quantities 211 Tender and contract document 211 The wider role 211 Basic information 212 Preliminaries 212 Preambles 213 Measured works 213 Formats 214 23 Sub-contractors 220 Introduction 220 Specialist sub-contractors 221 Design by the sub-contractor 221 The SBC and sub-contract agreements 222 SBC provisions under the main contract 223 24 Obtaining Tenders 224 Introduction 224 Tender list 225 Preliminary enquiry 226 Tender documents and invitation 226 Tender period 227 Tender compliance 227 Late tenders 228 Opening tenders 228 Examination and adjustment of the priced document 228 Negotiated reduction of a tender 229 Notification of results 229 Tender analysis 230 E-Tendering 230 Part IV Contract Administration 231 25 Placing the Contract 233 Preparing and signing the contract documents 233 Sectional completion 234 Contractor’s designed portion 234 Executing the contract 235 Performance bonds and parent company guarantees 236 Collateral warranties 236 Third party rights 240 Issue of documents 241 Insurances 242 26 Meetings 245 Initial meeting 245 Introductions 246 Factors affecting the carrying out of the works 246 Programme 247 Sub-contractors and suppliers 248 Lines of communication 248 Financial matters 248 Procedure to be followed at subsequent meetings 250 Contractor’s meetings 251 Employer’s meetings 251 27 Site Duties 256 The architect on site 256 The architect’s duty of inspection and supervision 258 Supervision and Inspection duties 258 Routine site visits 259 Consultants’ site visits 260 Inspections by statutory officials 260 Records and reports 261 Samples and testing 262 Considerate constructors scheme 263 Site safety 264 Health and Safety Policy 264 Fire precautions on site 267 Regulatory control 268 The Joint Fire Code 268 Means of escape 269 Fire-fighting equipment 270 Emergency plans 270 Providing information 270 28 Instructions 277 Architect/contract administrator’s instructions 277 Clerk of works’ directions 279 Format and distribution of instructions 279 29 Variations and Post-Contract Cost Control 281 Variations 281 Valuing variations 282 Dayworks 286 Cost control 287 30 Interim Payments 290 Introduction 290 Payments of pre-determined amounts at regular intervals 292 Pre-determined payments at pre-determined stages 293 Regular payments by detailed valuation 293 Certificates and payments under the SBC 293 The architect/contract administrator 293 The quantity surveyor 294 The employer 294 The contractor 295 Interim certificates under the SBC 296 Unfixed materials and goods on site 298 Unfixed materials and goods off site 298 Retention under the SBC 299 Payments to sub-contractors under the SBC 299 Value added tax 299 Valuation and certificate forms 300 31 Completion, Defects and the Final Account 304 Practical completion 304 Partial possession 307 Possession of the building 307 Defects and making good 308 Final account 309 Adjustment of the contract sum 309 Practical considerations 311 Final certificate 312 32 Delays and Disputes 316 Introduction 316 Delays caused by the contractor 317 Delays caused by the employer or his representatives 317 Delays caused by events outside the control of either party 318 Force majeure 319 Exceptionally adverse weather conditions 319 SBC procedure in the event of delay 320 Best endeavours 320 Notification of delay 321 New completion dates 321 Final adjustment 322 Duties and decisions 322 Reimbursement of loss and/or expense under the SBC 323 Liquidated damages 324 Disputes and dispute resolution 325 Mediation 326 Adjudication 326 Arbitration 330 Litigation 332 33 An Introduction to Sustainability in Construction 335 Sustainable development 335 Key concepts 335 The importance of the environment and the importance of energy 336 Sustainability in the built environment 336 The regulatory framework for construction 337 European Union developments 337 UK regulatory and policy developments 338 Assessing the sustainability of construction and buildings 340 UK building environmental assessment schemes and standards 341 International building environmental assessment schemes and standards 342 Author’s comment 343 Sustainable procurement 344 Key concepts 344 Guidance and standards 345 Other important issues 346 References 346 34 Future Trends 349 Global -v- local 349 Industry and corporate trends 351 Opportunities and challenges 352 BIM 352 Lean process and procedures 353 Knowledge management 353 Behaviours 354 Index 357

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe most up-to-date guide to easements and reversions written specifically for the land surveyor, Easements Relating to Title Examination and Land Surveying succinctly and incisively covers easements and reversions, written specifically for the land surveyor.Trade ReviewEasements and related incorporeal rights to land have become more critical than ever as land development brings access to the forefront of many property disputes. This book represents a comprehensive study of the complexities that may arise when dealing with roads (both public and private), railways and utility easements. The author has researched many topics not previously addressed in other texts of this genre. Basic principles are clearly laid out in the 14-chapters of the book, but this text goes beyond the basics to provide specific information on overlooked and emerging issues. Wilson's book includes discussion of easements created by a vote of a governing body, along with rolling easements and blanket easements. In addition, the tricky issues generated in subdivisions by a "common scheme" are considered. I was particularly pleased to read the section on the creation of railroad rights of way and the specific examples of language that will determine the rights conveyed. (Kristopher M. Kline, Reviewer & Author, October 2013)Table of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgments xiii 1 – Introduction 1 Rights and Interests in Land; Transfer of Ownership 1 Means of Transferring or Obtaining Title or Rights in Land 3 2 – Easements in General 8 Definition: What is an Easement? 8 Easement Terminology 20 Intermittent Easements 25 3 – Types of Easements 29 Right of Way 29 Right of Way Line 31 4 – Creation of Easements 45 Express Grant 46 Reservation or Exception 49 Agreement or Covenant 51 Implication 51 Estoppel 62 Prescription 63 Eminent Domain 72 Custom 74 Vote of a Governing Body 82 5 – Termination of Easements 85 Expiration 85 Release 86 Merger of Title 87 Abandonment 87 Estoppel 90 Prescription or Adverse Possession 90 Destruction of the Servient Estate 91 Cessation of Necessity 92 Eminent Domain 92 Frustration of Purpose 92 Overburden 94 6 – Easements and Descriptions 96 General 96 Void Instruments 100 Interpretation 102 Compilation 105 7 – Problem Easements 108 Undescribed Easements, Blanket Easements 108 Locating an Undefined Easement 109 Hidden Easements 110 Rolling Easements 111 Shore Road Allowances in Canada 114 The New Zealand Example 115 8 – The Process of Reversion 117 Estate in Reversion 117 Possibility of Reverter 117 9 – Reversion of Easements 122 Highways 124 Flowage 124 Railroads 125 10 – Reversion Relating to Highways (and to Other Types of Rights of Way) 127 Discontinuance or Abandonment 128 Actual Highway Abandonment 128 Procedure 129 Presumption of Law 131 Overcoming the Presumption 135 Abandonment, Strictly Speaking 137 11 – Rules of Locating and Defining Reversions 140 Basic Rule 141 Curved Street 142 Street Intersection 142 Ownership at Intersection with Reversion Only at One Street 143 Curved Street Intersection 144 Lots at an Angle Point in the Road 144 Lots Adjoining a Subdivision Boundary 145 Marginal Road 146 Special Cases 146 Problem Cases 147 Documents Indefinite or Not Available 150 Summary of Procedure for Determining Reversion Rights in Vacated Highways 151 12 – Easements and the Land Surveyor 153 ALTA/ACSM Standards 153 Right of Way as Boundary Line 154 Retracement of Right of Way Line 154 Retractment of Original Survey of Highway 155 Easement Plans are Land Surveys 155 Liability of the Land Surveyor 156 Easements are Similar to Other Land 156 13 – Easements and the Title Examiner (or Records Researcher) 157 Items Outside the Period of Search 157 Items Not on the Public Record at the Court House 157 Items to Be Shown by an Accurate Survey 158 Implied Dedication and/or Acceptance 158 What Insurance Does Not Cover 158 Liability of the Title Examiner 162 14 – Case Studies 164 Case #1 Who Owns the Road? 164 Case #2 Who Owns the Land? 168 Case #3 How Much Research is Necessary? 170 Case #4 How Wide is the Right of Way? 173 Case #5 When Does a Road Become Not a Road? 179 Case #6: Presumption of Ownership to Centerline Overcome 182 Case #7 Right of Way Created by Estoppel 187 Case #8 The Marginal Road, a Special Case 191 Case #9 Road Constructed Outside of Layout 194 Case #10 Reversion of a Cemetery Lot 196 Case #11 Determining Title to Land Parcel When a Road is Relocated 205 Case #12 Easement by Agreement Resulting in Cessation of Necessity 214 Case #13 Road Shown on Subdivision Plat Not a Public Way 218 Case #14 Railroad as Abutter Not Receiving One-Half of Vacated Highway 225 Case #15 Overburdening an Easement Causing Its Termination 231 Case #16 Major Expansion of Development Not Causing an Overburden 238 Case #17 Proprietor’s Way 242 Case #18 Easement by Custom 249 References 259 For Further Reference 260 Glossary 264 Index 281

Read more less

Book SynopsisUp-to-date edition of Computational Geomechanics, broadening the focus of the first edition to include more applications This extended second edition of the highly successful book Computational Geomechanics with special reference to Earthquake Engineering by Zienkiewicz O.C. , Chan A.H.C. , Pastor M. , Schrefler B.A.Table of ContentsPreface 1 Introduction and the Concept of Effective Stress 1.1 PRELIMINARY REMARKS 1.2 THE NATURE OF SOILS AND OTHER POROUS MEDIA: WHY A FULL DEFORMATION ANALYSIS IS THE ONLY VIABLE APPROACH FOR PREDICTION 1.3 CONCEPTS OF EFFECTIVE STRESS IN SATURATED OR PARTIALLY SATURATED MEDIA REFERENCES 16 2 Equations Governing the Dynamic, Soil–Pore Fluid, Interaction 2.1 GENERAL REMARKS ON THE PRESENTATION 2.2 FULLY SATURATED BEHAVIOUR WITH A SINGLE PORE FLUID (WATER) 2.3 PARTIALLY SATURATED BEHAVIOUR WITH AIR PRESSURE NEGLECTED (pa = 0) 2.4 PARTIALLY SATURATED BEHAVIOUR WITH AIR FLOW CONSIDERED (pa ≥ 0) 2.5 ALTERNATIVE DERIVATION OF THE GOVERNING EQUATION (OF SECTION 2.2–2.4) BASED ON THE HYBRID MIXTURE THEORY 2.6 CONCLUDING REMARKS REFERENCES 40 3 Finite Element Discretization and Solution of the Governing Equations 3.1 THE PROCEDURE OF DISCRETIZATION BY THE FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 3.2 u-p DISCRETIZATION FOR A GENERAL GEOMECHANICS FINITE ELEMENT CODE 3.3 THEORY: TENSORIAL FORM OF THE EQUATIONS 3.4 CONCLUSIONS REFERENCES 25 4 Constitutive Relations – Plasticity 4.1 INTRODUCTION 4.2 THE GENERAL FRAMEWORK OF PLASTICITY 4.3 CRITICAL STATE MODELS 4.4 GENERALIZED PLASTICITY MODELLING 4.5 ALTERNATIVE ADVANCED MODELS 4.6 CLOSURE REFERENCES 138 5 Some Special Aspects of Analysis and Formulation: Radiation Boundaries, Adaptive Finite Element Requirement and Incompressible Behaviour 5.1 INTRODUCTION 5.2 FAR FIELD SOLUTIONS IN QUASI-STATIC PROBLEMS 5.3 INPUT FOR EARTHQUAKE ANALYSIS AND RADIATION BOUNDARY 5.4 ADAPTIVE REFINEMENT FOR IMPROVED ACCURACY AND THE CAPTURE OF LOCALIZED PHENOMENA 5.5 REGULARIZATION THRUOGH GRADIENT DEPENDENT PLASTICITY 5.6 STABILIZATION OF COMPUTATION FOR NEARLY INCOMPRESSIBLE BEHAVIOUR WITH MIXED INTERPOLATION 5.7 CONCLUSIONS REFERENCES 60 6 Examples for Static, Consolidation and Hydraulic Fracturing Problems 6.1 INTRODUCTION 6.2 STATIC PROBLEMS 6.3 SEEPAGE 6.4 CONSOLIDATION 6.5 HYDRAULIC FRACTURING: FRACTURE IN A FULLY SATURATED POROUS MEDIUM DRIVEN BY INCREASE IN PORE FLUID PRESSURE 6.6 CONCLUSIONS REFERENCES 59 7 Validation of Prediction by Centrifuge 7.1 INTRODUCTION 7.2 SCALING LAWS OF CNTRIFUGE MODELLING 7.3 CENTRIFUGE TEST OF A DYKE SIMILAR TO A PROTOTYPE RETAINING DYKE IN VENEZUELA 7.4 THE VELACS PROJECT 7.5 COMPARISON WITH THE VELACS CENTRIFUGE EXPERIMENT 7.6 CENTRIFUGE TEST OF A RETAING WALL 7.7 CONCLUSIONS REFERENCES 26 8 Applications to unsaturated problems 8.1 INTRODUCTION 8.2 ISOTHERMAL DRAINAGE OF WATER FROM A VERTICAL COLUMN OF SAND 8.3 AIR STORAGE MODELLING IN AN AQUIFER 8.4 COMPARISON OF CONSOLIDATION AND DYNAMIC RESULTS BETWEEN SMALL STRAIN AND FINITE DEFORMATION FORMULATION 8.5 DYNAMIC ANALYSIS WITH A FULL TWO PHASE FLOW SOLUTION OF A PARTIALLY SATURATED SOIL COLUMN SUBJECTED TO A STEP LOAD 8.6 COMPACTION AND LAND SUBSIDENCE ANALYSIS RELATED TO THE EXPLOITATION OF GAS RESERVOIRS 8.7 INITIATION OF LANDSLIDE IN PARTIALLY SATURATED SOIL 8.8 CONCLUSIONS REFERENCES 44 9 Prediction Application and Back Analysis to Earthquake Engineering – Basic Concepts, Seismic Input, Frequency and Time Domain Analysis 9.1 INTRODUCTION 9.2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES OF SOIL 9.3 CHARACTERISTICS OF EQUIVALENT LINEAR METHOD 9.4 PORT ISLAND LIQUEFACTION ASSESSMENT USING THE CYCLE-VISE EQUIVALENT LINEAR METHOD 9.5 PORT ISLAND LIQUEFACTION USING ONE COLUMN NONLINEAR ANALYSIS IN MULTIDIRECTION 9.6 SIMULATION OF LIQUEFACTION BEHAVIOUR DURING NIIGATA EARTHQUAKE TO ILLUSTRATE THE EFFECT OF INITIAL SHEAR STRESS 9.7 LARGE SCALE LIQUEFACTION EXPERIMENT USING THREE DIMENSIONL NONLINEAR ANALYSIS 9.8 LOWER SAN FERNANDO DAM FAILURE REFERENCES 44 10 Beyond Failure. Modelling of Fluidized Geomaterials: Fast Catastrophic Landslides 10.1 INTRODUCTION 10.2 MATHEMATICAL MODEL: A HIERARCHICAL SET OF MODELS FOR THE COUPLED BEHAVIOUR OF FLUIDIZED GEOMATERIALS 10.3 BEHAVIOUR OF FLUIDIZED SOILS: RHEOLOGICAL MODELLING ALTERNATIVES 10.4 NUMERICAL MODELLING: 2 PHASE DEPTH INTEGRATED COUPLED MODELS 10.5 EXAMPLES AND APPLICATIONS 10.6 CONCLUSIONS REFERENCES 48 (500)

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe repair, renovation and replacement of highway infrastructure, along with the provision of new highways, is a core element of civil engineering, so this book covers basic theory and practice in sufficient depth to provide a solid grounding to students of civil engineering and trainee practitioners.Table of ContentsPreface xii Sources xiv 1 The Transportation Planning Process 1 1.1 Why are highways so important? 1 1.2 The administration of highway schemes 1 1.3 Sources of funding 2 1.4 Highway planning 3 1.5 The decision making process in highway and transport planning 9 1.6 Summary 14 1.7 References 15 2 Forecasting Future Traffic Flows 16 2.1 Basic principles of traffic demand analysis 16 2.2 Demand modelling 17 2.3 Land use models 19 2.4 Trip generation 20 2.5 Trip distribution 24 2.6 Modal split 35 2.7 Traffic assignment 40 2.8 A full example of the four stage transportation modelling process 46 2.9 Concluding comments 52 2.10 References 52 3 Scheme Appraisal for Highway Projects 53 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 Economic appraisal of highway schemes 54 3.3 CBA 55 3.4 Payback analysis 68 3.5 Environmental appraisal of highway schemes 70 3.6 The New Approach to Appraisal 76 3.7 NATA Refresh (Department for Transport, 2008) 82 3.8 Summary 83 3.9 References 84 4 Basic Elements of Highway Traffic Analysis 85 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Surveying road traffic 85 4.3 Journey speed and travel time surveys 91 4.4 Speed, flow and density of a stream of traffic 96 4.5 Headway distributions in highway traffic flow 103 4.6 Queuing analysis 109 4.7 References 119 5 Determining the Capacity of a Highway 120 5.1 Introduction 120 5.2 The ‘level of service’ approach using Transportation Research Board (1994) 120 5.3 Methodology for analysing the capacity and level of service of highways within Transportation Research Board (2010) 134 5.4 The UK approach for rural roads 159 5.5 The UK approach for urban roads 162 5.6 Expansion of 12 and 16 h traffic counts into AADT flows 165 5.7 Concluding comments 167 5.8 References 168 6 The Design of Highway Intersections 169 6.1 Introduction 169 6.2 Deriving DRFs from baseline traffic figures 170 6.3 Major/minor priority intersections 171 6.4 Roundabout intersections 185 6.5 Basics of traffic signal control: Optimisation and delays 198 6.6 Concluding remarks 218 6.7 References 218 7 Geometric Alignment and Design 220 7.1 Basic physical elements of a highway 220 7.2 Design speed and stopping and overtaking sight distances 222 7.3 Geometric parameters dependent on design speed 231 7.4 Sight distances 232 7.5 Horizontal alignment 236 7.6 Vertical alignment 248 7.7 References 262 8 Highway Pavement Materials and Loading 263 8.1 Introduction 263 8.2 Soils at subformation level 265 8.3 Traffic loading 270 8.4 Materials within flexible pavements 275 8.5 Materials in rigid pavements 282 8.6 References 286 9 Structural Design of Highway Pavements 287 9.1 Introduction 287 9.2 Pavement components: Terminology 288 9.3 Foundation design 290 9.4 Pavement design 301 9.5 References 313 10 Pavement Maintenance 315 10.1 Introduction 315 10.2 Pavement deterioration 316 10.3 Compiling information on the pavement’s condition 317 10.4 Forms of maintenance 328 10.5 References 332 11 The Highway Engineer and the Development Process 334 11.1 Introduction 334 11.2 Transport assessments 335 11.3 Travel plans 341 11.4 Road Safety Audits 346 11.5 References 355 12 Defining Sustainability in Transportation Engineering 357 12.1 Introduction 357 12.2 Social sustainability 357 12.3 Environmental sustainability 357 12.4 Economic sustainability 358 12.5 The four pillars of sustainable transport planning 358 12.6 How will urban areas adapt to the need for increased sustainability? 360 12.7 The role of the street in sustainable transport planning 361 12.8 Public transport 371 12.9 Using performance indicators to ensure a more balanced transport policy 374 12.10 A sustainable parking policy 392 12.11 References 395 Index 397

Read more less

Book SynopsisWhen all parties involved in the construction process fully understand their roles and are able to anticipate potential points of conflict, disputes and delays will be minimised. The Employer's and Engineer's Guide to the FIDIC Conditions of Contract sets out the essential administrative requirements of a FIDIC based contract by reference to the FIDIC 1999 Red Book. The obligations and duties of the Employer and the Engineer are identified and discussed. Potential pitfalls are highlighted and likely consequences pointed out. The importance of the Employer's role in the preparation of tenders, which fully reflect his requirements and duties and obligations arising in the execution of the works, is emphasised. The key role of the Engineer in the effective administration of contracts after award is examined and commentary provided. Included in the guide are a number of appendices, including model letters which will be of value to less experienced stafTable of ContentsPreface vii Acknowledgements and Dedication xi Chapter 1 The Employer and the FIDIC Conditions of Contract for Construction (CONS) – ‘The Red Book’ 1 Chapter 2 The Engineer and the FIDIC Conditions of Contract for Construction (CONS) – ‘The Red Book’ 71 Appendices 145 Appendix A Conditions of Contract for Plant and Design-Build 1999 (P & DB) ‘The Yellow Book’ 147 Appendix B Conditions of Contract for EPC/Turnkey Projects (EPCT) ‘The Silver Book’ 150 Appendix C Other FIDIC Publications 151 Appendix D Employer’s Claims under a CONS Contract 153 Appendix E Contractor’s Claims under a CONS Contract 154 Appendix F Preparation of Interim Payment Certificates 156 Appendix G Model Form for Submissions to the Engineer for Approval and/or Consent 160 Appendix H Model Form of Engineer’s Order for Varied Works 161 Appendix I Model Form of Daywork/Daily Record Sheets 162 Appendix J Model Letters for Use by the Employer 164 Appendix K Model Letters for Use by the Engineer 175 Introduction to Indexes 205 Index of Sub-Clauses (FIDIC System) 206 Index of Sub-Clauses (sorted according to FIDIC Clause numbering system) 212

Read more less

Book SynopsisBuilding services refers to the equipment and systems that contribute to controlling the internal environment to make it safe and comfortable to occupy.Table of ContentsPreface x About the Author xiii Introduction 1 Evolvement of building services engineering 2 Range of building services engineering systems in a building 3 Unique features of building services 4 Professionalisation of building services engineers 6 Part One The operating context 9 1 The operating environment 11 1.1 Organisational arrangement 13 Ownership arrangement 13 Scope of services 14 Integration with other entities 15 Types of projects by building sector 15 Geographical operating span 16 1.2 The internal environment 16 Human capital 17 Structural capital 19 Relationship capital 21 Summary 22 2 The external environment 23 2.1 Competitor analysis 24 2.2 PESTLE analysis 25 Political drivers 25 Economic drivers 26 Social drivers 26 Technical drivers 27 Legal drivers 28 Environmental drivers 29 Summary 30 3 Engaging building services engineers 31 3.1 Types of commissions 32 Design commissions 32 Survey commissions 33 Advisory commissions 34 Witnessing commissions 36 Construction administration 36 3.2 Contracts 36 Allocation of design responsibility 37 Provision of third party information 38 Warranties 39 Bonds 40 Insurances 40 Partnering 41 3.3 Fees 41 3.4 Getting work 43 Responding to enquiries 44 Summary 45 4 Stakeholder interfaces 46 4.1 The client team 48 4.2 Enforcing authorities 50 Building control 50 Local planning departments 51 Non-departmental public bodies 52 4.3 The design team 52 Architects 52 Engineers 55 Quantity surveyors 56 Specialists 57 4.4 The construction team 60 Main contractors 60 Subcontractors 61 Suppliers 61 4.5 Utility service providers 61 4.6 Non-contractual interfaces 63 Summary 65 Reference 65 5 Professional ethics 66 Summary 68 Part Two Technical issues associated with building services design 69 6 Design criteria 71 6.1 External design criteria 72 Meteorological design criteria 75 Microclimates 81 Pollution and contaminants 83 6.2 Interior design criteria 88 Thermal comfort 90 Visual conditions 95 Acoustic conditions 100 Electromagnetic and electrostatic environment 101 Life safety criteria 101 Vertical transportation 102 Specialist services 103 Connectivity 103 Controlled outdoor environment 103 6.3 Voluntary codes and practices 105 Incentive schemes 106 Eco-labelling 106 Summary 107 Reference 107 7 System descriptions 108 7.1 Public utility services connections 110 Electricity 111 Gas 112 Water 112 Information and broadcast communications 113 7.2 Ventilation 114 7.3 Heating 118 7.4 Cooling 120 7.5 Air-conditioning 121 7.6 Water systems 123 Hot and cold domestic water services 123 Irrigation systems 126 Fire water systems 126 Wastewater removal systems 127 7.7 Gas systems 129 7.8 Electrical distribution 130 Source of supply 130 Transmission system 130 Earthing and bonding system 133 Electrical supplies for mechanical, public health and other equipment 134 7.9 Artificial lighting 134 External lighting 136 7.10 Controls 136 7.11 Lightning protection system 138 7.12 Fire detection and alarm system 139 7.13 Smoke and fire control systems 140 7.14 Security systems 143 Security lighting 143 Access control system 143 Closed circuit television 144 Alarms 144 Patrol stations 145 7.15 Structured wiring system 145 7.16 Broadcast communications technology systems 146 7.17 Mobile telephony systems 146 7.18 Audio, visual, audiovisual and information systems 147 7.19 Facilities for the disabled 149 7.20 Vertical transportation 150 Summary 150 8 Off-site manufacturing 151 Summary 152 Part Three The design management process 153 9 Design execution 155 9.1 Project stages 157 Preparation 157 Design 158 Pre-construction 168 Construction stage 171 Handover and close-out 180 In use 181 9.2 Design management issues 184 Design responsibility matrix 184 Hierarchy of legislation and standards 185 Stakeholder analysis 185 Site visits 186 Health and safety responsibilities 187 Life cycle considerations 188 Managing ff&e requirements 190 Areas of potential overlapping responsibilities 190 Use of software 196 Summary 196 10 Risk management 198 Risk identification 199 Risk evaluation and quantification 201 Risk sharing, managing and monitoring 201 Summary 202 References 202 11 Information management 203 Project related information 204 Reference information 204 Knowledge management 204 Summary 206 12 Value management 207 Summary 210 13 Planning management 211 Summary 214 Reference 214 14 Commercial management 215 Procuremant routes 215 Cost management 216 Bills of quantities 218 Contract variations, claims and disputes 219 Summary 219 15 Quality management 220 Summary 221 16 Performance management 222 Issues with performance measurement systems 224 Summary 225 Part Four Special buildings 227 17 Special buildings 229 17.1 Commercial kitchens 229 17.2 Hospitals and healthcare facilities 234 17.3 Data centres 241 17.4 Shopping centres 244 17.5 Sports facilities 245 17.6 Hotels 246 17.7 Educational buildings 248 Index 251

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe management of construction projects is a wide ranging and challenging discipline in an increasingly international industry, facing continual challenges and demands for improvements in safety, in quality and cost control, and in the avoidance of contractual disputes.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors x Preface xi 1 Organising Construction Processes in Construction Companies 1 1.1 Educational outcomes 1 1.2 The facility life-cycle 1 1.3 Production by projects 4 1.4 The construction industry 6 1.5 Construction companies 9 1.6 Organisational structure of a construction company 13 1.7 The construction site within the construction company 17 References 18 Further reading 19 2 Contract Documents 20 2.1 Educational outcomes 20 2.2 Contract documents 20 2.3 Type of documents 23 2.4 Bidding documents 26 2.5 Contractor tender or bid 29 2.6 Estimating process 29 2.7 Contract agreement 33 2.8 Bill of quantities 35 2.9 General and particular conditions 37 2.10 Technical specifications 41 2.11 Contract drawings 43 2.12 Other documents 46 References 48 Further reading 49 3 Procurement Approaches 50 3.1 Educational outcomes 50 3.2 Introduction to procurement 50 3.3 Traditional procurement 53 3.4 Design-build arrangements 55 3.5 Management contracting 56 3.6 Construction management 58 3.7 Relational contracting 59 3.8 Public concessions and public-private partnerships 62 3.9 Organisation modelling 65 3.10 The project manager team 66 References 67 Further reading 68 4 Communications, Information and Documentation 69 4.1 Educational outcomes 69 4.2 Importance of communications, documentation and information 69 4.3 Communications on site 71 4.4 Daily logs 74 4.5 Reports 74 4.6 Construction diary 78 4.7 Meetings 79 4.8 Photographs and videos on site 80 4.9 Information and documentation flow in construction 81 4.10 Information and communications technologies (ICT) 82 4.11 Building information modelling (BIM) 87 4.12 Electronic business and project administration 89 References 93 Further reading 94 5 Site Setup and Construction Processes 95 5.1 Educational outcomes 95 5.2 Site constraints 95 5.3 Equipment constraints 98 5.4 Material storage and handling 99 5.5 Temporary facilities and auxiliary works 100 5.6 Construction jobsite offices 101 5.7 Security on construction sites 103 5.8 Internal organisation of the construction works 105 5.9 General approach to construction processes 108 5.10 Temporary works 110 References 112 Further reading 113 6 Machinery and Equipment 114 6.1 Educational outcomes 114 6.2 The need of machinery and equipment 114 6.3 Selection of machinery and equipment 115 6.3.1 Conditioning factors 115 6.3.2 Methods used to select the machine in relation to economic profitability 116 6.4 Calculation of costs 118 6.4.1 Fixed and variable hourly costs 118 6.4.2 Equipment ownership costs 119 6.4.3 Operating costs 124 6.5 Maintenance 127 References 129 Further reading 130 7 Productivity and Performance 131 7.1 Educational outcomes 131 7.2 Productivity and performance 131 7.3 Work study 134 7.4 Method study 135 7.5 Work measurement 136 7.6 Equipment performance 141 7.7 Assessment of production/productivity 144 7.8 Benchmarking and construction productivity improvement 145 References 149 Further reading 150 8 Quality, Innovation and Knowledge Management 151 8.1 Educational outcomes 151 8.2 Quality, innovation and knowledge 151 8.3 Quality control 153 8.4 Quality assurance in accordance with ISO 9001 154 8.5 Innovation in construction projects 156 8.6 Knowledge management in construction 162 8.7 Standards and procedures 164 8.8 Certificates and technical approvals 165 References 167 Further reading 168 9 Health and Safety Management 169 9.1 Educational outcomes 169 9.2 Introduction to occupational health and safety 169 9.3 The risk–accident cycle 170 9.4 Regulatory context 171 9.5 Agents involved 173 9.6 Business context 174 9.7 On-site prevention 174 9.8 Health and safety plan 177 9.9 Management of the health and safety plan 178 9.10 Incidents and accidents during construction 184 References 186 Further reading 187 10 Environmental and Sustainability Management 188 10.1 Educational outcomes 188 10.2 Environmental impact assessment 188 10.3 Basic legislation for environmental impact assessment 190 10.4 Environmental management tools 191 10.5 Environmental management at the construction site 192 10.6 Construction and demolition (C&D) waste management 193 10.7 C&D reduction, reuse and recycling 196 10.8 Environmental monitoring plan 198 10.9 Environmental impacts at the construction site 199 10.10 Sustainability in construction 200 10.11 Green buildings and certifications 201 References 203 Further reading 204 11 Supply Chain Management 205 11.1 Educational outcomes 205 11.2 Introduction to supply chain management 205 11.3 The construction supply chain 207 11.4 Pros and cons of subcontracting in the construction industry 209 11.5 Procurement and management of subcontracts 211 11.6 Purchase of materials and equipment 213 11.7 Coordination of suppliers and subcontractors 215 11.8 Lean construction 216 References 219 Further reading 220 12 Resources Management 221 12.1 Educational outcomes 221 12.2 Construction planning 221 12.3 Work breakdown structure 224 12.4 Scheduling of activities 226 12.5 Duration of activities 227 12.6 Resources limitations and leveling 229 12.7 Bar chart or gantt diagram 230 12.8 Network diagrams 232 12.8.1 Historical introduction 232 12.8.2 Graphical representation 233 12.8.3 Calculating the critical path 234 12.8.4 Probability applications 236 12.8.5 The precedence diagramming method 237 12.8.6 Critical chain 239 12.8.7 Commercial software 240 12.9 Line of balance 241 12.10 Last planner system 242 12.11 Time control 246 12.12 Cost assessment and control 247 12.13 Earned value management 250 12.14 Value engineering 252 12.15 Risk management 254 References 258 Further reading 260 13 Progress Payment 261 13.1 Educational outcomes 261 13.2 Introduction to progress payment 261 13.3 Lump sum contract 263 13.4 Unit price contract 264 13.5 Cost plus contract 267 13.6 Incentive contract 268 13.7 Percentage of construction fee contract 269 13.8 Progress payment procedures 269 References 272 Further reading 273 14 Claims and Change Management 274 14.1 Educational outcomes 274 14.2 Introduction to claims and change management 274 14.3 Definition of claim 275 14.4 Causes of claims 277 14.5 Types of claims 280 14.6 Claim management process 281 14.7 Claim avoidance practices 287 14.8 Management of the change process 288 References 291 Further reading 292 15 Project Closeout 293 15.1 Educational outcomes 293 15.2 The closeout process 293 15.3 Completion and closing of the construction project 294 15.4 Inspection and tests 297 15.5 Handover 299 15.6 Occupation 300 15.7 Final documentation 301 15.8 Post-project review 303 References 307 Further reading 307 Index 309

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis handbook addresses problems facing the engineer when preparing to build, both during the contract bidding phase and after a contract has been concluded. It offers clear guidelines for planning the resources and machinery on site, as well as the safe positioning of roads, cranes, storage and temporary buildings.Trade Review“Despite these reservations, however, I thoroughly recommend the book for those on a path to becoming Project Managers or those simply wishing to improve their knowledge of the subject.” (The Structural Engineer, 1 December 2013 Table of ContentsList of Figures viii List of Tables x About the Authors xi Preface xiii Introduction 1 Chapter 1: Initial data 5 1.1 The project (design) documentation 6 1.2 The bill of quantities and the bill of activities 7 1.3 Job descriptions and specifications 7 1.4 The contract conditions set out in the bidding invitation documents 8 1.5 The report of the construction site inspection 8 Chapter 2: Outline of site management planning in the bidding stage 15 2.1 The goal 16 2.2 The explanatory note 16 2.3 Construction site layout 19 2.4 The construction time schedule 21 2.5 Cost estimation of temporary works and construction site set-up 23 Chapter 3: Outline of site management after contract signature 28 3.1 The goal 29 3.2 Initial data 29 3.3 Construction site layout 30 3.4 Construction scheduling 35 3.5 Calculation of site work quantities and estimate of costs 46 Chapter 4: Suggestions for choosing construction cranes 51 4.1 General 52 4.2 Selection and positioning of tower cranes 53 4.3 Selection and impact areas of mobile cranes 77 4.4 Cranes working near overhead power lines 91 4.5 Hoist danger area 94 4.6 Operating cranes near buildings in use 95 4.7 Restrictions on crane work 97 4.8 Working in the danger area 98 Chapter 5: Suggestions for calculating resource requirements 99 5.1 Construction site temporary roads 100 5.2 Construction site storage 105 5.3 Temporary buildings 111 5.4 Temporary water supply 115 5.5 Temporary heating supply 116 5.6 Temporary power supply 121 5.7 Construction site lighting 126 5.8 Construction site transport 127 5.9 Load take up devices 130 5.10 Construction site fencing 135 Chapter 6: On-site safety requirements 137 6.1 General basics and responsibilities 138 6.2 The duties of building contractors 141 6.3 The obligations and rights of the labourer 144 6.4 Ensuring safety on the construction site 146 Chapter 7: Requirements for work equipment 155 7.1 General requirements 156 7.2 Mobile work equipment 158 7.3 Lifting devices 160 7.4 Dangers from energy 161 7.5 The usage of work equipment 163 7.6 Usage of work equipment for temporary work at height 164 7.7 Work with flammable and explosive materials 168 Chapter 8: Work healthcare 169 8.1 Allowable physical effort 170 8.2 The usage of personal protective equipment 170 8.3 Welfare facilities and first-aid 171 Appendix: Construction site layout symbols 173 Bibliography 177 Index 178

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers quantity surveyors, engineers, building surveyors and contractors clear guidance on how to recognise and avoid measurement risk.Table of ContentsPreface xix Author Biography xxiii Acknowledgements xxv Glossary xxvii Addendum xxxi Part 1 Measurement in Construction 1 1 The Role and Purpose of Measurement 3 1.2 The end of measurement or a new beginning? 5 1.3 How's your Latin? 7 1.4 Standardised measurement 10 1.5 Measurement: skill or art? 16 2 Measurement and Design 21 2.1 Introduction 22 2.2 Design 22 2.3 BIM 26 2.4 BIM quantities 32 3 Measurement Conventions 39 3.1 Traditional conventions 39 3.2 Modern conventions 46 3.3 B IM conventions 57 4 Approaches to Measurement 63 4.1 Measurement skills 64 4.2 Uses of measurement 64 4.3 Pareto principle 65 4.4 Measurement documentation 66 4.5 Formal bills of quantities 66 4.6 Formal quasi' bills of quantities 68 4.7 Formal 'operational' bills of quantities 77 4.8 Informal bills of quantities 78 4.9 Quantities risk transfer 81 4.10 Activity schedules 82 4.11 Price lists 94 4.12 Contract sum analyses 95 4.13 Schedules of actual cost 96 Part 2 Measurement Risk 103 5 New Rules of Measurement: NRM1 105 5.1 New rules: New approach 105 5.2 The status of NRM1 106 5.3 Structure of NRM1 108 5.4 Design cost control: Introduction 110 5.5 Design cost control: Techniques 113 5.6 Order of cost estimates 121 5.7 Cost planning 132 5.8 Part 4: Tabulated rules of measurement for elemental cost planning 148 6 New Rules of Measurement: NRM2 161 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 What is NRM2? 164 6.3 Status of NRM2 165 6.4 NRM2 structure 166 6.5 Part 1: general 167 6.6 Definitions 169 6.7 Part 2: rules for detailed measurement of building works 178 6.8 Codification of bills of quantities 203 6.9 Part 3: Tabulated rules of measurement for building works 222 6.10 Tabulated work sections 235 7 Civil Engineering Standard Method of Measurement 265 7.1 Contract neutral 265 7.2 National standard neutral 266 7.3 Section 1: Definitions 266 7.4 Section 2: General principles 270 7.5 Section 3: Application of the work classification 273 7.6 Section 4: Coding and numbering of items 278 7.7 Section 5: Preparation of the Bill of Quantities 281 7.8 Section 6: Completion, pricing and use of the Bill of Quantities 293 7.9 Section 7: Method-related charges 295 7.10 Work classification 301 7.11 Class A: General items 302 7.12 Class B: Ground investigation 306 7.13 Class C: Geotechnical and other specialist processes 308 7.14 Class D: Demolition and site clearance 311 7.15 Class E: Earthworks 313 7.16 Class F: In situ concrete 323 7.17 Class G: Concrete ancillaries 326 7.18 Class H: Precast concrete 330 7.19 Class I: Pipework – pipes 332 7.20 Class J: Pipework – fittings and valves 338 7.21 Class K: Pipework – Manholes and Pipework Ancillaries 339 7.22 Class L: Pipework – supports and protection, ancillaries to laying and excavation 344 7.23 Class M: Structural metalwork 347 7.24 Class N: Miscellaneous metalwork 348 7.25 Class O: Timber 348 7.26 Class P: Piles 349 7.27 Class Q: Piling ancillaries 351 7.28 Class R: Roads and pavings 352 7.29 Class S: Rail track 354 7.30 Class T: Tunnels 356 7.31 Class U: Brickwork, blockwork and masonry 358 7.32 Class V: Painting 358 7.33 Class W: Waterproofing 359 7.34 Class X: Miscellaneous work 359 7.35 Class Y: Sewer and water main renovation and ancillary works 360 7.36 Class Z: Simple building works incidental to civil engineering works 361 8 Method of Measurement for Highway Works 363 8.1 Manual of Contract Documents for Highway Works 363 8.2 Design manual for roads and bridges 368 8.3 Highways England procurement 368 8.4 Measurement implications of procurement choices 370 8.5 Contractual arrangements 372 8.6 Specification for Highway Works 375 8.7 Method of Measurement for Highway Works 378 8.8 Item descriptions 391 8.9 Contractor design 396 8.10 Measurement and billing of contractor-designed elements 401 8.11 Measurement of highway works 409 8.12 Series 100: Preliminaries 409 8.13 Series 600: Earthworks 412 8.14 Series 500: Drainage and service ducts 429 8.15 Series 1600: Piling and embedded retaining walls 441 8.16 Series 1700: Structural concrete 443 8.17 Series 2700: Accommodation works, works for statutory undertakers, provisional sums and prime cost items 445 8.18 Other works 446 9 Principles of Measurement (International) 449 9.1 Introduction 449 9.2 Section GP: General Principles 452 9.3 Section A: General requirements 457 9.4 Section B: Site work 463 9.5 Section C: Concrete work 477 9.6 Section D: Masonry 479 9.7 Section E: Metalwork 480 9.8 Section F: Woodwork 480 9.9 Section G: Thermal and moisture protection 481 9.10 Section H: Doors and windows 481 9.11 Section J: Finishes 481 9.12 Section K: Accessories 482 9.13 Section L: Equipment 482 9.14 Section M: Furnishings 482 9.15 Section N: Special construction 482 9.16 Section P: Conveying systems 483 9.17 Section Q: Mechanical engineering installations 483 9.18 Section R: Electrical engineering installations 483 Part 3 Measurement Risk in Contract Control 485 10 Contract Control Strategies 487 10.1 Financial control 487 10.2 Measuring the quantities of work done 489 10.3 Provisional quantities and provisional sums 493 10.4 Measuring variations to the contract 494 10.5 Preparing the contractor's cost–value reconciliation 495 10.6 Physical measurement 495 11 Measurement Claims 499 11.1 Claims 499 11.2 E xtra work 502 11.3 Departures from the method of measurement 504 11.4 E rrors in bills of quantities 505 11.5 Procurement issues 510 12 Final Accounts 511 12.1 Purpose 511 12.2 Forms of contract 512 12.3 Lump sum contracts 513 12.4 Measure and value contracts 517 12.5 Daywork accounts 518 12.6 'Final accounts' under the ECC 519 Part 4 Measurement Case Studies 525 13 New Rules of Measurement: NRM1 527 13.1 Project details 527 13.2 Accommodation 527 13.3 Gross internal floor area 529 13.4 Calculating GIFA 529 13.5 Special design features 529 13.6 GIFA measurement rules 531 13.7 Roof 531 13.8 Works cost estimate 534 14 New Rules of Measurement: NRM2 535 14.1 E xcavation in unstable water-bearing ground 535 14.2 NRM2 Director's adjustment 539 15 Civil Engineering Standard Method of Measurement 543 15.1 Canal aqueduct 543 15.2 Ground anchors 543 16 Method of Measurement for Highway Works 549 16.1 Measurement and billing of proprietary manufactured structures 549 16.2 Measurement and billing of structures where there is a choice of designs 551 16.3 Measurement of proprietary manufactured structural elements 554 17 Principles of Measurement (International) 557 17.1 Underpinning 557 18 Builders' Quantities 565 18.1 Lift pit 565 Index 573

Read more less

Book SynopsisWinner of the IENE Project Award 2016.Trade Review“In conclusion, the book provides a very important contribution to the understanding of the effects of linear infrastructures on wildlife. It is 'reader friendly' and practice driven, and I'm sure it will generate both further research and collaboration in the field, so that the highest beneficiary will be the natural vegetation and fauna.” (Bulletin of the Eurasian Dry Grassland Group, 1 November 2015) “Authors focused and wrote concisely, which means the contents are readily digestible and consequently easy to use for students in both academic and more technical and practical disciplines… Another major strength of the Handbook of Road Ecology is its comprehensive international coverage. Each of the three editors is from a different continent, and the other contributors cover an impressively diverse range of countries, developed and developing, and cultures. This means that in addition to providing a comprehensive compendium for people seeking information on ecologically sustainable road construction and planning, the volume is also valuable for learning from approaches and solutions applied in different regions…The cross-referencing of chapters is helpful and enables readers to find other chapters relevant to a particular topic with ease. The editors have clearly put considerable effort into ensuring the book is concise and easy to use for all those who are interested in the challenges of ecologically sustainable construction and planning of roads. Each chapter begins with a succinct summary and bullet points and ends with suggestions for further reading, which makes it easy to use as a reference work from which relevant information can be located easily and quickly. The book is richly illustrated with colored photographs and figures." Conservation Biology, 00: 0 (2017) Table of ContentsNotes on Contributors ix Foreword xx Richard T. T. Forman Preface xxii Acknowledgements xxiv About the companion website xxvi 1 The ecological effects of linear infrastructure and traffic: Challenges and opportunities of rapid global growth 1 Rodney van der Ree, Daniel J. Smith and Clara Grilo 2 Bad roads, good roads 10 William F. Laurance 3 Why keep areas road‐free? The importance of roadless areas 16 Nuria Selva, Adam Switalski, Stefan Kreft and Pierre L. Ibisch 4 Incorporating biodiversity issues into road design: The road agency perspective 27 Kevin Roberts and Anders Sjölund 5 Improving environmental impact assessment and road planning at the landscape scale 32 Jochen A. G. Jaeger 6 What transportation agencies need in environmental impact assessments and other reports to minimise ecological impacts 43 Josie Stokes 7 Principles underpinning biodiversity offsets and guidance on their use 51 Yung En Chee 8 Construction of roads and wildlife mitigation measures: Pitfalls and opportunities 60 Cameron Weller 9 Ensuring the completed road project is designed, built and operated as intended 65 Rodney van der Ree, Stephen Tonjes and Cameron Weller 10 Good science and experimentation are needed in road ecology 71 Rodney van der Ree, Jochen A. G. Jaeger, Trina Rytwinski and Edgar A. van der Grift 11 Field methods to evaluate the impacts of roads on wildlife 82 Daniel J. Smith and Rodney van der Ree 12 Case study: A robust method to obtain defendable data on wildlife mortality 96 Éric Guinard, Roger Prodon and Christophe Barbraud 13 Road–wildlife mitigation planning can be improved by identifying the patterns and processes associated with wildlife-vehicle collisions 101 Kari Gunson and Fernanda Zimmermann Teixeira 14 Incorporating landscape genetics into road ecology 110 Paul Sunnucks and Niko Balkenhol 15 Guidelines for evaluating use of wildlife crossing structures 119 Edgar A. van der Grift and Rodney van der Ree 16 Guidelines for evaluating the effectiveness of road mitigation measures 129 Edgar A. van der Grift, Rodney van der Ree and Jochen A. G. Jaeger 17 How to maintain safe and effective mitigation measures 138 Rodney van der Ree and Stephen Tonjes 18 Understanding and mitigating the negative effects of road lighting on ecosystems 143 Bradley F. Blackwell, Travis L. DeVault and Thomas W. Seamans 19 Ecological impacts of road noise and options for mitigation 151 Kirsten M. Parris 20 Fencing: A valuable tool for reducing wildlife-vehicle collisions and funnelling fauna to crossing structures 159 Rodney van der Ree, Jeffrey W. Gagnon and Daniel J. Smith 21 Wildlife crossing structures: An effective strategy to restore or maintain wildlife connectivity across roads 172 Daniel J. Smith, Rodney van der Ree and Carme Rosell 22 Recreational co‐use of wildlife crossing structures 184 Rodney van der Ree and Edgar A. van der Grift 23 Predator-prey interactions at wildlife crossing structures: Between myth and reality 190 Cristina Mata, Roberta Bencini, Brian K. Chambers and Juan E. Malo 24 Wildlife warning signs and animal detection systems aimed at reducing wildlife-vehicle collisions 198 Marcel P. Huijser, Christa Mosler‐Berger, Mattias Olsson and Martin Strein 25 Use of reflectors and auditory deterrents to prevent wildlife-vehicle collisions 213 Gino D’Angelo and Rodney van der Ree 26 Ecological effects of railways on wildlife 219 Benjamin Dorsey, Mattias Olsson and Lisa J. Rew 27 Impacts of utility and other industrial linear corridors on wildlife 228 A. David M. Latham and Stan Boutin 28 The impacts of roads and traffic on terrestrial animal populations 237 Trina Rytwinski and Lenore Fahrig 29 Insects, snails and spiders: The role of invertebrates in road ecology 247 Heinrich Reck and Rodney van der Ree 30 Case study: Protecting Christmas Island’s iconic red crabs from vehicles 258 Rob Muller and Mike Misso 31 Making a safe leap forward: Mitigating road impacts on amphibians 261 Andrew J. Hamer, Thomas E. S. Langton and David Lesbarrères 32 Reptiles: Overlooked but often at risk from roads 271 Kimberly M. Andrews, Tom A. Langen and Richard P. J. H. Struijk 33 Flight doesn’t solve everything: Mitigation of road impacts on birds 281 Angela Kociolek, Clara Grilo and Sandra Jacobson 34 Bats and roads 290 Isobel M. Abbott, Anna Berthinussen, Emma Stone, Martijn Boonman, Markus Melber and John Altringham 35 Carnivores: Struggling for survival in roaded landscapes 300 Clara Grilo, Daniel J. Smith and Nina Klar 36 Case study: Roads and jaguars in the Mayan forests 313 Eugenia Pallares, Carlos Manterola, Dalia A. Conde and Fernando Colchero 37 Case study: Finding the middle road – grounded approaches to mitigate highway impacts in tiger reserves 317 Sanjay Gubbi AND H.C. Poornesha 38 Case study: African wild dogs and the fragmentation menace 322 Brendan Whittington‐Jones and Harriet Davies‐Mostert 39 Roads, traffic and verges: Big problems and big opportunities for small mammals 325 Fernando Ascensão, Scott LaPoint and Rodney van der Ree 40 Reducing road impacts on tree‐dwelling animals 334 Kylie Soanes and Rodney van der Ree 41 Case study: Canopy bridges for primate conservation 341 Andrea Donaldson and Pamela Cunneyworth 42 Transportation and large herbivores 344 Patricia Cramer, Mattias Olsson, Michelle E. Gadd, Rodney van der Ree and Leonard E. Sielecki 43 Case study: The Mount Kenya elephant corridor and underpass 353 Susie Weeks 44 Form and function: A more natural approach to infrastructure, fish and stream habitats 357 Paul J. Wagner 45 Solutions to the impacts of roads and other barriers on fish and fish habitat 364 Fabrice Ottburg and Matt Blank 46 The function and management of roadside vegetation 373 Suzanne J. Milton, W. Richard J. Dean, Leonard E. Sielecki and Rodney van der Ree 47 Roads in the arid lands: Issues, challenges and potential solutions 382 Enhua Lee, David B. Croft and Tamar Achiron‐Frumkin 48 Road ecology in an urbanising world 391 Darryl Jones, Hans Bekker and Rodney van der Ree 49 Tropical ecosystem vulnerability and climatic conditions: Particular challenges for road planning, construction and maintenance 397 Miriam Goosem 50 The influence of economics, politics and environment on road ecology in South America 407 Alex Bager, Carlos E. Borghi and Helio Secco 51 Highway construction as a force in the destruction of the Amazon forest 414 Philip M. Fearnside 52 Road ecology in South India: Issues and mitigation opportunities 425 K. S. Seshadri and T. Ganesh 53 Planning roads through sensitive Asian landscapes: Regulatory issues, ecological implications and challenges for decision‐making 430 Asha Rajvanshi and Vinod B. Mathur 54 Setjhaba SA, South Afrika: A South African perspective of an emerging transport infrastructure 439 Wendy Collinson, Dan Parker, Claire Patterson‐Abrolat, Graham Alexander and Harriet Davies‐Mostert 55 Unfenced reserves, unparalleled biodiversity and a rapidly changing landscape: Roadways and wildlife in East Africa 448 Clinton W. Epps, Katarzyna Nowak , and Benezeth Mutayoba 56 Expected effects of a road across the Serengeti 455 Michelle E. Gadd 57 China: Building and managing a massive road and rail network and protecting our rich biodiversity 465 Yun Wang, Yaping Kong and Jiding Chen 58 Railways, roads and fences across Kazakhstan and Mongolia threaten the survival of wide‐ranging wildlife 472 Kirk A. Olson and Rodney van der Ree 59 Best‐practice guidelines and manuals 479 Marguerite Trocmé 60 Case study: The role of non‐governmental organisations (NGOs) and advocates in reducing the impacts of roads on wildlife 485 Patricia White 61 Case study: Building a community of practice for road ecology 488 Paul J. Wagner and Andreas Seiler 62 Wildlife/roadkill observation and reporting systems 492 Fraser Shilling, Sarah E. Perkins and Wendy Collinson Glossary 502 Species 509 Index 513

Read more less

Book SynopsisStructural Steel Design to Eurocode 3 and AISC Specifications deals with the theory and practical applications of structural steel design in Europe and the USA.Table of ContentsPreface x 1 The Steel Material 1 1.1 General Points about the Steel Material 1 1.1.1 Materials in Accordance with European Provisions 4 1.1.2 Materials in Accordance with United States Provisions 7 1.2 Production Processes 10 1.3 Thermal Treatments 13 1.4 Brief Historical Note 14 1.5 The Products 15 1.6 Imperfections 18 1.6.1 Mechanical Imperfections 19 1.6.2 Geometric Imperfections 22 1.7 Mechanical Tests for the Characterization of the Material 24 1.7.1 Tensile Testing 25 1.7.2 Stub Column Test 27 1.7.3 Toughness Test 29 1.7.4 Bending Test 32 1.7.5 Hardness Test 32 2 References for the Design of Steel Structures 34 2.1 Introduction 34 2.1.1 European Provisions for Steel Design 35 2.1.2 United States Provisions for Steel Design 37 2.2 Brief Introduction to Random Variables 37 2.3 Measure of the Structural Reliability and Design Approaches 39 2.4 Design Approaches in Accordance with Current Standard Provisions 44 2.4.1 European Approach for Steel Design 44 2.4.2 United States Approach for Steel Design 47 3 Framed Systems and Methods of Analysis 49 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Classification Based on Structural Typology 51 3.3 Classification Based on Lateral Deformability 52 3.3.1 European Procedure 53 3.3.2 AISC Procedure 56 3.4 Classification Based on Beam-to-Column Joint Performance 56 3.4.1 Classification According to the European Approach 57 3.4.2 Classification According to the United States Approach 60 3.4.3 Joint Modelling 61 3.5 Geometric Imperfections 63 3.5.1 The European Approach 63 3.5.2 The United States Approach 67 3.6 The Methods of Analysis 68 3.6.1 Plasticity and Instability 69 3.6.2 Elastic Analysis with Bending Moment Redistribution 76 3.6.3 Methods of Analysis Considering Mechanical Non-Linearity 78 3.6.4 Simplified Analysis Approaches 80 3.7 Simple Frames 84 3.7.1 Bracing System Imperfections in Accordance with EU Provisions 88 3.7.2 System Imperfections in Accordance with AISC Provisions 89 3.7.3 Examples of Braced Frames 92 3.8 Worked Examples 96 4 Cross-Section Classification 107 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 Classification in Accordance with European Standards 108 4.2.1 Classification for Compression or Bending Moment 110 4.2.2 Classification for Compression and Bending Moment 110 4.2.3 Effective Geometrical Properties for Class 4 Sections 115 4.3 Classification in Accordance with US Standards 118 4.4 Worked Examples 121 5 Tension Members 134 5.1 Introduction 134 5.2 Design According to the European Approach 134 5.3 Design According to the US Approach 137 5.4 Worked Examples 140 6 Members in Compression 147 6.1 Introduction 147 6.2 Strength Design 147 6.2.1 Design According to the European Approach 147 6.2.2 Design According to the US Approach 148 6.3 Stability Design 148 6.3.1 Effect of Shear on the Critical Load 155 6.3.2 Design According to the European Approach 158 6.3.3 Design According to the US Approach 162 6.4 Effective Length of Members in Frames 166 6.4.1 Design According to the EU Approach 166 6.4.2 Design According to the US Approach 169 6.5 Worked Examples 172 7 Beams 176 7.1 Introduction 176 7.1.1 Beam Deformability 176 7.1.2 Dynamic Effects 178 7.1.3 Resistance 179 7.1.4 Stability 179 7.2 European Design Approach 184 7.2.1 Serviceability Limit States 184 7.2.2 Resistance Verifications 186 7.2.3 Buckling Resistance of Uniform Members in Bending 190 7.3 Design According to the US Approach 199 7.3.1 Serviceability Limit States 199 7.3.2 Shear Strength Verification 200 7.3.3 Flexural Strength Verification 204 7.4 Design Rules for Beams 228 7.5 Worked Examples 233 8 Torsion 243 8.1 Introduction 243 8.2 Basic Concepts of Torsion 245 8.2.1 I- and H-Shaped Profiles with Two Axes of Symmetry 250 8.2.2 Mono-symmetrical Channel Cross-Sections 252 8.2.3 Warping Constant for Most Common Cross-Sections 255 8.3 Member Response to Mixed Torsion 258 8.4 Design in Accordance with the European Procedure 263 8.5 Design in Accordance with the AISC Procedure 265 8.5.1 Round and Rectangular HSS 266 8.5.2 Non-HSS Members (Open Sections Such as W, T, Channels, etc.) 267 9 Members Subjected to Flexure and Axial Force 268 9.1 Introduction 268 9.2 Design According to the European Approach 271 9.2.1 The Resistance Checks 271 9.2.2 The Stability Checks 274 9.2.3 The General Method 280 9.3 Design According to the US Approach 281 9.4 Worked Examples 284 10 Design for Combination of Compression, Flexure, Shear and Torsion 303 10.1 Introduction 303 10.2 Design in Accordance with the European Approach 308 10.3 Design in Accordance with the US Approach 309 10.3.1 Round and Rectangular HSS 310 10.3.2 Non-HSS Members (Open Sections Such as W, T, Channels, etc.) 310 11 Web Resistance to Transverse Forces 311 11.1 Introduction 311 11.2 Design Procedure in Accordance with European Standards 312 11.3 Design Procedure in Accordance with US Standards 316 12 Design Approaches for Frame Analysis 319 12.1 Introduction 319 12.2 The European Approach 319 12.2.1 The EC3-1 Approach 320 12.2.2 The EC3-2a Approach 321 12.2.3 The EC3-2b Approach 321 12.2.4 The EC3-3 Approach 322 12.3 AISC Approach 323 12.3.1 The Direct Analysis Method (DAM) 323 12.3.2 The Effective Length Method (ELM) 327 12.3.3 The First Order Analysis Method (FOM) 329 12.3.4 Method for Approximate Second Order Analysis 330 12.4 Comparison between the EC3 and AISC Analysis Approaches 332 12.5 Worked Example 334 13 The Mechanical Fasteners 345 13.1 Introduction 345 13.2 Resistance of the Bolted Connections 345 13.2.1 Connections in Shear 347 13.2.2 Connections in Tension 354 13.2.3 Connection in Shear and Tension 358 13.3 Design in Accordance with European Practice 358 13.3.1 European Practice for Fastener Assemblages 358 13.3.2 EU Structural Verifications 363 13.4 Bolted Connection Design in Accordance with the US Approach 369 13.4.1 US Practice for Fastener Assemblage 369 13.4.2 US Structural Verifications 376 13.5 Connections with Rivets 382 13.5.1 Design in Accordance with EU Practice 383 13.5.2 Design in Accordance with US Practice 383 13.6 Worked Examples 384 14 Welded Connections 395 14.1 Generalities on Welded Connections 395 14.1.1 European Specifications 397 14.1.2 US Specifications 399 14.1.3 Classification of Welded Joints 400 14.2 Defects and Potential Problems in Welds 401 14.3 Stresses in Welded Joints 403 14.3.1 Tension 404 14.3.2 Shear and Flexure 406 14.3.3 Shear and Torsion 408 14.4 Design of Welded Joints 411 14.4.1 Design According to the European Approach 411 14.4.2 Design According to the US Practice 414 14.5 Joints with Mixed Typologies 420 14.6 Worked Examples 420 15 Connections 424 15.1 Introduction 424 15.2 Articulated Connections 425 15.2.1 Pinned Connections 426 15.2.2 Articulated Bearing Connections 427 15.3 Splices 429 15.3.1 Beam Splices 430 15.3.2 Column Splices 431 15.4 End Joints 434 15.4.1 Beam-to-Column Connections 434 15.4.2 Beam-to-Beam Connections 434 15.4.3 Bracing Connections 437 15.4.4 Column Bases 438 15.4.5 Beam-to-Concrete Wall Connection 441 15.5 Joint Modelling 444 15.5.1 Simple Connections 450 15.5.2 Rigid Joints 454 15.5.3 Semi-Rigid Joints 458 15.6 Joint Standardization 462 16 Built-Up Compression Members 466 16.1 Introduction 466 16.2 Behaviour of Compound Struts 466 16.2.1 Laced Compound Struts 471 16.2.2 Battened Compound Struts 473 16.3 Design in Accordance with the European Approach 475 16.3.1 Laced Compression Members 477 16.3.2 Battened Compression Members 477 16.3.3 Closely Spaced Built-Up Members 478 16.4 Design in Accordance with the US Approach 480 16.5 Worked Examples 482 Appendix A: Conversion Factors 491 Appendix B: References and Standards 492 Index 502

Read more less

Book SynopsisA building fire is dynamic. A continually changing hostile fire environment influences time relationships that affect fire defenses and risks to people and building functions. The fire and fire defenses in each building interact with different sequences and distinct ways. Risks are characterized by the building's performance. Significantly updated and restructured new edition Fire Performance Analysis for Buildings, 2nd Edition organizes the complex interactions into an analytical framework to evaluate any building - at any location - built under any regulatory jurisdiction or era. Systematic, logical procedures evaluate individual component behavior and integrate results to understand holistic performance. The Interactive Performance Information (IPI) chart structures complex time-related interactions among the fire, fire defenses, and associated risks. Quantification uses state-of-the-art deterministic methods of fire safety engineering and fTable of ContentsPreface xxiii Acknowledgements xxv 1 Fire Performance and Buildings 1 1.1 The Dynamics of Building Fire Performance 1 1.2 The Anatomy of Building Fire Safety 1 Part I The Foundation 7 2 Preliminary Organization 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Overview of Evaluations 9 Part One: Organizational Concepts 12 2.3 The Diagnostic Fire 12 2.4 Anatomy of a Representative Fire 12 Part Two: Barriers, Spaces, and Connectivity 15 2.7 Spaces and Barriers 15 2.8 Barriers and Fire 15 Part Three: Fire Defenses 23 2.14 Fire Defenses 23 2.15 Active Fire Defenses 24 2.17 Closure 30 3 Tools of Analysis 31 3.1 Introduction 31 Part One: The Logic 32 3.2 The Framework Logic 32 3.3 The Major Parts 32 Part Two: Space–Barrier Connectivity 51 3.14 Introduction 51 3.15 Room Connectivity 51 Part Three: Additional Tools 55 3.19 Networks and Charts 55 3.20 Organizational Charts 55 4 An Introduction to the Interactive Performance Information Chart 59 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 The Basic Template 59 5 Quantification 73 5.1 Performance Evaluations 73 5.2 Information Accessibility 74 Part II The Parts 79 6 The Room Fire 81 6.1 Introduction 81 Part One: Room Fire Concepts 82 6.2 Fire 82 6.3 The Role of Heat: Ignition 82 Part Two: Room Fire Descriptors 94 6.17 Introduction 94 6.18 Fuels 94 7 The Room Fire: Qualitative Analysis 119 7.1 The Role of Qualitative Analysis 119 7.2 Qualitative Estimates for Room Fires 120 Part One: Bottom‐up Estimates 121 7.3 Bottom‐up Scenario Estimates 121 7.3.1 Realm 1: FFS to IG 121 Part Two: Top‐down Estimates 133 7.7 Qualitative Room Classifications 133 7.8 FGP Comparisons 133 8 Beyond the Room of Origin 147 8.1 Introduction 147 8.2 The Inspection Plan 147 Part One: Barrier Effectiveness 149 8.3 Barrier Functions in Buildings 149 8.4 Barrier Fire Functions 149 Part Two: Barrier–Space Modules 159 8.8 Introduction 159 8.9 Barrier–Space Modules 159 Part Three: Qualitative Fire Analysis 165 8.17 Introduction 165 8.18 The Process 165 9 Smoke Analysis 175 9.1 Introduction 175 9.2 The Plan 176 10 The Diagnostic Fire 191 10.1 Diagnostic Fires 191 10.2 Interactive Performance Information (IPI) Chart and the Diagnostic Fire 191 10.3 Closure 192 11 Fire Detection 193 11.1 Introduction 193 Part One: Automatic Detection 194 11.2 Instrument Detection 194 11.3 Detection Instruments 194 Part Two: Human Detection 200 11.6 Concepts in Human Fire Detection 200 11.7 Human Detection Analysis 200 11.8 Closure 202 12 Alarm: Actions After Detection 203 12.1 Introduction 203 Part One: Alert Occupants 205 12.2 Focus on Alert 205 12.3 Alerting Occupants 205 Part Two: Notify Local Fire Department 209 12.5 Introduction 209 12.6 Human Notification (MN) 209 12.7 Discussion 212 12.8 Automated Notification Services 213 12.9 Discussion 216 Part Three: Building System Interfaces 217 12.10 Release Services 217 13 Fire Department Extinguishment: Arrival 219 13.1 Introduction 219 13.2 Organizing the Topic 219 Part One: Manual Extinguishment Overview 221 13.3 The Role of the Fire Department 221 13.4 Building Analysis Overview 221 13.5 Part A: Ignition to Notification 223 Part Two: Community Fire Departments 226 13.8 Fire Department Organizations 226 13.9 Fire Companies 226 Part Three: Community Fire Response 231 13.11 Fire Department Response Time 231 13.12 Communications Centers 231 14 Fire Department Extinguishment: First Water (MA) 237 The Fire Fighter and the Engineer 237 14.1 Introduction 239 Part One: An Overview of Manual Extinguishment Analysis 241 14.2 The Process 241 14.3 Phase 1: Initial Water Application (MA) 242 14.4 Summary 248 Part Two: A Brief Look at Fire Fighting 249 14.5 Initial Fire Ground Actions 249 14.6 Information 249 14.7 Pause for Discussion 251 14.8 Manual Fire Fighting 252 14.9 No Two Fires Are Alike 253 14.10 Summary 253 Part Three: Supply Water Analysis 254 14.11 Introduction 254 14.12 Scenario Analysis 254 14.13 Supply Water Analysis 258 Part Four: Interior Fire Attack Analysis 278 14.29 Introduction 278 14.30 Overview of Stretching Interior Attack Lines 278 14.31 Task Modules 279 Part Five: Phase 1 Analysis 290 14.39 Introduction 290 14.40 Phase 1 Comments 290 15 Fire Department Extinguishment: Control and Extinguishment 295 15.1 First Water Applied… Now What? 295 15.2 The Engineer and the Incident Commander 295 16 Automatic Sprinkler Suppression 305 16.1 Introduction 305 16.2 Sprinkler System Performance 305 Part One: Sprinkler Systems 307 16.3 Sprinkler Extinguishment 307 16.4 The Sprinkler System 308 16.5 Types of Sprinkler Systems 309 Part Two: Sprinkler Performance 312 16.6 Organization for Thinking 312 16.7 Agent Application (AA) 312 16.8 Agent Application Events 313 16.19 Automatic Suppression 323 16.20 Closure 324 17 The Composite Fire 325 17.1 Introduction 325 17.2 The Fire Limit (L) 325 18 Materials, Codes, Standards, Practices, and Performance 331 18.1 Introduction 331 Part One: Building Construction 333 18.2 The Structural Frame 333 18.3 Material Behavior in Fires 334 Part Two: Historical Perspective 338 18.4 The Built Environment Around World War I 338 18.5 Structural Practice Around World War I 338 Part Three: Fire Endurance Testing 345 18.12 Fire Test Interpretations 345 18.13 The Standard Fire Endurance Test 345 18.14 Fire Endurance Test Discussion 346 Part Four: Fire Severity 349 18.15 Introduction 349 18.16 Fuel Loads 349 18.17 The Ingberg Correlation 352 Part Five: Transitions 363 18.25 The Issue 363 19 Concepts in Structural Analysis for Fire Conditions 365 19.1 Introduction 365 19.2 Structural Fire Performance 365 Part One: Building Design 367 19.3 The Development Process 367 19.4 Building Design 367 19.5 Information Technology 368 Part Two: Structural Engineering and Building Design 371 19.6 The Master Builder 371 19.7 The Rise of Engineering 371 19.8 The Building 372 Part Three: Structural Engineering 377 19.13 Introduction 377 19.14 Beam Analysis 377 Part Four: Structural Analysis for Fire Conditions 387 19.18 Introduction 387 19.19 Outcomes 387 20 Target Spaces and Smoke 401 20.1 Introduction 401 20.2 Orientation 401 21 Life Safety 411 21.1 Introduction 411 21.2 Human Reaction to Products of Combustion 412 21.3 Tenability 414 21.4 Fire Fighter Safety 414 22 Risk Characterizations 417 22.1 Introduction 417 22.2 The Exposed 417 Part One: Human Safety 419 22.3 Life Safety 419 22.4 Overview of Life Safety Alternatives 419 Part Two: Other Risks 431 22.16 Property Protection 431 22.17 Continuity of Operations 431 23 Fire Prevention 435 23.1 Introduction 435 Part One: Prevent Established Burning 436 23.2 Prevent EB 436 23.2.1 Ignition Potential 436 23.2.2 Initial Fire Growth 437 Part Two: Automatic Special Hazard Suppression 442 23.7 Introduction 442 23.8 Carbon Dioxide Systems 443 Part III The Analysis 449 24 Fire Performance: Framework for Analysis 451 24.1 Organizational Concepts 451 24.2 Performance Evaluations 451 24.3 Analytical Framework 452 24.4 Fire, Risk, and Buildings 454 25 The Diagnostic Fire 455 25.1 Introduction 455 25.2 Top‐down Estimates 456 26 Fire Detection 463 26.1 Introduction 463 Part One: Automatic Detection 464 26.2 Detection Analysis 464 26.3 Detection Example 466 26.4 Detection Estimate 469 26.5 Detector Reliability 469 Part Two: Human Detection 471 26.6 Concepts in Human Detection Analysis 471 26.7 Human Detection Analysis 471 26.8 Closure 473 27 Fire Department Notification 475 27.1 Introduction 475 27.2 The Human Link in Notification 475 28 Fire Department Extinguishment 483 28.1 Introduction 483 28.2 Framework for Analysis 483 29 Automatic Sprinkler Suppression 501 29.1 Introduction 501 29.2 Agent Application (AA) 502 30 The Composite Fire 517 30.1 Introduction 517 30.2 Event Logic Description 517 31 Structural Performance 521 31.1 Introduction 521 31.2 Interactive Performance Information (IPI) Documentation 521 32 Target Space Smoke Analysis 525 32.1 Introduction 525 32.2 Success or Failure? 526 32.3 Target Room Performance Bounds 527 33 Life Safety Analysis 531 33.1 Introduction 531 33.2 The Exposed 531 34 Prevent Established Burning 541 34.1 Introduction 541 Part One: Established Burning Prevention 544 34.2 Ignition Potential 544 34.3 Established Burning Evaluation 544 Part Two: Special Hazards Protection 550 34.6 The Role of Special Hazards Suppression 550 34.7 Framework for Analysis 550 Part IV Managing Uncertainty 555 35 Understanding Uncertainty 557 35.1 Introduction 557 35.2 Window of Uncertainty 557 36 Visual Thinking 581 36.1 Introduction 581 36.2 A Case Study 581 37 Introduction to Risk Management 597 37.1 Introduction 597 Part One: The Process 598 37.2 Audience 598 37.3 Fire Safety Management 598 Part Two: Information Acquisition 604 37.8 Introduction 604 37.9 Understand the Problem 604 Part Three: Develop a Risk Management Program 608 37.13 Structure a Risk Management Program 608 37.14 Evaluate “Prevent EB” 608 38 Analytical Foundations 615 38.1 Historical Origins 615 Part One: Logic Diagrams and Networks 617 38.2 Event Trees 617 38.3 Fault and Success Trees 618 Part Two: Probability 628 38.12 Meanings of Probability 628 38.13 Fire Safety Applications 629 Part Three: The Role of Judgment 632 38.17 Introduction 632 38.18 Building Decisions 632 Appendix A Organizational Structure 637 A.1 The Organizational Framework 637 A.2 Basic Organization 637 A.3 The Composite Fire 637 A.4 The Diagnostic Fire (Ī) 639 A.5 Fire Department Manual Extinguishment 640 A.6 Detection 640 A.7 Notification 642 A.8 Notification to Arrival 643 A.9 Arrival to Extinguishment 645 A.10 Automatic Sprinkler System 646 A.11 Building Response: Structural Behavior 647 A.12 Building Response: Space Tenability 648 A.13 Risk Characterizations 648 A.14 Occupant Movement 650 A.15 Other Risks 651 A.16 Prevent Established Burning (EB): Occupant Extinguishment 651 A.17 Prevent EB: Special Hazards Protection 653 A.18 Closure 653 Appendix B Model Building 655 Description 655 Plans 655 Index 661

Read more less

Book SynopsisAsymptotic Methods in the Theory of Plates with Mixed Boundary Conditions comprehensively covers the theoretical background of asymptotic approaches and their use in solving mechanical engineering-oriented problems of structural members, primarily plates (statics and dynamics) with mixed boundary conditions.Table of ContentsPreface ix List of Abbreviations xiii 1 Asymptotic Approaches 1 1.1 Asymptotic Series and Approximations 1 1.1.1 Asymptotic Series 1 1.1.2 Asymptotic Symbols and Nomenclatures 5 1.2 Some Nonstandard Perturbation Procedures 8 1.2.1 Choice of Small Parameters 8 1.2.2 Homotopy Perturbation Method 10 1.2.3 Method of Small Delta 13 1.2.4 Method of Large Delta 17 1.2.5 Application of Distributions 19 1.3 Summation of Asymptotic Series 21 1.3.1 Analysis of Power Series 21 1.3.2 Padé Approximants and Continued Fractions 24 1.4 Some Applications of PA 29 1.4.1 Accelerating Convergence of Iterative Processes 29 1.4.2 Removing Singularities and Reducing the Gibbs-Wilbraham Effect 31 1.4.3 Localized Solutions 32 1.4.4 Hermite-Padé Approximations and Bifurcation Problem 34 1.4.5 Estimates of Effective Characteristics of Composite Materials 34 1.4.6 Continualization 35 1.4.7 Rational Interpolation 36 1.4.8 Some Other Applications 37 1.5 Matching of Limiting Asymptotic Expansions 38 1.5.1 Method of Asymptotically Equivalent Functions for Inversion of Laplace Transform 38 1.5.2 Two-Point PA 41 1.5.3 Other Methods of AEFs Construction 43 1.5.4 Example: Schrödinger Equation 45 1.5.5 Example: AEFs in the Theory of Composites 46 1.6 Dynamical Edge Effect Method 49 1.6.1 Linear Vibrations of a Rod 49 1.6.2 Nonlinear Vibrations of a Rod 51 1.6.3 Nonlinear Vibrations of a Rectangular Plate 54 1.6.4 Matching of Asymptotic and Variational Approaches 58 1.6.5 On the Normal Forms of Nonlinear Vibrations of Continuous Systems 60 1.7 Continualization 61 1.7.1 Discrete and Continuum Models in Mechanics 61 1.7.2 Chain of Elastically Coupled Masses 62 1.7.3 Classical Continuum Approximation 64 1.7.4 "Splashes" 65 1.7.5 Envelope Continualization 66 1.7.6 Improvement Continuum Approximations 68 1.7.7 Forced Oscillations 69 1.8 Averaging and Homogenization 71 1.8.1 Averaging via Multiscale Method 71 1.8.2 Frozing in Viscoelastic Problems 74 1.8.3 The WKB Method 75 1.8.4 Method of Kuzmak-Whitham (Nonlinear WKB Method) 77 1.8.5 Differential Equations with Quickly Changing Coefficients 79 1.8.6 Differential Equation with Periodically Discontinuous Coefficients 84 1.8.7 Periodically Perforated Domain 88 1.8.8 Waves in Periodically Nonhomogenous Media 92 References 95 2 Computational Methods for Plates and Beams with Mixed Boundary Conditions 105 2.1 Introduction 105 2.1.1 Computational Methods of Plates with Mixed Boundary Conditions 105 2.1.2 Method of Boundary Conditions Perturbation 107 2.2 Natural Vibrations of Beams and Plates 109 2.2.1 Natural Vibrations of a Clamped Beam 109 2.2.2 Natural Vibration of a Beam with Free Ends 114 2.2.3 Natural Vibrations of a Clamped Rectangular Plate 118 2.2.4 Natural Vibrations of the Orthotropic Plate with Free Edges Lying on an Elastic Foundation 123 2.2.5 Natural Vibrations of the Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Clamping-Simple Support" 128 2.2.6 Comparison of Theoretical and Experimental Results 133 2.2.7 Natural Vibrations of a Partially Clamped Plate 135 2.2.8 Natural Vibrations of a Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Simple Support-Moving Clamping" 140 2.3 Nonlinear Vibrations of Rods, Beams and Plates 144 2.3.1 Vibrations of the Rod Embedded in a Nonlinear Elastic Medium 144 2.3.2 Vibrations of the Beam Lying on a Nonlinear Elastic Foundation 153 2.3.3 Vibrations of the Membrane on a Nonlinear Elastic Foundation 155 2.3.4 Vibrations of the Plate on a Nonlinear Elastic Foundation 158 2.4 SSS of Beams and Plates 160 2.4.1 SSS of Beams with Clamped Ends 160 2.4.2 SSS of the Beam with Free Edges 163 2.4.3 SSS of Clamped Plate 166 2.4.4 SSS of a Plate with Free Edges 170 2.4.5 SSS of the Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Clamping–Simple Support" 172 2.4.6 SSS of a Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Free Edge–Moving Clamping" 180 2.5 Forced Vibrations of Beams and Plates 184 2.5.1 Forced Vibrations of a Clamped Beam 184 2.5.2 Forced Vibrations of Beam with Free Edges 189 2.5.3 Forced Vibrations of a Clamped Plate 190 2.5.4 Forced Vibrations of Plates with Free Edges 194 2.5.5 Forced Vibrations of Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Clamping-Simple Support" 197 2.5.6 Forced Vibrations of Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Free Edge – Moving Clamping" 202 2.6 Stability of Beams and Plates 207 2.6.1 Stability of a Clamped Beam 207 2.6.2 Stability of a Clamped Rectangular Plate 209 2.6.3 Stability of Rectangular Plate with Mixed Boundary Conditions "Clamping-Simple Support" 211 2.6.4 Comparison of Theoretical and Experimental Results 219 2.7 Some Related Problems 221 2.7.1 Dynamics of Nonhomogeneous Structures 221 2.7.2 Method of Ishlinskii-Leibenzon 224 2.7.3 Vibrations of a String Attached to a Spring-Mass-Dashpot System 230 2.7.4 Vibrations of a String with Nonlinear BCs 233 2.7.5 Boundary Conditions and First Order Approximation Theory 238 2.8 Links between the Adomian and Homotopy Perturbation Approaches 240 2.9 Conclusions 263 References 264 Index 269

Read more less

Book SynopsisA thoroughly updated edition of the classic guide to project management of construction projects For more than thirty years, Construction Project Management has been considered the preeminent guide to all aspects of the construction project management process, including the Critical Path Method (CPM) of project scheduling, and much more.Table of Contents Preface vii 1 Construction Practices 1 2 Systematic Project Management 19 3 Project Estimating 35 4 Project Planning 71 5 Project Scheduling Concepts 97 6 Production Planning 143 7 Managing Time 161 8 Resource Management 191 9 Project Scheduling Applications 213 10 Project Coordination 241 11 Project Cost System 275 12 Project Financial Management 309 Index 335

Read more less

Book SynopsisBase retracement on solid research and historically accurate interpretation Interpreting Land Records is the industry's most complete guide to researching and understanding the historical records germane to land surveying. Coverage includes boundary retracement and the primary considerations during new boundary establishment, as well as an introduction to historical records and guidance on effective research and interpretation. This new edition includes a new chapter titled Researching Land Records, and advice on overcoming common research problems and insight into alternative resources when official records are unavailable. Topical case studies provide helpful, plain-language descriptions of methods, problems, and resolutions, and appendices provide definitions, context, and modern interpretation of historical words and phrases. The text features exhaustive coverage and notes, with hundreds of case law citations annotated with expert insight that gives readers Table of ContentsPreface vii Acknowledgments viii 1 Introduction to Land Records 1 2 Geometry of the Description 3 3 Records Research: Title Search or Deed Search 53 4 Researching Land Records 93 5 Rules of Construction 109 6 Relative Importance of Conflicting Elements 143 7 Exceptions and Reservations 161 8 Words and Phrases 177 9 The Use of Extrinsic Evidence 187 10 Maps, Plats, Plans, and Charts 253 11 Pictures 285 12 Document Examination 303 Appendix One Definitions of Words and Phrases 321 Appendix Two Definitions of Ancient Land Terms 393 Index 397

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnpacking Construction Site Safety provides a different perspective of safety in practice.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgements xv 1 Introduction 1 References 4 2 Construction Site Contexts 5 Winning Work 6 Subs of Subs of Subs 8 The Workforce 9 Working Conditions 13 Never work a day in your life … 13 Construction Site Life 14 References 17 3 Safety and Society 21 The Media and its Myths 22 (Mis])Interpreting the Legislation 25 Where there’s blame … 28 Safety and Society and Construction Sites 31 Understanding People 32 References 42 4 Safety in Construction 47 Measuring Safety: Accidents and Statistics 48 Cause and Effect 51 Safety Management Systems 55 Competence 58 Training 61 Personal Protective Equipment 66 References 73 5 Just a Bit Unsafe? 77 The Legislative Lexicon 77 Safe/Unsafe 83 Safety and Unsafety 88 Safety and Risk 94 Acknowledgements 104 References 104 6 Safety versus Work and Work versus Safety 107 The Non]Productive 107 Segregation and Integration 111 Problems of Production 114 Production in Practice 116 References 121 7 Engagement and Enforcement 123 Engaging with Safety 124 Safety Propaganda 129 Enforcing Safety 134 Rules Made to be Broken? 138 A Hierarchy of Safety: Responsibility and Ownership 142 Acknowledgements 148 References 148 8 Counting Down to Zero 151 Target Zero: Theories and Thinking 152 Brand Zero 156 Zero in Practice 159 Measuring Zero: Non]Accident Statistics 161 Achieving Zero 163 Acknowledgements 169 References 169 9 Constructing Safety on Sites 171 What is Safety on Site? 172 Site Safety Culture 177 Putting it into Practice 181 References 187 10 Reflections 189 Index 191

Read more less

Book SynopsisBooks about construction contracts tend to be dense and wordy, but what most architects, quantity surveyors, project managers, builders and employers are looking for is an easily navigable, simple guide to using a contract, written in plain language.Table of ContentsPreface xiv Abbreviations used in the text xvi Notes before reading xvii Part I Preliminaries 1 1 Introduction 1 1.1 What is a contract? 1 1.2 Purpose of building contracts 4 1.3 Types of construction contracts 4 1.4 Characteristics of a standard form 7 1.5 Commonly used contracts 9 1.6 Important background to SBC 11 1.7 SBC and variants 11 2 Basic matters 13 2.1 Works 13 2.2 Drawings 13 2.3 Specification 14 2.4 Schedules 15 2.5 Bills of quantities 15 2.6 The Standard Method of Measurement 16 2.7 Privity of contract and the Third Party Act 17 2.8 Third party rights and collateral warranties 18 2.9 Base Date 19 2.10 Common problems 20 3 About the contract documents 23 3.1 What constitutes the contract? 23 3.2 What are articles and recitals? 24 3.3 How to complete the contract form 25 3.4 Priority of documents 29 3.5 Errors, discrepancies and divergences 30 3.6 Custody and copies 34 3.7 Limits to use 35 3.8 Reckoning days 35 3.9 Certificates, notices and other communications 36 3.10 Applicable law 37 3.11 Common problems 37 4 Related matters 40 4.1 The Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 as amended 40 4.2 Entire contracts 42 4.3 Express and implied terms 43 4.4 Limitation periods 44 4.5 Letters of intent 46 4.6 Quantum meruit 47 4.7 Limited companies 48 4.8 Bonds 49 4.9 Common problems 51 Part Ii Participants 53 5 The architect’s powers and duties 53 5.1 What the architect can do or must do 53 5.2 Specific requirements under the JCT contract 54 5.3 Powers 54 5.4 The architect’s design role under SBC 54 5.5 The architect as agent for the employer 61 5.6 No power to direct contractor 62 5.7 Issue of certificates 63 5.8 The issue of instructions 66 5.9 Instructions in detail 70 5.10 Issue of information 70 5.11 Duties under the contract 73 5.12 General duties 77 5.13 Does the architect have any duty to the contractor? 79 5.14 Common problems 79 6 The contractor’s powers and duties 82 6.1 What the contractor can do or must do 82 6.2 Person-in-charge 82 6.3 Access to the Works and premises 82 6.4 Carrying out the Works 96 6.5 Levels and setting out 98 6.6 Workmanship and materials 98 6.7 Contractor’s master programme and other documents 100 6.8 Statutory obligations 103 6.9 Antiquities 104 6.10 Drawings, details and information 104 6.11 Compliance with architect’s instructions 106 6.12 Suspension of performance 107 6.13 Does the contractor have a duty to warn of design defects? 108 6.14 Common problems 108 7 The employer’s powers and duties 110 7.1 What the employer can or must do 110 7.2 Express and implied powers and duties 110 7.3 General powers 115 7.4 General duties 122 7.5 Common problems 123 8 Consultants 125 8.1 General points 125 8.2 Quantity surveyors 126 8.3 Employer’s representative/project manager 128 8.4 Structural engineers, mechanical engineers and others 129 8.5 Common problems 129 9 The clerk of works 131 9.1 Method of appointment 131 9.2 Duties 131 9.3 Snagging lists 132 9.4 Defacing materials 132 9.5 Common problems 133 10 Sub-contractors and suppliers 134 10.1 General 134 10.2 Assignment 135 10.3 Sub-contracting 136 10.4 Listed sub-contractors 138 10.5 Named specialists 139 10.6 Common problems 140 11 Statutory authorities 143 11.1 Work not forming part of the contract 143 11.2 Statutory authorities in contract 143 11.3 The CDM Regulations 2007 145 11.4 Common problems 147 Part Iii Work in Progress 149 12 Insurance 149 12.1 Why insurance? 149 12.2 Types of insurance in the contract 149 12.3 What is an indemnity? 150 12.4 Injury to persons and property 151 12.5 Things that are the liability of the employer 152 12.6 Insurance terms 153 12.7 Insurance of the Works: alternatives 154 12.8 A new building where the contractor is required to insure 155 12.9 A new building where the employer insures 156 12.10 Alterations or extensions to an existing building 157 12.11 Benefits for sub-contractors 158 12.12 The Joint Fire Code 158 12.13 Terrorism cover 159 12.14 Common problems 159 13 Possession of the site 161 13.1 General 161 13.2 Date of possession 162 13.3 Common problems 163 14 Extension of time 165 14.1 Basics 165 14.2 Extension of time 166 14.3 Grounds 168 14.4 Procedure 177 14.5 Important conditions 186 14.6 Common problems 188 15 Liquidated damages 190 15.1 What are liquidated damages? 190 15.2 Procedure 191 15.3 Common problems 193 16 Financial claims 195 16.1 Loss and expense claims 195 16.2 Procedure 196 16.3 Effect on regular progress 200 16.4 The architect’s opinion 201 16.5 Ascertainment 202 16.6 Reimbursement under other contract provisions 203 16.7 Relevant matters forming the basis of a claim 203 16.8 Certification of direct loss and/or expense 207 16.9 Contractor’s other rights and remedies 208 16.10 Common problems 208 17 Architect’s instructions 210 17.1 Purpose 210 17.2 Scope 210 17.3 Common problems 216 18 Variations 219 18.1 What is a variation? 219 18.2 Does extra work always involve payment? 221 18.3 Valuation 222 18.4 Treatment of approximate quantities, defined and undefined provisional sums 227 18.5 If the conditions for carrying out other work are altered 228 18.6 Valuation of obligations and restrictions 229 18.7 Schedule 2 quotations 229 18.8 Acceleration 231 18.9 Daywork 232 18.10 Valuation of contractor’s designed portion 233 18.11 Common problems 233 19 Payment 235 19.1 The Contract Sum 235 19.2 Valuation 237 19.3 Method and timing 239 19.4 Payment procedure 240 19.5 Retention 243 19.6 Final payment 245 19.7 The effect of certificates 248 19.8 Off-site materials 250 19.9 Fluctuations 251 19.10 Common problems 252 20 Contractor’s design 254 20.1 Contractor’s Designed Portion (CDP) 254 20.2 Documents 254 20.3 The contractor’s obligations 255 20.4 Liability 258 20.5 Variations 259 20.6 Insurance 260 20.7 Common problems 261 Part Iv Closing Stages 263 21 Practical completion 263 21.1 Definition 263 21.2 What the contract says 263 21.3 Consequences 265 21.4 Partial possession and sectional completion 265 21.5 Common problems 267 22 Defects liability 269 22.1 During construction 269 22.2 Rectification period 271 22.3 Definition 271 22.4 Defects, shrinkages or other faults 271 22.5 Frost 272 22.6 Procedure 272 22.7 Common problems 275 23 Termination 276 23.1 General points 276 23.2 Termination by the employer 278 23.3 Grounds: contractor’s defaults 279 23.4 Grounds: insolvency of contractor 282 23.5 Grounds: corruption 283 23.6 Grounds: neutral causes 283 23.7 Grounds: insurance risks and terrorism cover 284 23.8 Consequences of termination for contractor’s default or insolvency 285 23.9 Consequences of termination for neutral causes or insurance risks 288 23.10 Termination by the contractor 288 23.11 Grounds: employer’s defaults 288 23.12 Grounds: insolvency of employer 292 23.13 Grounds: neutral causes 293 23.14 Grounds: insurance risks and terrorism cover 293 23.15 Consequences of termination for employer’s default, neutral causes or insolvency of the employer, etc. 293 23.16 Consequences of termination for insurance risks 294 23.17 Suspension of the Works by the contractor 295 23.18 Common problems 295 Part V Intractable Problems 297 24 Dispute resolution procedures 297 24.1 General 297 24.2 Adjudication 301 24.3 Arbitration 310 24.4 Legal proceedings (litigation) 317 24.5 Mediation 317 24.6 Common problems 317 Notes and references 319 Table of cases 330 Subject index 339 Clause number index to text 346

Read more less

Book SynopsisTake control of your construction contracting business and manage it through the natural highs and lows of the construction market. Learn from a team of construction business veterans led by Thomas C. Schleifer, who is commonly referred to as a construction business turnaround expert due to the number of construction companies he has rescued from financial distress. His financial acumen, combined with his practical, hands-on experience, has made him a sought-after private consultant. His experience and no-nonsense philosophy have truly given him a unique perspective. Important topics covered include: Understanding the primary areas of construction business failure in the next decade Minimizing business risk with real-world examples Developing a positive and competent management attitude and strategy Discover how to maneuver through this complicated and risky industry by using the authors'' research and proven success strategiesTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xix How to Use This Book xxi Part 1 xxi Part 2 xxi A Teaching Text xxi About the Authors xxiii PART 1 1 1 Managing with Confidence 3 1.1 Lessons Learned 3 1.2 Objectives of This Book 4 1.3 Managing Areas of Risk 4 1.4 Recognizing Signs of Potential Trouble 5 1.5 Layers of Management 6 1.6 Owner versus Top Management 7 1.7 Disciplining Performance 7 1.8 Boards of Directors 8 1.9 Accountability 9 1.10 Selecting the Members 9 1.11 Importance of Credit 10 1.12 Volume versus Profit 11 1.13 Employee Benefits and Compensation 12 1.14 Borrowing 13 1.15 Business Planning 13 Chapter Review Questions 17 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 17 2 Elements of Contractor Failure 19 2.1 Capitalizing on Experience 19 2.2 Increase in Project Size 20 2.3 Unfamiliarity with New Geographic Areas 21 2.4 Moving into New Types of Construction 23 2.5 Changes in Key Personnel 26 2.6 Lack of Managerial Maturity in Expanding Organizations 28 Chapter Review Questions 29 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 30 3 Increase in Project Size 31 3.1 Limits of Growth 32 3.2 Increased Risks with Larger Projects 32 3.3 Case Study 33 3.4 Case Study Review 37 3.5 Underestimating the Size 37 3.6 Owners and Retainage 39 3.7 Allocating Time 39 3.8 Alternatives to Taking on Large Projects 39 3.9 Conclusion 41 Chapter Review Questions 41 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 42 4 Change in Geographic Location 43 4.1 Defining “Normal Area” 43 4.2 Reasons for Changing Geographic Area 43 4.3 Case Study: Long Distance Project 44 4.4 Review of the Long Distance Project Case Study 46 4.5 Managing the Risk with Long Distance Projects 47 4.6 Case Study: Regional Office 48 4.7 Review of the Regional Office Case Study 49 4.8 The Need for Personal Attention 50 4.9 Opening a Regional Office 50 4.10 Regional Office Contingency Plan 51 4.11 Conclusion 53 Chapter Review Questions 54 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 54 5 Changing or Adding to Type of Construction Performed 57 5.1 Reasons for Changes in Type of Work 57 5.2 Challenge: Lack of Experience 58 5.3 Challenge: Differences That Appear Subtle 60 5.4 Resolution: Know Your Specialty 60 5.5 Background to Case Studies 61 5.6 Case Study 1 61 5.7 Case Study 2 62 5.8 Example: Union versus Open Shop 64 5.9 Know the Risks 65 5.10 Volume versus Profit Alternative 65 5.11 Withdrawal Plan 66 5.12 Conclusion 67 Chapter Review Questions 67 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 68 6 Replace Key Personnel 69 6.1 Identifying Key People 69 6.2 Partners 70 6.3 Founders and Succession 71 6.4 Inactive Founders 72 6.5 Succession Case Study 72 6.6 New Management Team 75 6.7 Adding Key Personnel 75 6.8 Management “Dilution” 76 6.9 Summary 77 Chapter Review Questions 78 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 78 7 Managerial Maturity 81 7.1 Start-Up Construction Companies 81 7.2 Importance of Management Skills 82 7.3 Company Growth Phases 83 7.4 Limit of Managerial Effectiveness 84 7.5 Company Growth and Management Thresholds 85 7.6 Telltale Signs of Insufficient Managerial Maturity 85 7.7 The Challenge of Management Changes 86 7.8 Delegation of Authority 87 7.9 Test of Delegation 87 7.10 Managerial Maturity Case Study 88 7.11 Summary 90 Chapter Review Questions 91 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 92 8 Accounting Systems 93 8.1 Accounting and Information Management 93 8.2 Types of Systems 93 8.3 Who Is Responsible? 94 8.4 Accounts Payable 95 8.5 Disputed Invoices 96 8.6 Case Study 96 8.7 Recording Liabilities 98 8.8 Accounts Receivable 99 8.9 Timely Data Entry 99 8.10 Summary 100 Chapter Review Questions 101 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 101 9 Evaluating Contract Profitability 103 9.1 Measuring Performance 103 9.2 Accounting for Profit 104 9.3 Selection of Systems 105 9.4 Percentage of Completion 106 9.5 Estimated Profit 107 9.6 Case Study 107 9.7 Percentage of Completion Method of Accounting 108 9.8 Construction— Work In Progress Method 110 9.9 Over- and Underbilling 113 9.10 Impact of Total Revenue 114 9.11 Cost Control 116 9.12 Timeliness 116 9.13 Cost Control versus General Ledger 117 9.14 Tracking Costs 117 9.15 Working without Information 118 9.16 Summary 119 Chapter Review Questions 119 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 120 10 Equipment Cost Management 123 10.1 Ownership Costs 123 10.2 How Much to Own 123 10.3 Reasons to Buy 124 10.4 Competitive Position 124 10.5 Calculating Equipment Costs 125 10.6 Time and Usage 125 10.7 Replacement Costs 127 10.8 Equipment Costs Charged to Projects 127 10.9 Idle Equipment 128 10.10 Cash Flow 128 10.11 Equipment Obsolescence 129 10.12 Equipment Obsolescence Case Study 130 10.13 Replacement Cost Incurred Daily 131 10.14 Summary 133 Chapter Review Questions 133 Critical Thinking Questions 134 11 Other Industry Concerns 135 11.1 Introduction 135 11.2 Growth and Risk 135 11.3 Market Driven 136 11.4 Controlling the Need for Volume 136 11.5 Rate of Growth 137 11.6 Flexible Overhead 138 11.7 Mobility of the Industry 139 11.8 Diminished Profits 140 11.9 Employee Benefits and Compensation 140 11.10 Motivation and Loyalty 142 11.11 Internal Company Disputes 142 11.12 Debt 143 11.13 Business Planning 144 11.14 Recommendations 145 Chapter Review Questions 145 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 145 PART 2 147 12 Financial Management Issues 149 12.1 Keys to Success 150 12.2 What Financial Statement Are Supposed to Convey 150 12.3 Three Major Functions 151 12.4 Financial Statement Basics 152 12.5 Balance Sheet 153 12.6 The Holding Tank Concept 155 12.7 Assets 156 12.8 Current Assets 156 12.9 Property and Equipment 157 12.10 Other Assets 158 12.11 Liabilities 158 12.12 Equity 159 12.13 Income Statement 160 12.14 Financial Statement Sets 161 12.15 Summary 163 Chapter Review Questions 163 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 164 13 Financial Analysis and Indicators 167 13.1 Working Capital 168 13.2 Calculating Target Backlog 169 13.3 Calculating Target Annual Income 169 13.4 Maximizing Working Capital 169 13.5 Liquidity 171 13.6 Current Ratio 171 13.7 Quick Ratio 172 13.8 Receivables to Payables Ratio 172 13.9 Leverage 173 13.10 Financial Capacity 173 13.11 Additional Indicators 174 13.12 Break-Even Point 174 13.13 RScore 176 13.14 Change Percentages 177 13.15 Summary 177 Chapter Review Questions 179 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 180 14 Projection and Budgets 181 14.1 Terms 181 14.2 The Projection Process 182 14.3 The Pre-Projection Process 183 14.4 Key Operational Factors 184 14.5 The Projection Process 185 14.6 Putting the Projection to Use 191 14.7 Short-Term Cash Flow Projections 192 14.8 Summary 193 Chapter Review Questions 193 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 194 15 The Effective Use of Credit 195 15.1 Introduction 195 15.2 The Primary Creditors 195 15.3 Banking 196 15.4 Bonding 198 15.5 Leasing 200 15.6 Summary 202 Chapter Review Questions 203 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 204 16 Making Decisions in Volatile Conditions 205 16.1 The Effects of Market Cycles 205 16.2 G & A Stair-Steps 207 16.3 Using Cycles Positively 209 16.4 Consecutive Cycles and Fighting Tendencies 210 16.5 Summary 210 Chapter Review Questions 211 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 212 17 Success Factors for a Changing Industry 213 17.1 What a Client Wants 213 17.2 A Client Perspective of the Contract 215 17.3 How Contracts Are Awarded 217 17.4 How Contracts Are Won 218 17.5 Relationships and Contract Divergence 219 17.6 The Client’s Vexing Problem 221 17.7 Goals of Alternative Delivery Methods 221 17.8 Successful RFP Response Strategies 224 17.9 Effectively Using Risk Analysis in a Proposal 225 17.10 How to Develop a Winning Proposal 230 17.11 Successful Interviewing Strategies 231 17.12 Summary 233 Chapter Review Questions 233 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 234 18 Performance Measurement 237 18.1 What to Measure 238 18.2 Setting the Client’s Expectations 238 18.3 Risk-Based Preplanning 239 18.4 Measuring Project Performance 242 18.5 Measuring Past Performance 244 18.6 Performance-Based Client Relationships 244 18.7 Measurement and Leadership 245 18.8 Summary 248 Chapter Review Questions 248 Critical Thinking and Discussion Questions 249 Appendix: Answer Key for Chapter Review Questions 251 Index 253

Read more less

Book SynopsisAlthough the construction and engineering sector makes important contributions to the economic, social, and environmental objectives of a nation, it has a notorious reputation for being an unsafe industry in which to work. Despite the fact that safety performance in the industry has improved, injuries and fatalities still occur frequently.Table of ContentsForeword vii Acknowledgements ix 1 Safety Management in Construction and Engineering: An Introduction 1 The importance of the industry 1 Characteristics of the construction and engineering sector 2 Why a book on strategic safety management? 6 Historical development and current trends in construction safety management 6 The book’s contents 10 References 14 2 Economics of Safety 17 Costs of construction accidents 18 Benefits of investment in safety 29 Return on investment in safety management 33 A case study on return on investment in safety risk management 35 Optimisation of investment in safety risk management 40 Evaluation of investment in safety risk management 44 Conclusions 49 References 49 3 Safety Climate and Culture 53 Safety climate 54 Safety culture 58 Safety culture maturity measurement criteria and frameworks 62 Safety culture maturity measurement instrument 65 Case studies 69 Utility of safety culture 80 Conclusions 81 References 82 4 Skills for Safety 86 An overview of the skill set 86 Conceptual skill 92 Human skill 95 Political skill 99 Technical skills 103 Skill development model 106 Skill development strategies 111 Conclusions 117 References 118 5 Safety Training and Learning 123 Training and learning defined 124 Approaches to learning: pedagogy and andragogy 124 Safety learning in construction and engineering 128 Techniques for evaluating safety training and learning 139 Case study 142 Conclusions 148 References 149 6 Safety in Design, Risk Management and BIM 152 What is safety in design? 152 Why is it necessary to implement safety in design? 155 Safety in design policies and guidelines 156 Safety risk management 160 Current issues and possible solutions 170 Case studies 172 Building information modelling (BIM) for safety in design 175 Conclusions 177 References 177 7 Research Methodology and Research–Practice Nexus 180 A typical research process 181 Research methodologies 183 Current state of play on safety research methodologies 193 Social desirability bias in research design 195 Why and how social desirability bias happens 197 Techniques for minimising social desirability bias in safety research 200 Research-practice nexus 203 Discussions 207 Assessing the relevance of research outcomes in practical application 208 Conclusions 208 References 210 8 Strategic Safety Management 214 A strategic safety management framework 215 Developing safety management strategies 216 Implementing safety management strategies 220 Evaluating safety management strategies 224 Case study 225 Conclusions 230 References 231 Bibliography 234 Index 237

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book discusses the manufacture of high quality prefabricated concrete construction components, and how that can be achieved through the application of developments in concrete technology, information modelling and best practice in design and manufacturing techniques.Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xi Notes on Contributors xiii Preface xvii Part 1 Modernisation of Precast Concrete Structures 1 1 Historical and Chronological Development of Precast Concrete Structures 3Kim S. Elliott 1.1 The five periods of development and optimisation 3 1.2 Developing years and the standardisation period 26 1.3 Optimisation and the lightweight period 34 1.3.1 Minimising beam and slab depths and structural zones 34 1.3.2 Orientation rule 38 1.3.3 Composite and continuous floor slabs 38 1.3.4 Composite and continuous internal beams 43 1.4 The thermal mass period 46 1.4.1 Background to fabric energy storage in precast framed and wall structures 46 1.4.2 Admittance and cooling capacity 48 1.4.3 Thermal resistance and U-values for precast ground and suspended floors 51 1.4.4 Conclusion to FES, cooling and thermal transmission 58 References 59 2 Industrial Building Systems (IBS) Project Implementation 61Kim S. Elliott 2.1 Introduction 61 2.1.1 Definition of IBS 63 2.1.2 Advantages of IBS 64 2.1.3 Sustainability of IBS 67 2.1.4 Drawbacks of IBS 68 2.2 Routes to IBS procurement 69 2.2.1 Definitions 69 2.2.2 Preliminaries 70 2.2.3 Project design stages 71 2.2.4 Design and detailing practice 79 2.2.5 Structural design calculations and project drawings 80 2.2.6 Component schedules and the engineer’s instructions to factory and site 87 2.3 Precast concrete IBS solution to seven-storey skeletal frame 89 2.4 Manufacture of precast concrete components and ancillaries 93 2.4.1 Requirements and potential for automation 93 2.4.2 Floor slabs by slip-forming and extrusion techniques 93 2.4.3 Comparisons of slip-forming and extrusion techniques, and r.c. slabs 102 2.4.4 Hydraulic extruder 102 2.4.5 Reinforced hollow core slabs 103 2.4.6 Automated embedment machines for mesh and fabrics in double-tee slabs 106 2.4.7 Optimised automation 109 2.4.8 Table top wall panels 110 2.4.9 Production of precast concrete wall panels using vertical circulation system 115 2.4.10 Control of compaction of concrete 118 2.4.11 Automation of rebar bending and wire-welded cages 118 2.5 Minimum project sizes and component efficiency for IBS 120 2.6 Design implications in construction matters 120 2.7 Conclusions 122 References 124 3 Best Practice and Lessons Learned in IBS Design, Detailing and Construction 125Kim S. Elliott 3.1 Increasing off-site fabrication 125 3.2 Standardisation 133 3.3 Self-compacting concrete for precast components 137 3.4 Recycled precast concrete 142 3.5 Building services 144 3.6 Conclusions 147 References 147 4 Research and Development Towards the Optimisation of Precast Concrete Structures 149Kim S. Elliott and Zuhairi Abd. Hamid 4.1 The research effort on precast concrete framed structures 149 4.1.1 Main themes of innovation, optimisation and implementation 149 4.1.2 Structural frame action and the role of connections 151 4.1.3 Advancement and optimisation of precast elements 156 4.1.4 Shear reduction of hcu on flexible supports 157 4.1.5 Continuity of bending moments at interior supports 159 4.1.6 Horizontal diaphragm action in hollow core floors without structural toppings 160 4.2 Precast frame connections 162 4.2.1 Background to the recent improvements in frame behaviour 162 4.2.2 Moment-rotation of beam to column connections 162 4.2.3 Research and development of precast beam-to-column connections 167 4.2.4 Column effective length factors in semi-rigid frames 170 4.3 Studies on structural integrity of precast frames and connections 170 4.3.1 Derivation of catenary tie forces 170 References 173 Part 2 Mechanisation and Automation of the Production of Concrete Elements 177 5 Building Information Modelling (BIM) and Software for the Design and Detailing of Precast Structures 179Thomas Leopoldseder and Susanne Schachinger 5.1 Building information modelling (BIM) 179 5.1.1 Introduction 179 5.1.2 History and ideas 180 5.1.3 Types of BIM 183 5.1.4 BIM around the world 185 5.1.5 BIM and precast structures 187 5.2 Technologies 188 5.2.1 Industry foundation classes (IFC) 188 5.2.2 IFC data file formats and data exchange technologies 192 5.2.3 BIM model software 195 5.3 BIM in precast construction 198 5.3.1 Project pricing for precast structures based on 3D models 198 5.3.2 Technical engineering 198 5.3.3 Production data and status management 202 5.3.4 Logistics, mounting, and quality management 206 5.4 Summary 207 References 207 6 Mechanisation and Automation in Concrete Production 210Robert Neubauer 6.1 Development of industrialization and automation in the concrete prefabrication industry 210 6.1.1 Stationary flexible forms, tables and formwork in a prefabrication plant 211 6.1.2 Long-bed production 213 6.1.3 Pallet circulation plant 217 6.1.4 CAD-CAM: the path to automation 221 6.2 CAD-CAM BIM from Industry 2.0 to 4.0 224 6.2.1 Production of non-variable parts versus production in lot size one 224 6.2.2 IBS – suitable prefabricated products for mechanization and automation 227 6.2.3 Just-in-time planning and production using ERP systems 234 6.2.4 MES systems for mechanization and automation 238 6.3 Automation methods 242 6.3.1 From simple to the highly sophisticated 243 6.3.2 Automation methods 243 6.4 Integrated and automated prefabricated production process 286 6.4.1 Structures 287 6.4.2 ERP, CAD, MES, PROD machines, HMI 289 6.4.3 HMI – integrating staff into the process 289 6.4.4 Smart factory, industry 4.0 – integration into BIM 291 6.4.5 QM included 293 6.5 Limits of automation 298 6.5.1 Labour cost versus automation 298 6.5.2 Costs, necessary skills and ROI 298 6.6 Summary and outlook 300 Part 3 Industrialisation of Concrete Structures 301 7 Lean Construction – Industrialisation of On-site Production Processes 303Gerhard Girmscheid 7.1 Work process planning (WPP) 304 7.1.1 Construction production planning process – introduction 304 7.1.2 Construction production process – principles and sequence 310 7.1.3 Systematic basic production process planning – steps 311 7.1.4 Continuous construction process management 313 7.2 Construction production process planning procedure 314 7.3 Work process planning (WPP) – work execution estimation 322 7.4 Work process planning (WPP) – planning the processes and construction methods 329 7.5 Planning the execution process 332 7.6 Procedure for selecting construction methods and processes 336 7.6.1 Objectives when comparing construction methods 336 7.6.2 Methodological approach to comparing construction methods 338 7.7 Conclusions to Chapter 7 343 References 344 8 Lean Construction – Industrialisation of On-site Production Processes 346Gerhard Girmscheid 8.1 Introduction – top-down / bottom-up work planning scheduling and resource planning 347 8.2 Scheduling and resource planning 348 8.3 Site Logistics 352 8.3.1 Logistics planning 352 8.3.2 Transport logistics 354 8.3.3 Delivery, storage and turnaround logistics 355 8.3.4 Planning storage areas – storage space management 356 8.3.5 Disposal logistics 357 8.4 Weekly work plans 357 8.4.1 Lean construction – weekly work program 357 8.4.2 Equipment and material call-up 384 8.4.3 Organizing the construction workflow, construction methods, and health and safety 390 8.5 Construction site controlling process 391 8.5.1 Performance specifications 391 8.5.2 Controlling weekly work performance 393 8.6 CIP – the continuous improvement process 398 8.7 Conclusions 401 References 403 9 New Cooperative Business Model – Industrialization of Off-Site Production 404Julia Selberherr 9.1 Introduction 405 9.2 Objectives of the new business model 406 9.3 Modelling 408 9.3.1 Formal structuring 408 9.3.2 Contextual configuration of the outside view: development of the new service offer 409 9.3.3 Contextual configuration of the inside view: Realization of the value creation process 409 9.3.4 Overview 420 9.4 Conclusion 420 References 421 10 Retrospective View and Future Initiatives in Industrialised Building System s (IBS) and Modernisation, Mechanisation and Industrialisation (MMI) 424Zuhairi Abd. Hamid, Foo Chee Hung, and Ahmad Hazim Abdul Rahim 10.1 Industrialisation of the construction industry 424 10.2 Overview on global housing prefabrication 426 10.3 Housing prefabrication in Malaysia – the industrialisation building system (IBS) 427 10.3.1 Chronology of IBS development in Malaysia 429 10.3.2 IBS roadmap 433 10.3.3 IBS adoption level in Malaysia 435 10.4 Social acceptability of IBS in relation to housing 439 10.5 IBS in future – opportunity for wider IBS adoption 443 10.5.1 Greater Kuala Lumpur 444 10.5.2 Affordable housing 446 10.6 Conclusion 450 References 450 11 Affordable and Quality Housing Through Mechanization, Modernization and Mass Customisation 453Zuhairi Abd. Hamid, Foo CheeHung, and Gan Hock Beng 11.1 Introduction 453 11.2 Design for flexibility – insight from the vernacular architecture 457 11.3 Scope of flexibility in residential housing 459 11.4 Divergent Dwelling Design (D3) – proposed mass housing system for today and tomorrow 461 11.5 Design principles of D3 464 11.5.1 The design of the unit plan 465 11.5.2 Unit configurations design 466 11.5.3 Sustainable strategies design 467 11.5.4 Structure and construction design 468 11.6 Conclusion 472 References 473 Index 475

Read more less

Book SynopsisINTELLIGENT TRANSPORT SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGIES AND APPLICATIONS This book provides a systematic overview of Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS), offering an insight into the reference architectures developed within the main research projects. It delves into each of the layers of such architectures, from physical to application layer, describing the technological issues which are being currently faced by some of the most important ITS research groups. The book concludes with some end-user services and applications deployed by industrial partners. The book is a well-balanced combination of academic contributions and industrial applications in the field of Intelligent Transportation Systems. It includes the most representative technologies and research results achieved by some of the most relevant research groups working on ITS, collated to show the chances of generating industrial solutions to be deployed in real transportation environments.Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xv List of Contributors xvii Foreword xxiii Acknowledgements xxxii Part 1 Intelligent Transportation Systems 1 1 Reference ITS Architectures in Europe 3 Begoña Molinete, Sergio Campos, Ignacio (Iñaki) Olabarrieta and Ana Isabel Torre 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 FRAME: The European ITS Framework Architecture 3 1.2.1 Background 4 1.2.2 Scope 5 1.2.3 Methodology and Content 6 1.3 Cooperative Systems and Their Impact on the European ITS Architecture Definition 7 1.3.1 Research Projects and Initiatives 7 1.3.2 Pilots and Field Operational Tests 8 1.3.3 European Policy and Standardization Framework 9 1.3.4 Impact on FRAME Architecture 9 1.4 Experiences in ITS Architecture Design 10 1.4.1 Cybercars‐2: Architecture Design for a Cooperative Cybernetics Transport System 10 1.4.2 MoveUs Cloud‐Based Platform Architecture 13 References 17 2 Architecture Reference of ITS in the USA 18 Clifford D. Heise 2.1 Introduction 18 2.2 National ITS Architecture in the USA 19 2.3 Origins of ITS Architecture in the USA 19 2.4 US National ITS Architecture Definition 20 2.4.1 The Development Process 20 2.4.2 User Services 22 2.4.3 Logical Architecture 22 2.4.4 Physical Architecture 23 2.4.5 Services 25 2.4.6 Standards Mapping 25 2.5 Impact on ITS Development in USA 26 2.5.1 Architecture and Standards Regulation 27 2.5.2 ITS Planning 28 2.5.3 ITS Project Development 29 2.5.4 Tools 32 2.6 Evolution of the National ITS Architecture 34 References 35 Part 2 Wireless Vehicular Communications 37 3 Wireless Communications in Vehicular Environments 39 Pekka Eloranta and Timo Sukuvaara 3.1 Background and History of Vehicular Networking 39 3.2 Vehicular Networking Approaches 46 3.3 Vehicular Ad‐hoc Networking 48 3.3.1 Vehicle‐to‐infrastructure Communication 50 3.3.2 Vehicle‐to‐vehicle Communication 51 3.3.3 Combined Vehicle‐to‐vehicle and Vehicle‐to‐infrastructure Communication 52 3.3.4 Hybrid Vehicular Network 53 3.3.5 LTE and Liquid Applications 54 References 55 4 The Case for Wireless Vehicular Communications Supported by Roadside Infrastructure 57 Tiago Meireles, José Fonseca and Joaquim Ferreira 4.1 Introduction 57 4.1.1 Rationale for Infrastructure‐based Vehicle Communications for Safety Applications 59 4.2 MAC Solutions for Safety Applications in Vehicular Communications 61 4.2.1 Infrastructure‐based Collision‐free MAC Protocols 63 4.2.2 RT‐WiFi – TDMA Layer 65 4.2.3 Vehicular Deterministic Access (VDA) 65 4.2.4 Self‐organizing TDMA (STDMA) 66 4.2.5 MS‐Aloha 66 4.3 Vehicular Flexible Time‐triggered Protocol 68 4.3.1 Model for RSU Deployment in Motorways 68 4.3.2 RSU Infrastructure Window (IW) 69 4.3.3 V‐FTT Protocol Overview 71 4.3.4 Synchronous OBU Window (SOW) 74 4.4 V‐FTT Protocol Details 75 4.4.1 Trigger Message Size 75 4.4.2 Synchronous OBU Window Length (lsow) 77 4.4.3 V‐FTT Protocol Using IEEE 802.11p/WAVE / ITS G‐5 78 4.5 Conclusions 80 References 81 5 Cyber Security Risk Analysis for Intelligent Transport Systems and In‐vehicle Networks 83 Alastair R. Ruddle and David D. Ward 5.1 Introduction 83 5.2 Automotive Cyber Security Vulnerabilities 84 5.2.1 Information Security 85 5.2.2 Electromagnetic Vulnerabilities 85 5.3 Standards and Guidelines 86 5.3.1 Risk Analysis Concepts 86 5.3.2 Functional Safety Standards 87 5.3.3 IT Security Standards 87 5.3.4 Combining Safety and Security Analysis 88 5.4 Threat Identification 88 5.4.1 Use Cases 88 5.4.2 Security Actors 89 5.4.3 Dark‐side Scenarios and Attack Trees 90 5.4.4 Identifying Security Requirements 93 5.5 Unified Analysis of Security and Safety Risks 93 5.5.1 Severity Classification 93 5.5.2 Probability Classification 95 5.5.3 Controllability Classification 95 5.5.4 Risk Classification 95 5.5.5 Evaluating Risk from Attack Trees 97 5.5.6 Prioritizing Security Functional Requirements 100 5.5.7 Security Assurance and Safety Integrity Requirements 101 5.6 Cyber Security Risk Management 102 5.7 Conclusions 103 Acknowledgements 104 References 104 6 Vehicle Interaction with Electromagnetic Fields and Implications for Intelligent Transport Systems (ITS) Development 107 Lester Low and Alastair R. Ruddle 6.1 Introduction 107 6.2 In‐vehicle EM Field Investigation and Channel Characterization 109 6.3 Field Simulation Tools and Techniques 112 6.4 In‐vehicle EM Field Measurement 116 6.5 Simulation of Field Distribution and Antenna Placement Optimization 118 6.6 Occupant Field Exposure and Possible Field Mitigation Methods 122 6.6.1 Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields 122 6.6.2 Field Mitigation Methods 125 6.7 Conclusions 127 Acknowledgements 128 References 128 7 Novel In‐car Integrated and Roof‐mounted Antennas 131 Rus Leelaratne† 7.1 Introduction 131 7.2 Antennas for Broadcast Radio 132 7.2.1 Roof‐mounted Radio Antennas 132 7.2.2 Hidden Glass Antennas 134 7.2.3 Hidden and Integrated Antennas 136 7.3 Antennas for Telematics 137 7.3.1 Roof‐mounted Telematics Antennas 137 7.3.2 Hidden Telematics Antennas 140 7.3.3 Future Trend of Telematics Antennas 141 7.4 Antennas for Intelligent Transportation Systems 141 7.4.1 Car2Car Communication Antennas 141 7.4.2 Emergency Call (E‐Call) Antennas 143 7.4.3 Other ITS Antennas 144 7.5 Intelligent and Smart Antennas 145 7.5.1 Intelligent Antenna for Broadcast Radio 145 7.5.2 Intelligent Antenna for GNSS 146 7.6 Conclusions 147 References 147 Part 3 Sensors Networks and Surveillance at ITS 149 8 Middleware Solution to Support ITS Services in IoT‐based Visual Sensor Networks 151 Matteo Petracca, Claudio Salvadori, Andrea Azzarà, Daniele Alessandrelli,Stefano Bocchino, Luca Maggiani and Paolo Pagano 8.1 Introduction 151 8.2 Visual Sensor Networks and IoT Protocols 153 8.2.1 Visual Sensor Networks 153 8.2.2 Internet of Things 156 8.3 Proposed Middleware Architecture for IoT‐based VSNs 158 8.3.1 RESTful Web Service 159 8.3.2 Configuration Manager 160 8.3.3 Resource Processing Engine 160 8.4 Middleware Instantiation for the Parking Lot Monitoring Use Case 161 8.4.1 Use Case Scenario, Exposed Resources and Their Interaction 161 8.4.2 Middleware Implementation 163 8.5 Conclusions 164 References 165 9 Smart Cameras for ITS in Urban Environment 167 Massimo Magrini, Davide Moroni, Gabriele Pieri and Ovidio Salvetti 9.1 Introduction 167 9.2 Applications to Urban Scenarios 169 9.3 Embedded Vision Nodes 171 9.3.1 Features of Available Vision Nodes 172 9.3.2 Computer Vision on Embedded Nodes 173 9.4 Implementation of Computer Vision Logics on Embedded Systems for ITS 175 9.4.1 Traffic Status and Level of Service 175 9.4.2 Parking Monitoring 178 9.5 Sensor Node Prototype 180 9.5.1 The Vision Board 181 9.5.2 The Networking Board 182 9.5.3 The Sensor 182 9.5.4 Energy Harvesting and Housing 182 9.5.5 The Board Layout 183 9.6 Application Scenarios and Experimental Results 184 9.7 Conclusions 185 References 187 Part 4 Data Processing Techniques at ITS 189 10 Congestion Prediction by Means of Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms 191 Xiao Zhang, Enrique Onieva, Victor C.S. Lee and Kai Liu 10.1 Introduction 191 10.2 Hierarchical Fuzzy Rule‐based System (HFRBS) 193 10.3 Genetic Hierarchical Fuzzy Rule‐based System (GHFRBS) 194 10.3.1 Triple Coding Scheme 194 10.3.2 Genetic Operators 196 10.3.3 Chromosome Evaluation 197 10.3.4 Mechanism and Characteristics of the Algorithm Framework 197 10.4 Dataset Configuration and Simplification 197 10.5 Experimentation 199 10.5.1 Experimental Setup 199 10.5.2 Results 199 10.5.3 Analysis of the Results 201 10.6 Conclusions 202 Acknowledgment 203 References 203 11 Vehicle Control in ADAS Applications: State of the Art 206 Joshué Pérez, David Gonzalez and Vicente Milanés 11.1 Introduction 206 11.2 Vehicle Control in ADAS Application 206 11.3 Control Levels 207 11.4 Some Previous Works 208 11.5 Key Factor for Vehicle Control in the Market 210 11.6 ADAS Application From a Control Perspective 211 11.6.1 Lane Change Assistant Systems 212 11.6.2 Pedestrian Safety Systems 212 11.6.3 Forward‐looking Systems 213 11.6.4 Adaptive Light Control 213 11.6.5 Park Assistant 214 11.6.6 Night Vision Systems 215 11.6.7 Cruise Control System 215 11.6.8 Traffic Sign and Traffic Light Recognition 215 11.6.9 Map Supported Systems 216 11.6.10 Vehicle Interior Observation 217 11.7 Conclusions 217 References 218 12 Review of Legal Aspects Relating to Advanced Driver Assistance Systems 220 Alastair R. Ruddle and Lester Low 12.1 Introduction 220 12.2 Vehicle Type Approval 221 12.3 Trends in Vehicle Automation 223 12.3.1 EU Policy 223 12.3.2 Brake Assist Systems 223 12.3.3 Advanced Vehicle Systems 225 12.3.4 Advanced Driving Assistance Systems 226 12.3.5 Categorization of Vehicle Automation Levels 227 12.4 Vienna Convention on Road Traffic 227 12.4.1 Implications for Driving Assistance Systems 230 12.4.2 Proposed Amendments 231 12.4.3 Implications for Autonomous Driving 233 12.5 Liability Issues 234 12.5.1 Identifying Responsibilities 234 12.5.2 Event Data Recorders 236 12.6 Best Practice for Complex Systems Development 237 12.6.1 Safety Case 238 12.6.2 Safety Development Processes 239 12.6.3 ECWVTA Requirements 240 12.6.4 Cyber Security Issues 241 12.7 Conclusions 242 Acknowledgements 243 References 243 Part 5 Applications and Services for Users and Traffic Managers 247 13 Traffic Management Systems 249 António Amador, Rui Dias, Tiago Dias and Tomé Canas 13.1 Introduction 249 13.1.1 Objectives 249 13.1.2 Traffic Management 250 13.1.3 Traffic Environments 251 13.2 Traffic Management Framework 253 13.2.1 Inputs 255 13.2.2 Analysis 260 13.2.3 Outputs 265 13.3 Key Stakeholders 266 13.4 Traffic Management Centres 266 13.4.1 Scope 267 13.4.2 Operation Platforms 268 13.5 Conclusions 270 References 271 14 The Use of Cooperative ITS in Urban Traffic Management 272 Sadko Mandžuka, Edouard Ivanjko, Miroslav Vujić, Pero Škorputand Martin Gregurić 14.1 Introduction 272 14.2 Cooperative Ramp Metering 274 14.2.1 Ramp Metering 275 14.2.2 Cooperation between Local Ramp Meters 277 14.2.3 Cooperation between Ramp Metering and Other Traffic Management Systems 278 14.3 Incident Management in Urban Areas 280 14.4 Public Transport Cooperative Priorities 284 14.5 Conclusions 287 Acknowledgment 287 References 288 15 Methodology for an Intelligent in‐Car Traffic Information Management System 289 Nerea Aguiriano, Alfonso Brazalez and Luis Matey 15.1 Introduction 289 15.2 Validation Framework 291 15.3 HMI Design Methodology 292 15.3.1 Signal Model 295 15.3.2 Interpretation Model 296 15.3.3 Representation Model 302 15.4 Case Study 305 15.4.1 Signal Model for Received Messages 305 15.4.2 Interpretation Model 306 15.4.3 Representation Model 310 15.5 Conclusions 311 References 311 16 New Approaches in User Services Development for Multimodal Trip Planning 313 Asier Moreno, Itziar Salaberria and Diego Lopez‐de‐Ipiña 16.1 Introduction 313 16.1.1 Multimodal Transport 314 16.1.2 Travel User Services 315 16.2 Travel Planning Information Systems 316 16.2.1 Standard Travel Planning Services 316 16.2.2 Transit Information Formats and Standards 319 16.2.3 New Trends in Transit Information 320 16.3 Integrating Linked Open Data for Multimodal Transportation 321 16.3.1 Related Work 323 16.3.2 Management and Provision of Multimodal Transport Semantic Information 324 16.4 Conclusions 328 References 329 Index 331

Read more less

Book SynopsisCONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S BIM HANDBOOK Building Information Modelling (BIM) harnesses digital technologies to unlock more efficient methods of designing, creating and maintaining built environment assets. BIM embeds key product and asset data with a 3-dimensional model of a built asset, which can be used to foster a collaborative way of working and effective management of information throughout a project lifecycle. The UK government is encouraging the adoption of BIM by mandating that all central government departments adopt collaborative Level 2 BIM (file based collaboration and library management) by 2016 for all construction projects. The Construction Manager's BIM Handbook ensures the reader understands what BIM is, what the UK strategy is and what it means for key roles in the construction team. By providing concise summaries of key aspects of BIM, explaining the government documents and intentions, and providing pointers on implementation all readers will be fTable of ContentsForeword xiii Introduction xv Acknowledgements xviii Glossary xix Notes on Contributors xx Part I: Introduction 1 What is BIM? 3 John Eynon 2 Why BIM? 6 John Eynon 2.1 The mandate 6 2.2 Benefits 7 2.3 Digital context 7 3 BIM, Buildings and Infrastructure 9 John Eynon 3.1 3D geometry 10 3.2 4D time 10 3.3 5D cost 11 3.4 6D FM and lifecycle 11 3.5 Simulations: lighting, fire, people movement, thermal, carbon, energy 11 3.6 Operations + maintenance manuals and information 12 3.7 Visualisations 12 3.8 Site safety planning 12 3.9 Fittings, fixtures and equipment 12 3.10 Offsite manufacture 12 3.11 Lifecycle costing and management 13 3.12 Facilities management/building operations 13 3.13 Recycling 13 3.14 RFID (radio frequency identity tag) 13 3.15 Refurb/retrofit 14 3.16 3D printing 14 3.17 Automated construction 15 3.18 Validation and compliance 15 3.19 Infrastructure 15 4 BIM and Infrastructure 16 Phil Jackson 4.1 Introduction 16 4.2 In infrastructure the asset is the business 16 4.3 Infrastructure is messy 17 4.4 Federated infrastructure models 19 4.5 Specific infrastructure issues 21 4.6 Tools and data management issues 22 Part II: People 5 Collaboration 27 John Eynon 5.1 Introduction 27 5.2 Changing times 28 5.3 Tribes 29 5.4 What makes a tribe? 30 5.4.1 The Tribe of Design 30 5.4.2 The Tribe of Construct 31 5.5 Processes in conflict 32 5.6 Transition 33 5.7 One tribe 33 5.7.1 The Tribe of Solutions 33 5.8 It’s in the DNA 34 5.9 Teamthink 35 5.10 Individual and team dynamics 36 5.11 Fun and joy 37 5.12 Know yourself 37 5.13 Values 37 6 Collaborative Working 39 Anne Kemp 6.1 Introduction 39 6.2 The way into the problem: a systemic approach 40 6.3 The missing pieces to instil collaborative working 42 6.4 Instigating change 46 6.5 Looking to the individual 47 6.6 Turning to leadership: and the energy to empower individuals … 47 6.7 … and the responsibility of teams 47 6.8 Walking the talk 49 6.9 The energy within 50 6.10 Conclusions 50 6.11 Practical action points 54 References 55 7 Leadership Choices 56 Saima Butt Reference 59 Part III: Process 8 BSI B555 Roadmap 63 British Standards Institution 8.1 Introduction 63 8.2 Maturity level definitions 65 8.3 Key Roadmap deliveries 66 8.3.1 Delivery 1: 2011–present–object libraries 66 8.3.2 Delivery 2: 2013–14–process and data management 67 8.3.3 Delivery 3: 2015–onwards–guidance documents 69 8.3.4 Other BSI BIM publications 69 9 UK BIM Level 2: Key Documents 70 John Eynon 9.1 But first … What is UK BIM Level 2? 71 9.2 Conclusion 75 10 NBS BIM Toolkit: An Overview 76 Stephen Hamil 10.1 What exactly is the BIM Toolkit? 76 10.2 What benefits will the digital BIM Toolkit deliver? 77 10.3 What happens next? 79 11 BIM-ing the Team 80 John Eynon 11.1 Smart world 80 11.2 The Swamp 81 11.3 Principles of the way it will be … 81 11.4 BIM-ing the team 83 11.4.1 The construction manager 83 11.4.2 Pre-construction manager and delivery construction manager 84 11.4.3 Design manager 85 11.4.4 Estimator, quantity surveyor, commercial manager 85 11.4.5 BIM manager, coordinator 86 11.5 The final stretch 86 11.6 And finally for this chapter … 87 12 BIM Level 2: Legal Perspective 89 Sarah Rock 12.1 EIR and BEP: design and build for BIM 89 12.2 The BIM Protocol 90 12.3 The information manager 91 12.4 BIM competency 91 12.5 Standards 91 12.6 Intellectual property 92 12.7 Security of data 92 12.8 Key documents 92 12.9 Legal conclusions 93 Part IV: Wider Context 13 5D BIM: Cost 97 Adrien Guillemet 14 BIM and Facilities Management 101 Kath Fontana 14.1 Introduction 101 14.2 Collaboration between facilities management practitioners and other built environment disciplines 101 14.3 Facilities management and information management 102 14.4 Data exchange and COBie 103 14.5 Government Soft Landings 105 14.6 Conclusions 106 15 Cyber Security 107 Steve Race 15.1 Architects Registration Board (ARB) Clause 4.3 108 15.2 Sensitive building typologies 109 15.3 Servers 109 15.4 Virtual participants 110 15.5 The Institute of Engineering and Technology (IET) Code of Practice–Cyber Security in the Built Environment 111 15.6 Ending 112 16 Level 2, Level 3 and Beyond… 113 Mark Bew 16.1 Introduction 113 16.2 What is the BIM Programme all about? 113 16.3 Level 2 114 16.4 The next phase: Level 3 BIM 117 16.5 Conclusions and next steps 119 17 The Next Construction Revolution 121 Richard Threlfall 18 BIM and the Future of Design Management 123 Stephen Emmitt 18.1 Future challenges 124 18.2 What is to become of the design manager? 125 Further reading 126 19 BIM and Social Media 127 Fred Mills 19.1 The social duty of Generation Y 127 19.2 Generational advantage 127 19.3 Implications for AEC 128 19.4 The Y-bridge 129 19.4.1 Support to knowledge sharing 129 19.4.2 Support to the project delivery and asset management (BIM) workflows 130 19.4.3 Democratisation of built asset delivery and operation 131 20 BIM Leaders of the Future: Engaging the Digital Generation 133 Alison Watson 20.1 Introduction 133 20.2 Time flies: how six years can make all the difference 134 20.3 The challenges in engaging the Digital Generation 135 20.4 In conclusion: less is more 138 20.5 Five things to do today if you want to change the future 140 Further reading 141 21 Getting Started – BIM Implementation and SMEs 142 John Eynon 21.1 Eating the #BIMelephant! 142 21.2 Resource number one–assessment and BEP 142 21.3 Resource number two–Task Group website 143 21.4 Resource number three–the BIM cube 143 21.5 Resource number four–support 144 21.6 Conclusion 144 21.7 As for the #BIMelephant! … ! 144 22 Afterword: BIM, Digital Life and the Third Industrial Revolution 146 John Eynon 22.1 The pace of digital evolution 146 22.2 What does it mean for us? 147 22.3 The Third Industrial Revolution 148 22.4 For Generation Z … it’s as natural as breathing‘ 148 22.5 2016 and beyond 149 Part V: Appendices Appendix A BIM Dictionary 153 Appendix B BIM Acronyms 175 Appendix c Digital Built Britain BIM Level 3 Strategy 186 Appendix D 1 Software: Introduction 187 Appendix D 2 Collaboration Tools 191 Appendix E 1 Synchro Oakwood 4D Model Case Study 193 Appendix E 2 Synchro HARBORcenter Case Study 207 Appendix E 3 Autodesk Case Study: The New Way of Working 211 Appendix E 4 Bentley Case Study: Dŵr Cymru Welsh Water Deploys Bentley’s ProjectWise to Improve Team Collaboration 216 Bibliography 219 Index 225

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book advocates a more thoughtful approach to urban water management. The approach involves reducing water consumption, harvesting rainwater, recycling rainwater and adopting Sustainable Drainage Systems (SuDS) where surface water is not sent straight to drains but is intercepted by features like green roofs, rain gardens, swales and ponds.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Acknowledgement xv 1. Water and Cities 1 The Molecule 1 Blue Planet 1 A Global Water Cycle 2 Terrain and Water 2 Seasons and Cycles 4 Variations in Rainfall 4 Changing Climates 5 Atmospheric Carbon Dioxide 5 Fossil Fuels and Growth 6 The Ancients and Water 6 Dams 7 Limits 7 Sanitation 9 Pollution 9 Urban Drainage 10 Potable Water 12 Waste 12 Rainwater Harvesting 13 Recycling 14 Biodiversity 14 Restoration 15 The Future 16 Privatization and Regulation 16 Coordination and Cooperation 17 Towards a Better Future 18 2. A Brief History of Water Supply and Sanitation 19 Genesis 19 Bronze Age 20 The First Aqueducts 20 Nineveh 21 The Nile 21 The Minoans 22 Qanats 22 Pompeii 23 Byzantium 24 Yucatan 24 The Incas 25 Qi 26 Lijiang 26 Medieval and Early Modern Europe 26 Early Victorian Period 27 Germ Theory 27 The Great Stink 28 Modern Sewers and Sewage Treatment 28 Sewage Treatment Refined 29 Standards for Sewage Treatment 29 Birmingham Corporation Water Act 1892 30 Los Angeles and the Owens Valley 30 3. Demand 33 Basic Needs 33 Personal Consumption 34 Water Footprint 35 Dependency 36 China 36 Germany 36 India 37 Indonesia 37 Spain 38 United Kingdom 38 Water Footprint of Products 38 Meat 39 Vegetable Crops 39 Power Plants 40 Steel 41 Mining, Oil and Gas 42 When Will Water Consumption Peak? 42 4. Supply 43 The Roof of the World 43 Mountains 44 Forests 45 Reservoirs 46 Impacts of Dams 46 Lowland Rivers 47 Licensing Abstraction 48 Aquifers 48 Nitrate 49 Overabstraction 49 Desalination 50 Reverse Osmosis 50 Impacts of Desalination 51 High Cost of Desalination 51 Rainwater Harvesting 51 Pressure and Pumps 52 Pipework 52 Reliant on Rain 53 5. Climate Change and Water 55 Climate Changes 55 The Greenhouse Effect 55 Callendar 56 Keeling 57 Atmosphere and Oceans 57 Details of the Carbon Cycle 57 The IPCC 58 Stern and the Financial Crisis 58 400 ppm Breached 59 Two Degrees 59 Sea Level Rises 60 Coastal Cities 61 Warmer Seas 62 Ice 62 Feedback Loops 62 Ocean Chemistry 63 Snowmelt 63 Models and Projections 65 Summer Storms 66 Heat Waves 66 Drought 66 6. Microclimate 69 Climate 69 Microclimate 69 City Microclimates 70 Urban Heat]Island Effect 70 Smog 70 Solving the Air]Pollution Problem 71 Cooler Roofs 72 Living Walls 73 Trees Cool Streets 74 Parks 75 Quality of Green Space 75 Locating Trees 76 Water Bodies 76 Rivers 76 Heat]Related Deaths 77 Energy Savings 78 An Overwhelming Case 79 7. Ecosystem Approach 81 The Great Acceleration 81 The Convention on Biological Diversity 81 Ecosystem Approach 82 Ecosystems 82 Principles of the Ecosystem Approach 83 Operational Guidance 85 Ecosystem Approach and the Water]Sensitive City 87 Impacts and Responsibilities 88 Limits 88 City]Scale Planning 89 The City Spectrum 89 Ecosystem Services 89 Valuation of Ecosystem Services 90 Supporting Services 91 Regulating Services 91 Provisioning Services 91 Cultural Services 92 Economics and Ecosystems 92 8. Rivers and Coasts 95 The Source 95 A River of Life 95 Transport Revolution 96 Regeneration 96 Water Quality and Regeneration 97 The Idea Spreads 97 A More Natural Approach 98 River Restoration and Urban Regeneration 99 Greening the River Wall 99 Coastal Cities 100 Beach Life 101 Fun in the Sun 101 The Front Line 102 An Uncertain Future 103 9. Near-Natural Drainage 105 Rain-Garden Origins 105 Scotland Takes Up the Challenge 106 England & Wales 106 Working with Nature 106 Management Train 107 Source Control 108 Green Roofs 108 Holding Water on the Roof 109 Rain Gardens 110 The Idea Spreads 111 Other Permeable Load]Bearing Surfaces 112 Underground Voids 113 Trees and Water 114 Stockholm Tree Pits 115 Conveyance 115 Rills 116 Ponds 116 Detention Ponds 116 Attenuation Ponds 117 Floating Wetlands 117 Larger Water Bodies 118 Make Space for Water 119 10. Reduce 121 A Worthwhile Effort 121 Reduce Leaks 121 Monitor 122 Check for Leaks 123 Less Flush 123 Toilets are Not for Trash 123 Composting Toilets 124 Showers 124 Washing Machines 124 Dishwashers 125 Garden Irrigation 125 The Workplace 126 Behaviour Change 126 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning 126 Vehicle Washing 127 Urban Farming and Recycled Water 128 Diet and Water 128 Soft Drinks 128 Clothing 129 Reduction Targets 129 11. Collect 131 Reduce Reliance on Abstraction 131 When Sealed Surfaces are Useful 131 Rainwater Harvesting 132 How Rainwater is Tainted 132 First Flush 133 Novel Methods 133 Filters and Tanks 134 Siting a Tank 134 Materials 135 Treating Rainwater 135 Sizing Tanks 136 City Centre Rainwater Harvesting 137 Potsdamer Platz 137 District Collection 138 Singapore Wants Every Drop 138 Legal Problems 139 Dew 140 Lanzarote 140 Air Wells 140 Lightweight Fog Catchers 141 Foil Collectors 141 Biomimicry: Desert Beetle 142 Potential in Towns 142 Condensate 142 Collecting Alone is Insufficient 143 12. Recycle 145 Huge Potential 145 Treated Wastewater 146 The Big Dry 146 Greywater 146 Treating Greywater 147 Microbes and Membranes 148 Regulations 148 Standards 149 German Pioneers 150 Jordan 150 Domestic Greywater Recycling 151 13. Water Quality 153 Nature Cleans 153 Safe to Drink? 153 Microbes 154 Which Pathogens to Monitor? 156 Bacteria 156 Protozoa 157 Treatment 157 Chemical Contaminants 159 Nitrates 159 Pharmaceutical Contaminants 161 Radioactive Substances 161 Smell and Taste 161 Standards 162 United States 162 Europe 162 China 163 Clean Water Act 163 Water Framework Directive 164 Earlier Legislation 165 The Struggle for Compliance 165 Nonpoint Source Pollution 165 Dust in the Streets 166 Urban Runoff 166 A Continuing Problem 166 14. Future Water]Sensitive Cities 169 Waste Not 169 Measure 170 Water Collection 170 Recycling and Cooling 170 Smart Plumbing 171 Water and Power 171 Water and Roofs 172 Water and Walls 173 Blue]Green Infrastructure 173 Making Room 175 A More Permeable City 175 Green Streets 175 Street Life 175 Sparkling Streets 177 Urban Food Revolution 177 Urban Farms 177 Agricultural Reform 178 Relax and Play 178 Swimming and Boating 178 Encounters with Nature 179 Rediscovering Urban Waterways 179 A Greener Looking City 180 Living with Climate Change 180 Tough Decisions 181 Younger and Wiser 181 Hope 182 Useful Resources 183 Notes 191 Index 207

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn this comprehensive book, Professor Randy Deutsch has unlocked and laid bare the twenty-first century codice nascosto of architecture. It is data. Big data. Data as driver. . .This book offers us the chance to become informed and knowledgeable pursuers of data and the opportunities it offers to making architecture a wonderful, useful, and smart art form. From the Foreword by James Timberlake, FAIA Written for architects, engineers, contractors, owners, and educators, and based on today's technology and practices, Data-Driven Design and Construction: 25 Strategies for Capturing, Applying and Analyzing Building Data addresses how innovative individuals and firms are using data to remain competitive while advancing their practices. seeks to address and rectify a gap in our learning, by explaining to architects, engineers, contractors and ownersand students of these fieldshow to acquire and use data to make more informed decisions.Table of ContentsForeword xiiiJames Timberlake, FAIA, Partner, KieranTimberlake Preface xv Acknowledgments xxiii Introduction: Measuring the Immeasurable, Validating the Ineffable 1 Not One More Thing 1 Strategies for Practice 2 Benefits of Gathering, Analyzing, and Applying Building Data 4 Challenges of Gathering, Analyzing, and Applying Building Data 13 Strategy No. 1: Hone in on Key Information 17 Strategy No. 2: Demonstrating Works, Explaining Doesn’t 20 PART I Why Data, Why Now? 27 Chapter 1 The Data Turn 29 Five Factors Leading to the Leveraging of Data and Industry Change 29 Strategy No. 3: Look Outside the Industry 32 Case Study Interview with Robert Yori 37 Strategy No. 4: Not Big Data, Smart Data 54 Case Study Interview with Sean D. Burke 55 Data versus Documents 61 Case Study Interview with Jonatan Schumacher 63 Chapter 2 A Data -Driven Design Approach for Buildings 71 Five Trends Leading to the Rise of Data in the AECO Industry 71 Strategy No. 5: Eight Questions to Ask for Data Preparedness 73 Case Study Interview with Zigmund Rubel 75 Data-Centric Approaches 84 Case Study Interview with Andrew Heumann 86 Strategy No. 6: Four Steps toward Making the Change to Be More Data-Centric 87 Strategy No. 7: Ask Good Questions 88 Case Study Interview with Jonathon Broughton 96 Chapter 3 Learning from Data 107 Five Factors Ensuring Data Preparedness 107 Training, Learning, and Working with Data 110 Case Study Interview with Brian Ringley 113 Strategy No. 8: Play with Data 123 Case Study Interview with Toru Hasegawa 126 Case Study Interview with Aimee Buccellato 134 PART II Capturing, Analyzing, and Applying Building Data 141 Chapter 4 Capturing and Mining Project Data 143 Public Sources of Data 143 Case Study Interview with Ryan Mullenix 145 Private Data Sources 153 Case Study Interview with Sam Miller 157 Having a Data Collection Strategy 169 Strategy No. 9: Create a Data Collection Strategy 169 Case Study Interview with Gregory Janks 170 Strategy No. 10: First Steps to Becoming Data-Centric 174 Chapter 5 Analyzing Data 179 Analysis versus Analytics 179 Strategy No. 11: First Steps in Applying Data Analysis 180 Predictive Analytics 180 Case Study Interview with Mads Jensen 182 Strategy No. 12: Two Ways to Think about Energy Analysis 191 Strategy No. 13: Analysis for Sustainable Design 192 Case Study Interview with Chris Pyke, PhD 198 Strategy No. 14: How Analysis Informs Decision Making 201 Strategy No. 15: Start Simple, Technology Optional 202 Strategy No. 16: Leverage Data as Means to an End 203 Case Study Interview with Brendon Levitt 203 Dhour Case Study 209 Chapter 6 Applying Data 213 First Steps 213 Strategy No. 17: First Steps Before Applying Data 214 Strategy No. 18: Plan for the Data 215 Case Study Interview with Billie Faircloth 216 Data-Enabled Project Teams 222 Strategy No. 19: Should the Data Team Be Integrated or Stationed in the Corner? 225 Case Study Interview with Andrew Witt 226 Data-Intensive Roles 230 Strategy No. 20: Computer Scientist vs. Emerging Professional 231 Case Study Interview with Greig Paterson 235 Leadership in Data 238 PART III What Data Means for You, Your Firm, Profession, and Industry 241 Chapter 7 Data in Construction and Operations 243 Data in Construction 244 Strategy No. 21: Construction-Related Data Questions 245 Case Study Interview with Tyler Goss 246 Responding to Change 250 Case Study Interview with Mani Golparvar-Fard, PhD 250 Linking Design, Construction, and Operations 259 Strategy No. 22: Extract and Transfer What Matters 261 Case Study Interview with Bill East, PhD 262 Standards and Interoperability 266 Case Study Interview with Greg Schleusner 267 Chapter 8 Data for Building Owners and End Users 273 Benefits to the Owner 273 Case Study Interview with Sukanya Paciorek 274 Direction to Work with Data 277 Case Study Interview with Peter Pellerzi 279 Strategy No. 23: with Data, the Heart of the Issue Is Culture 280 AECO Firms as Data Intermediaries 281 Case Study Interview with Brian Skripac 282 Data Visualization Helps Owners Make Decisions 285 Case Study: Data Viz Using Revit 286 Case Study Interview with Evelyn Lee 293 Data-Driven Design Driven by Owners 296 Chapter 9 Building a Case for Leveraging Data 297 Business Intelligence (BI) and Current-State Assessment 297 Fee and Profitability Data Case Study 298 Case Study Interview with David Fano and Dr. Daniel Davis 300 Strategy No. 24: Big Data in Practice 301 Security and Privacy 310 Case Study Interview with Mark Frisch, FAIA, LEED AP BD+C 312 Sharing Data 324 Case Study Interview with David Sawdey 325 Strategy No. 25: Use Data to Provide Better Service 326 Epilogue The Future Of Data In AEC 331 Our Data-Driven Future 331 The Future Is Already Here 333 Appendix 337 Experts, Innovators, and Thought Leaders Interviewed 337 Organizations and Universities Represented 338 The 25 Data-Driven Strategies 339 Software Mentioned 339 Recommended Reading 341 Index 343

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers both the practical and theoretical aspects of catastrophe modelling for insurance industry practitioners and public policymakers. Written by authors with both academic and industry experience it also functions as an excellent graduate-level text and overview of the field. Ours is a time of unprecedented levels of risk from both natural and anthropogenic sources. Fortunately, it is also an era of relatively inexpensive technologies for use in assessing those risks. The demand from both commercial and public interestsincluding (re)insurers, NGOs, global disaster management agencies, and local authoritiesfor sophisticated catastrophe risk assessment tools has never been greater, and contemporary catastrophe modelling satisfies that demand. Combining the latest research with detailed coverage of state-of-the-art catastrophe modelling techniques and technologies, this book delivers the knowledge needed to use, interpret, and build catastrophe models, and prTable of ContentsList of Contributors and Acknowledgements xiii Foreword xxv 1 Fundamentals 1Matthew Jones, Kirsten Mitchell-Wallace, Matthew Foote, and John Hillier 1.1 Overview 1 1.1.1 What Is Included 1 1.1.2 What Is Not Included 1 1.1.3 Why Read This Chapter? 1 1.2 Catastrophes, Risk Management and Insurance 2 1.3 What Are Catastrophe Models? 5 1.4 Why Do We Need Catastrophe Models? 6 1.5 History of Catastrophe Models 7 1.6 Who Provides and Uses Catastrophe Models? 10 1.7 What Are Catastrophe Models Used For? 11 1.8 Anatomy of a Catastrophe Model 12 1.8.1 Hazard 13 1.8.2 Vulnerability 14 1.8.3 Exposure 15 1.8.4 Loss and Financial Perspectives 15 1.8.5 Platform 17 1.9 Model Input 19 1.9.1 Exposure 20 1.9.2 Financial Structure 24 1.9.3 Portfolio Hierarchy 25 1.10 Model Output: Metrics and Risk Measures 26 1.10.1 Common Metrics 26 1.10.2 Exceedance probability curve characteristics 27 1.10.3 More Advanced Metrics 29 1.10.4 Event Loss Tables and Year Loss Tables 29 1.10.5 Event Loss Table (ELT) 29 1.10.6 Year Loss Table (YLT) 36 1.11 Statistical Basics for Catastrophe Modelling 38 1.11.1 Discrete Distributions 40 1.11.2 Continuous Distributions 42 1.11.3 Coherent Risk Measures 44 Notes 44 References 45 2 Applications of Catastrophe Modelling 47Kirsten Mitchell-Wallace 2.1 Overview 47 2.1.1 What Is Included 48 2.1.2 What Is Not Included 48 2.1.3 Why Read This Chapter? 48 2.2 Introduction 48 2.3 Risk Transfer, the Structure of the (Re)insurance Industry and Catastrophe Modelling 49 2.4 Insurance and Reinsurance 52 2.4.1 What Is Insurance? 52 2.4.2 What Is Reinsurance? 53 2.5 Catastrophe Risk Management and Catastrophe Modelling 60Kirsten Mitchell-Wallace and Matthew Foote 2.5.1 What Are Catastrophe Risk Management and Exposure Management? 60 2.5.2 Catastrophe Risk Management Metrics 61 2.5.3 Catastrophe Risk Management Data 62 2.5.4 Exposure Data 63 2.5.5 Common Tools Used in Catastrophe Risk Management 70 2.6 Underwriting and Pricing 70Kirsten Mitchell-Wallace and Matthew Jones 2.6.1 What Is Underwriting? 70 2.6.2 What Is Pricing? 73 2.6.3 Practicalities of Using Catastrophe Model Output for Pricing 81 2.6.4 Pricing Specifics for Insurance and Reinsurance 83 2.7 Accumulation, Roll-Up and Capacity Monitoring 97Claire Crerar and Kirsten Mitchell-Wallace 2.7.1 What Is Accumulation? 97 2.7.2 Use in Underwriting and Risk Management 101 2.7.3 Practicalities of Accumulation 104 2.8 Portfolio Management and Optimization 105Kirsten Mitchell-Wallace and Guillermo Franco 2.8.1 What Is Portfolio Management? 105 2.8.2 What Is Portfolio Optimization? 107 2.8.3 Using Catastrophe Models in Optimization 108 2.8.4 Optimization Methods 109 2.9 Event Response and Integration with Claims Team 111Kirsten Mitchell-Wallace 2.9.1 Early Estimation of Claims 111 2.9.2 Claims Stresses and Inflation 114 2.9.3 Lessons Learnt Analysis 115 2.10 Capital Modelling, Management and Dynamic Financial Analysis 116Junaid Seria 2.10.1 Risk Appetite and Risk Tolerance 116 2.10.2 Why Capital Models? 117 2.10.3 What Is a Capital Model? 118 2.10.4 The Structure of Capital Models 118 2.10.5 Capital Models and Catastrophe Models 120 2.10.6 What is Dynamic Financial Analysis (DFA)? 120 2.11 Regulation and Best Practice in Catastrophe Modelling 121Junaid Seria, Claire Souch, and Paul Nunn 2.11.1 The Evolution of Catastrophe Modelling as a Profession and Best Practice 121 2.11.2 Rating Agencies 125 2.11.3 Regulation and Catastrophe Modelling 126 2.11.4 Case Study: Catastrophe Models and Solvency Regulation, Solvency II 128 2.11.5 Case Study: Regulation of Catastrophe Models for Ratemaking 135 2.12 Case Study: Catastrophe Modelling for Reinsurance and Retrocession Purchase 137Juan England 2.12.1 Introduction 137 2.12.2 Determining the Total Limit Required 138 2.12.3 Layering of a CAT XL Programme 140 2.12.4 Price 140 2.12.5 Cost Allocation 141 2.12.6 Conclusion 141 2.13 Government Schemes and Insurance 142Matthew Eagle 2.13.1 Introduction 142 2.13.2 Government Schemes with Standalone Products Managed by a Central Organization 144 2.13.3 Government Schemes Where Catastrophe Cover Is Provided as an Add-on to Fire 144 2.13.4 Government-Backed Reinsurance/Pooling Schemes 144 2.13.5 Private Insurance Company Pools Supported by Government Legislation 144 2.13.6 Case Study: UK Flood Re 152 2.14 Catastrophe Models and Applications in the Public Sector 154Rashmin Gunasekera 2.14.1 Introduction 154 2.14.2 Public Sector Catastrophe Models 154 2.14.3 Applications of Public Sector Catastrophe Models 155 2.14.4 Case Study: Country Disaster Risk Profiles (CDRP) 156 2.15 Insurance Linked Securities 158Arnab Chakrabati 2.15.1 What Are Insurance Linked Securities? 158 2.15.2 From Insurance to Reinsurance to ILS 159 2.15.3 Common ILS Instruments 160 2.15.4 Preliminaries of ILS Instrument: Measurement and Layering of Losses 160 2.15.5 Pricing an ILS Contract 162 2.15.6 Pricing Cat Bonds with the Thin Layer Model 163 2.15.7 Growth of the Market for ILS 164 2.15.8 Conclusion 166 2.16 Effective use of Catastrophe Models 167Ian Cook, Matthew Jones, Adam Podlaha, and Kirsten Mitchell-Wallace 2.16.1 Treatment of Uncertainty in Catastrophe Models 167 2.16.2 Importance of Framework: A Tool, Not an Answer 179 Notes 181 References 181 3 The Perils in Brief 187John Hillier 3.1 Overview 187 3.1.1 What Is Included 187 3.1.2 What Is Not Included 191 3.1.3 Why Read This Chapter? 191 3.X Structure of the Sections 192 3.X.1 What Is the Peril? 192 3.X.2 Damage Caused by the Peril 192 3.X.3 Forecasting Ability and Mitigation 192 3.X.4 Representation in Industry Catastrophe Models 193 3.X.5 Secondary Perils and Non-Modelled Items 193 3.X.6 Key Past Events 193 3.X.7 Open Questions/Current Hot Topics/Questions to Ask Your Vendor 193 3.X.8 Non-Proprietary Data Sources 193 METEOROLOGICAL PERILS (I.E. ‘WIND-DRIVEN’) 194 3.2 Tropical Cyclones 194James Done and Brian Owens 3.2.1 What Is the Peril? 194 3.2.2 Damage Caused by the Peril 198 3.2.3 Forecasting Ability and Mitigation 198 3.2.4 Representation in Industry Catastrophe Models 199 3.2.5 Secondary Perils and Non-Modelled Items 200 3.2.6 Key Past Events 200 3.2.7 Open Questions/Current Hot Topics/Questions to Ask Your Vendor 201 3.2.8 Nonproprietary Data Sources 202 Acknowledgements 202 3.3 Extra-Tropical Cyclones 202Len Shaffrey and Richard Dixon 3.3.1 What Is the Peril? 202 3.3.2 Damage Caused by the Peril 205 3.3.3 Forecasting Ability and Mitigation 206 3.3.4 Representation in Industry Catastrophe Models 206 3.3.5 Secondary Perils and Non-Modelled Items 207 3.3.6 Key Past Events 207 3.3.7 Open Questions/Current Hot Topics/Questions to Ask Your Vendor 208 3.3.8 Nonproprietary Data Sources 209 3.4 Severe Convective Storms 209Michael Kunz and Peter Geissbuehler 3.4.1 What Is the Peril? 209 3.4.2 Damaged Caused by the Peril 213 3.4.3 Forecasting Ability and Mitigation 214 3.4.4 Representation in Industry Catastrophe Models 215 3.4.5 Secondary Perils and Non-modelled Items 216 3.4.6 Key Past Events 216 3.4.7 Open Questions/Current Hot Topics/Questions to Ask Your Vendor 216 3.4.8 Nonproprietary Data Sources 217 HYDROLOGICAL PERILS (I.E. ‘RAIN-DRIVEN’) 218 3.5 Inland Flooding 218Jane Toothill and Rob Lamb 3.5.1 What Is the Peril? 218 3.5.2 Damage Caused by the Peril 221 3.5.3 Forecasting Ability and Mitigation 221 3.5.4 Representation in Industry Catastrophe Models 223 3.5.5 Secondary Perils and Non-Modelled Items 228 3.5.6 Key Past Events 228 3.5.7 Open Questions/Current Hot Topics/Questions to Ask Your Vendor 229 3.5.8 Nonproprietary Data Sources 229 Acknowledgements 230 3.6 Shrink-Swell Subsidence 230John Hillier 3.6.1 What Is the Peril? 230 3.6.2 Damage Caused Caused by the Peril 231 3.6.3 Forecasting Ability and and Mitigation 231 3.6.4 Representation in Industry Catastrophe Models 232 3.6.5 Key Past Events 232 3.7 Earthquakes 232Joanna Faure Walker and Guillaume Pousse 3.7.1 What Is the Peril? 232 3.7.2 Damage Caused by the Peril 237 3.7.3 Forecasting Ability and Mitigation 239 3.7.4 Representation in Industry Catastrophe Models 240 3.7.5 Secondary Perils and Non-Modelled Items 242 3.7.6 Key Past Events 243 3.7.7 Open Questions/Current Hot Topics/Questions to Ask Your Vendor 243 3.7.8 Nonproprietary Data Sources 244 3.8 Mass Movement 245Tom Dijkstra, Craig Verdon, and John Hillier 3.8.1 What Is the Peril? 245 3.8.2 Damage Caused by the Peril 246 3.8.3 Forecasting Ability and Mitigation 246 3.8.4 Representation in Industry Catastrophe Models 247 3.8.5 Secondary Perils and Non-Modelled Items 247 3.8.6 Key Past Events 248 3.8.7 Open Questions/Current Hot Topics/Questions to Ask Your Vendor 249 3.8.8 Nonproprietary Data Sources 249 3.9 Tsunami 250Anawat Suppasri and Yo Fukutani 3.9.1 What Is the Peril 250 3.9.2 Damaged Caused by the Peril 251 3.9.3 Forecasting Ability and Mitigation 252 3.9.4 Representation in Industry Catastrophe Models 252 3.9.5 Secondary Perils and Non-Modelled Items 252 3.9.6 Key Past Events 253 3.9.7 Open Questions/Current Hot Topics/Questions to Ask Your Vendor 253 3.9.8 Nonproprietary Data Sources 253 3.10 Volcanoes 254Sue Loughlin, Rashmin Gunasekera, and John Hillier 3.10.1 What Is the Peril? 254 3.10.2 Damage Caused by the Peril 256 3.10.3 Forecasting Ability and Mitigation 256 3.10.4 Representation in Catastrophe Models 257 3.10.5 Secondary Perils and Non-Modelled Items 257 3.10.6 Key Past Events 257 3.10.7 Open Questions/Current Hot Topics/Questions to Ask Your Vendor 258 3.10.8 Non-Proprietary Data Sources 258 References 258 4 Building Catastrophe Models 297Matthew Foote, Kirsten Mitchell-Wallace, Matthew Jones, and John Hillier 4.1 Overview 297 4.1.1 What Is Included 297 4.1.2 What Is Not Included 298 4.1.3 Why Read This Chapter? 298 4.2 Introduction 298 4.3 Hazard 301 4.3.1 Deterministic Versus Probabilistic Hazard Models 302 4.3.2 Representing the Hazard Severity 307 4.3.3 Understanding the Historical Hazard 308 4.3.4 Deterministic Hazard Models: Historical Reconstructions 315 4.3.5 Site-Based Extrapolation: A Local Solution 316 4.3.6 Building a Probabilistic Event-Set 319 4.3.7 Secondary or Consequent Perils 331 4.3.8 Time-Dependent Hazard Modelling and Clustering of Catastrophe Events 333 4.4 Exposure Models and Databases 334 4.4.1 Economic or Insured Exposure Data? 336 4.4.2 Economic and Insurance Industry Exposure Database Development Approaches 337 4.4.3 Bottom-Up Industry Exposure Database Development 339 4.5 Vulnerability 341 4.5.1 Vulnerability Function Development 343 4.5.2 Empirical Vulnerability Approaches 348 4.5.3 Analytical Vulnerability Approaches 355 4.5.4 Use of Design Codes in Vulnerability Function Development 357 4.5.5 Using Buildings Damage to Determine Other (Non-Structural) Types of Loss 362 4.5.6 Vulnerabilities for Non-Standard Exposures 363 4.5.7 Validating Vulnerability Models 365 4.6 Integrating Model Components and the Geographical Framework 367 4.6.1 Relative Spatial Resolution/Nominal Scale of Source Data 367 4.6.2 Geodetic and Coordinate Bases of Data Sources 368 4.6.3 Relative Vintage of Source Data 368 4.6.4 Point Representation Versus Cell, Area Geographies 368 4.6.5 Data Generalization, Interpolation and Smoothing 369 4.7 The Financial Model 369 4.7.1 Why We Need a Financial Model 369 4.7.2 Uncertainty 371 4.7.3 Case Study: Combining Distributions: Convolution 373 4.7.4 Applying Financial Structures 377 4.7.5 Case Study: Back-Allocation 378 4.7.6 Financial Model Output 378 4.8 Model Validation 379 4.9 Conclusion 381 Note 381 References 381 5 Developing a View of Risk 389Matthew Jones 5.1 Overview 389 5.1.1 What Is Included 389 5.1.2 What Is Not Included 389 5.1.3 Why Read This Chapter? 389 5.2 Introduction 390 5.2.1 Why Develop a View of Risk? 390 5.2.2 What Developing a View of Risk Involves 392 5.2.3 Practical Considerations in a Resource-Constrained World 392 5.2.4 Insurance Versus Reinsurance 393 5.3 Governance and Model Change Management 394 5.3.1 Governance 394 5.3.2 The View of the Risk Process 395 5.3.3 Prioritization 396 5.3.4 Vendor Selection and High-Level Model Evaluation 397 5.3.5 Detailed Model Evaluation 397 5.3.6 Non-Modelled Peril Evaluation 398 5.3.7 Sign-off 399 5.3.8 Implementation 399 5.3.9 Review Triggers and Frequency 400 5.3.10 Other Governance Aspects 400 5.4 How to Develop a View of Risk 401 5.4.1 Understanding What Is in the Model 401 5.4.2 Analysing Model Output (Including Sensitivity Testing) 405 5.4.3 Actual Versus Modelled, Comparing to Own Company Experience 419 5.4.4 Comparing Multiple Models 427 5.4.5 Using Industry Data 429 5.4.6 Considering the Time Period of Risk 434 5.4.7 Understanding What Is Not in the Model: Non-Modelled Risk 435 5.5 Implementing a View of Risk 442 5.5.1 Different Uses in a Company 442 5.5.2 Consistency in an Organization 443 5.5.3 Methods of Implementation: Single Model 443 5.5.4 Methods of Implementation: Multiple Models 446 5.6 Conclusion 452 Notes 452 References 452 6 Summary and the Future 455John Hillier, Kirsten Mitchell-Wallace, Matthew Jones, and Matthew Foote6.1 Overview 455 6.2 Key Themes in the Book 455 6.2.1 Chapter 1 Introduction 455 6.2.2 Chapter 2 Applications of Catastrophe Modelling 456 6.2.3 Chapter 3 The Perils in Brief 456 6.2.4 Chapter 4 Building a Catastrophe Model 457 6.2.5 Chapter 5 Developing a View of Risk 457 6.3 The Future: Progress, Challenges and Issues 458 6.3.1 Future Changes in Climate 458Clare Souch 6.3.2 Modelling Dependency between Perils 460Rick Thomas 6.3.3 Open Modelling and Open Architectures 461Dicke Whitaker 6.3.4 The Role of Modelling in Disaster Risk Financing 463Rashmin Gunasekera 6.3.5 Changing Global Demographics and Growing Insurance Penetration 464John Hillier References 464 Glossary 467 Index 495

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn update of a classic textbook covering a core subject taught on most civil engineering courses. Civil Engineering Hydraulics, 6th edition contains substantial worked example sections with an online solutions manual. This classic text provides a succinct introduction to the theory of civil engineering hydraulics, together with a large number of worked examples and exercise problems. Each chapter contains theory sections and worked examples, followed by a list of recommended reading and references. There are further problems as a useful resource for students to tackle, and exercises to enable students to assess their understanding. The numerical answers to these are at the back of the book, and solutions are available to download from the book?s companion website.Table of ContentsPreface to Sixth Edition xi About the Author xiii Symbols xv 1 Properties of Fluids 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Engineering units 1 1.3 Mass density and specific weight 2 1.4 Relative density 2 1.5 Viscosity of fluids 2 1.6 Compressibility and elasticity of fluids 2 1.7 Vapour pressure of liquids 2 1.8 Surface tension and capillarity 3 Worked examples 3 References and recommended reading 5 Problems 5 2 Fluid Statics 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Pascal’s law 7 2.3 Pressure variation with depth in a static incompressible fluid 8 2.4 Pressure measurement 9 2.5 Hydrostatic thrust on plane surfaces 11 2.6 Pressure diagrams 14 2.7 Hydrostatic thrust on curved surfaces 15 2.8 Hydrostatic buoyant thrust 17 2.9 Stability of floating bodies 17 2.10 Determination of metacentre 18 2.11 Periodic time of rolling (or oscillation) of a floating body 20 2.12 Liquid ballast and the effective metacentric height 20 2.13 Relative equilibrium 22 Worked examples 24 Reference and recommended reading 41 Problems 41 3 Fluid Flow Concepts and Measurements 47 3.1 Kinematics of fluids 47 3.2 Steady and unsteady flows 48 3.3 Uniform and non-uniform flows 48 3.4 Rotational and irrotational flows 49 3.5 One-, two- and three-dimensional flows 49 3.6 Streamtube and continuity equation 49 3.7 Accelerations of fluid particles 50 3.8 Two kinds of fluid flow 51 3.9 Dynamics of fluid flow 52 3.10 Energy equation for an ideal fluid flow 52 3.11 Modified energy equation for real fluid flows 54 3.12 Separation and cavitation in fluid flow 55 3.13 Impulse–momentum equation 56 3.14 Energy losses in sudden transitions 57 3.15 Flow measurement through pipes 58 3.16 Flow measurement through orifices and mouthpieces 60 3.17 Flow measurement in channels 64 Worked examples 69 References and recommended reading 85 Problems 85 4 Flow of Incompressible Fluids in Pipelines 89 4.1 Resistance in circular pipelines flowing full 89 4.2 Resistance to flow in non-circular sections 94 4.3 Local losses 94 Worked examples 95 References and recommended reading 115 Problems 115 5 Pipe Network Analysis 119 5.1 Introduction 119 5.2 The head balance method (‘loop’ method) 120 5.3 The quantity balance method (‘nodal’ method) 121 5.4 The gradient method 123 Worked examples 125 References and recommended reading 142 Problems 143 6 Pump–Pipeline System Analysis and Design 149 6.1 Introduction 149 6.2 Hydraulic gradient in pump–pipeline systems 150 6.3 Multiple pump systems 151 6.4 Variable-speed pump operation 153 6.5 Suction lift limitations 153 Worked examples 154 References and recommended reading 168 Problems 168 7 Boundary Layers on Flat Plates and in Ducts 171 7.1 Introduction 171 7.2 The laminar boundary layer 171 7.3 The turbulent boundary layer 172 7.4 Combined drag due to both laminar and turbulent boundary layers 173 7.5 The displacement thickness 173 7.6 Boundary layers in turbulent pipe flow 174 7.7 The laminar sub-layer 176 Worked examples 178 References and recommended reading 185 Problems 185 8 Steady Flow in Open Channels 187 8.1 Introduction 187 8.2 Uniform flow resistance 188 8.3 Channels of composite roughness 189 8.4 Channels of compound section 190 8.5 Channel design 191 8.6 Uniform flow in part-full circular pipes 194 8.7 Steady, rapidly varied channel flow energy principles 195 8.8 The momentum equation and the hydraulic jump 196 8.9 Steady, gradually varied open channel flow 198 8.10 Computations of gradually varied flow 199 8.11 The direct step method 199 8.12 The standard step method 200 8.13 Canal delivery problems 201 8.14 Culvert flow 202 8.15 Spatially varied flow in open channels 203 Worked examples 205 References and recommended reading 241 Problems 241 9 Dimensional Analysis, Similitude and Hydraulic Models 247 9.1 Introduction 247 9.2 Dimensional analysis 248 9.3 Physical significance of non-dimensional groups 248 9.4 The Buckingham 𝜋 theorem 249 9.5 Similitude and model studies 249 Worked examples 250 References and recommended reading 263 Problems 263 10 Ideal Fluid Flow and Curvilinear Flow 265 10.1 Ideal fluid flow 265 10.2 Streamlines, the stream function 265 10.3 Relationship between discharge and stream function 266 10.4 Circulation and the velocity potential function 267 10.5 Stream functions for basic flow patterns 267 10.6 Combinations of basic flow patterns 269 10.7 Pressure at points in the flow field 269 10.8 The use of flow nets and numerical methods 270 10.9 Curvilinear flow of real fluids 273 10.10 Free and forced vortices 274 Worked examples 274 References and recommended reading 285 Problems 285 11 Gradually Varied Unsteady Flow from Reservoirs 289 11.1 Discharge between reservoirs under varying head 289 11.2 Unsteady flow over a spillway 291 11.3 Flow establishment 292 Worked examples 293 References and recommended reading 302 Problems 302 12 Mass Oscillations and Pressure Transients in Pipelines 305 12.1 Mass oscillation in pipe systems – surge chamber operation 305 12.2 Solution neglecting tunnel friction and throttle losses for sudden discharge stoppage 306 12.3 Solution including tunnel and surge chamber losses for sudden discharge stoppage 307 12.4 Finite difference methods in the solution of the surge chamber equations 308 12.5 Pressure transients in pipelines (waterhammer) 309 12.6 The basic differential equations of waterhammer 311 12.7 Solutions of the waterhammer equations 312 12.8 The Allievi equations 312 12.9 Alternative formulation 315 Worked examples 316 References and recommended reading 322 Problems 322 13 Unsteady Flow in Channels 323 13.1 Introduction 323 13.2 Gradually varied unsteady flow 323 13.3 Surges in open channels 324 13.4 The upstream positive surge 325 13.5 The downstream positive surge 326 13.6 Negative surge waves 327 13.7 The dam break 329 Worked examples 330 References and recommended reading 333 Problems 333 14 Uniform Flow in Loose-Boundary Channels 335 14.1 Introduction 335 14.2 Flow regimes 335 14.3 Incipient (threshold) motion 335 14.4 Resistance to flow in alluvial (loose-bed) channels 337 14.5 Velocity distributions in loose-boundary channels 339 14.6 Sediment transport 339 14.7 Bed load transport 340 14.8 Suspended load transport 343 14.9 Total load transport 345 14.10 Regime channel design 346 14.11 Rigid-bed channels with sediment transport 350 Worked examples 352 References and recommended reading 367 Problems 368 15 Hydraulic Structures 371 15.1 Introduction 371 15.2 Spillways 371 15.3 Energy dissipators and downstream scour protection 376 Worked examples 379 References and recommended reading 389 Problems 390 16 Environmental Hydraulics and Engineering Hydrology 393 16.1 Introduction 393 16.2 Analysis of gauged river flow data 393 16.3 River Thames discharge data 395 16.4 Flood alleviation, sustainability and environmental channels 396 16.5 Project appraisal 397 Worked examples 398 References and recommended reading 405 Problems 406 17 Introduction to Coastal Engineering 409 17.1 Introduction 409 17.2 Waves and wave theories 409 17.3 Wave processes 420 17.4 Wave set-down and set-up 428 17.5 Wave impact, run-up and overtopping 429 17.6 Tides, surges and mean sea level 430 17.7 Tsunami waves 432 Worked examples 433 References and recommended reading 438 Problems 439 Answers 441 Index 447

Read more less

Book SynopsisA valuable source of information, insight, and fresh ideas about a crucial aspect of the growing sustainable design movement Mounting resource shortages worldwide coupled with skyrocketing extraction costs for new materials have made the prospect of materials reuse and recycling an issue of paramount importance. A fundamental goal of the sustainable design movement is to derive utmost use from construction materials and components, including energy, water, materials, building components, whole structures, and even entire infrastructures. Written by an expert with many years of experience in both industry and academe, this book explores a wide range of sustainable design strategies which designers around the globe are using to create efficient and aesthetically pleasing buildings from waste streams and discarded items. Emphasizing performance issues, design considerations and process constraints, it describes numerous fully realized projects, and explores theoretical apTable of ContentsForeword ix–x Acknowledgements xi–xii Definitions xiii–xiv 1 Introduction 1–34 1.1 Background 4 1.2 Scarcity of resource 9 1.3 Waste and obsolescence 11 1.4 Permanence and repair 14 1.5 Material efficiency 18 1.6 Embodied energy and carbon 20 1.7 The circular economy 22 1.8 Reuse V Recycling 26 1.9 Summary 29 References 30 2 Concepts Supporting Reuse 35–64 2.1 History of building component reuse 37 2.2 Barriers to reuse 43 2.3 Urban metabolism and resource flows 45 2.4 Urban mining 47 2.5 Upcycling – cradle to cradle 48 2.6 Salvageability and design for deconstruction (DfD) 50 2.7 Information – materials passports 55 2.8 Component redesign – design for reassembly and secondary use 57 2.9 Typologies of material reuse 59 References 61 3 Case Studies 65–188 3.1 Adaptive reuse with component reuse 66 3.1.1 Alliander – nothing is new 66 3.1.2 Posner Center for International Development – the horsebarn 74 3.1.3 Energy Resource Center (ERC) – A learning hub 81 3.1.4 Hughes Warehouse – building community 87 3.1.5 Roy Stibbs Elementary School – A building as a material bank 93 3.1.6 Hindmarsh Shire council corporate offices – old anchors new 97 3.2 Reusing what is available at the site 103 3.2.1 Ford Calumet Environmental Center – ‘form follows availability’ 103 3.2.2 Hill End Eco‐House 108 3.2.3 Tysons Living Learning Centre 114 3.2.4 Parkwood Residences – reuse of an old steel frame 121 3.3 Reusing construction materials from elsewhere 127 3.3.1 Headquarters of the European Council and Council of the European Union 127 3.3.2 La Cuisine, Winnipeg Folk Festival 134 3.3.3 Pointe Valaine Community Centre 142 3.3.4 Oasis Children’s Venture 148 3.3.5 The Old Oak Dojo 154 3.4 Secondary use of non‐construction materials 161 3.4.1 Pocono Environmental Education Center – tyre wall 161 3.4.2 Big Dig House – from highway to housing 167 3.4.3 Kaap Skil, Maritime and Beachcombers Museum 175 3.4.4 Waste House – UK’s first permanent building made from rubbish 181 References 187 4 Materials Investigations 189–206 4.1 Nordic Built Component Reuse 189 4.2 Storywood 196 4.3 Reuse of structural steel 199 4.4 Rebrick project 203 References 206 5 Practitioners 207–248 5.1 ROTOR 207 5.2 Milestone Project Management 218 5.3 Lendager Group 227 5.4 Superuse Studios 237 6 Implications for Design 249–276 6.1 Design process characteristics 250 6.2 Performance issues 259 6.3 Understanding sources and opportunities 266 6.4 Decision process 273 6.5 Conclusion 273 References 274 Bibliography277– 278 Index279– 280

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first book demonstrating how to apply the principles of social network analysis to managing complex projects This groundbreaking book gets project managers and students up to speed on state-of-the-art applications of social network analysis (SNA) for observing, analysing, and managing complex projects. Written by an expert at the leading edge of the SNA project management movement, it clearly demonstrates how the principles of social network analysis can be used to provide a smarter, more efficient, holistic approach to managing complex projects. Project managers, especially those tasked with managing large, complex construction and engineering projects, traditionally have relied upon analysis and decision-making based upon hierarchical structures and vaguely defined project systems, much of which is borrowed from historic scientific management approaches. However, it has become apparent that a more sophisticated methodology is required for observing projectTable of ContentsList of Figures xi About the Author xiii Preface xv Acknowledgements xvii 1 Introduction 1 Structure of the Book 2 2 Theoretical Context 11 Management Context 11 Project Transitions 12 Project Management as Practice 12 Systems Theory and Networks 13 Transient Relationships 13 Dyadic Contractual Relationships and Structure 14 Permanent and Temporary Organising 15 Structure and Networks 16 Information Classification 16 Nodes and Linkages 17 Summary 18 3 Networks and Projects 21 Definition 22 Origins and History of the Concept of Social Networks and their Analysis 22 Problems with Projects 24 Actor Role Classification and Ritualistic Behaviour 25 Routines 26 Are Networks a Response to Uncertainty in Projects? 27 Temporary Project Systems and their Replication 28 Beyond the ‘Iron Triangle’ 28 Why Networks? 30 Individuals and Firms in Networks 32 Problems Associated with the Use of SNA in Project Research 32 Summary 33 4 Why Networks? 35 Definition 36 Why Choose Social Network Analysis? 36 Problems Associated with the Use of SNA in Project Research 37 Concepts and Terminology 38 Defining the Population for the Study 46 What is a Network? 46 Actor Characteristics 47 Network Characteristics 55 Some Final Thoughts 56 Conclusion 58 5 Self]Organising Networks in Projects 61 Introduction 61 What Do Project Clients Want? 63 Dangerous Assumptions 66 Implications if these Assumptions are Incorrect 69 Networks and Uncertainty 70 Does it Matter How We Conceptualise the Project? 70 Procurement Through Markets and Hierarchies; Project Design and Delivery Through Networks 71 Summary and Conclusions 73 6 Game Theory and Networks 77 Introduction 77 To Begin: Some History 78 What is a Game? 79 Key Assumptions 83 Benefits of Applying Game Theory to Project Networks 85 Other Considerations in Applying Game Theory to Project Networks 85 Choices About Actions and Co]Players 86 Nash Equilibrium 88 Anti]Coordination Behaviour: ‘Hawk–Dove’ and ‘Chicken’ Games 89 Game Theory and Information Exchange Network Formation 89 Game Theory and the Five Dangerous Assumptions in Projects 90 Summary and Conclusions 93 7 Network Roles and Personality Types 95 Network Roles 98 Personality Traits 104 Humour and Behaviour in Networks 104 Profiling an Ideal Project Network Actor 109 Specific Personality Traits 109 Network Roles and Personality Traits 113 Summary 115 8 Network Enabling 117 What Do We Mean by Network Enabling? 117 Trust 119 Empathy 120 Reciprocity, Favours and Psychological Contracts 123 Implications of Violation of Psychological Contracts 124 Generosity 126 Characteristics of Individuals that are Destructive for Networks 128 Narcissism 129 Egotism 130 Summary 131 9 Project Networks and Building Information Modelling 133 BIM Origins 133 Building Information Modelling and Information Management 134 Information Management and Organisation Structure 135 BIM as an Artefact 135 Self]Organising Networks in the Context of Design 137 BIM and Networks: A Research Agenda 139 10 Introduction to the Case Studies 143 Technical Overview of Case Studies 143 Research Funding 146 Summary 146 11 Case Study 1: Communities in Self]Organising Project Networks 147 Data Collection 148 Data Analysis 150 Findings 150 Communities in Self]Organising Project Networks 152 Summary 154 12 Case Study 2: Dysfunctional Prominence in Self]Organising Project Networks 157 Data Collection 157 Data Analysis 158 Actor Prominence Measures 158 Organisational Networks 160 Summary 162 13 Case Study 3: Costing Networks 165 Conceptual Framework 165 Network Costs 166 Data Analysis 167 Summary 168 14 Summary and Conclusions 171 Introduction 171 Chapter Summaries 171 Conclusions 177 Appendix 181 References 183 Index 207

Read more less

Book SynopsisHyperbolic structures analyses the interactions of form with the structural behaviour of hyperbolic lattice towers, and the effects of the various influencing factors were determined with the help of parametric studies and load capacity analyses. This evaluation of Shukhov's historical calculations and the reconstruction of the design and development process of his water towers shows why the Russian engineer is considered not only a pathfinder for lightweight structures but also a pioneer of parametrised design processes.Table of ContentsForeword 8 Preface 10 Building with hyperbolic lattice structures 14 Geometry and form of hyperbolic lattice structures 24 Structural analysis and calculation methods 32 Relationships between form and structural behaviour 50 Design and analysis of Shukhov’s towers 66 NiGRES tower on the Oka 94 Résumé 112 Towers in comparison 114 Notes 143 Literature 145 Picture Credits 146 Index 148

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents the latest strategies in the development and use of composite materials for large structures and the effects of defects Practical Design and Validation of Composites Structures: Effects of Defects offers an important guide to the use of fiber-reinforced composites and how they affect the durability and safety of engineering structures such as aircraft, ships, bridges, wind turbines as well as sporting equipment. The text draws on the authors' direct experience in industry and academia to cover the most recent strategies in the development of composite structures and uniquely integrates the assessment of the effects of defects introduced during production. This comprehensive resource builds on an essential introduction to the characteristics of composites and the most common types of defects encountered in production. The authors review the recent manufacturing methods and technologies used for inspecting composite structures and the design issuesTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Characteristics of Composites 1 1.1 Introduction to Behavior 1 1.2 Introduction to Composite Analysis 3 1.3 Failure and Strength Methodologies 5 1.3.1 Lamina Failure Modes and their Influence upon Catastrophic Failure of Multidirectional Laminates 5 1.3.2 Design Values and Environmental Sensitivity 8 1.3.3 Design Values for Unnotched Multidirectional Laminates 11 1.3.4 Design Values for Notched Multidirectional Laminates 12 1.3.5 Material Variability 14 1.3.6 Strain-Based Failure Methodology 15 1.3.7 Composite Fatigue Behavior 15 References 16 2 DesignMethodology and Regulatory Requirements 19 2.1 Regulatory Requirements 19 2.2 Material and Process Specifications 22 2.3 Design Methodology 23 2.4 Design Values for Notched Multidirectional Laminates 24 2.5 Design Values for Bolted Joints 28 2.5.1 Determination of Fastener Loading 29 2.5.2 Failure Analysis at a Loaded and Unloaded Hole 29 2.6 Design Values for Bonded Joints and Bondlines 33 2.7 Design Values for Sandwich Structure 36 2.7.1 Facesheet Tension Design Values 36 2.7.2 Facesheet Compression Design Values 36 2.7.3 Sandwich Flexural Design Values 37 2.7.4 Out-of-Plane Loading 37 2.8 Statistical Allowables 37 2.9 Simulation of Temperature and Moisture Content 39 References 40 3 Material, Manufacturing, and Service Defects 43 3.1 Introduction 43 3.1.1 Differentiating Cosmetic from Structural Defects 46 3.2 Defects by Stage of Occurrence 46 3.2.1 Material Precure Defects 46 3.2.1.1 Fiber Damage and Defects 50 3.2.2 Manufacturing Defects 51 3.2.3 Service Defects 54 3.3 Defects by Location: Matrix-Dominated Defects 60 3.3.1 Matrix Degradation Due to Porosity and Voids 60 3.3.2 Matrix Degradation Due to Aged Material 63 3.3.3 Matrix Degradation Due to Errors in Curing (Pressure and Temperature) 64 3.3.4 Matrix Damage with No Fiber Breakage from Impact 67 3.3.5 Matrix Cracking and Crazing 67 3.3.6 Matrix Degradation Due to Anomalous Moisture Absorption 68 3.3.7 Matrix Degradation Due to UV Radiation or Surface Contamination 69 3.3.8 Matrix Degradation Due to High Temperature Exposure 70 3.3.9 Blisters 72 3.3.10 Matrix Degradation Due to Resin Mixture Error 73 3.4 Defects by Location: Fiber-Dominated Process Defects 73 3.4.1 Fiber Misalignment orWrinkles 73 3.4.1.1 In-PlaneWaviness 73 3.4.1.2 Out-of-PlaneWaviness 74 3.4.2 Excessive Ply Drops and Gaps 76 3.4.3 Fiber Damage 78 3.5 Defects by Location: Sandwich Composite Defects 78 3.5.1 Core Defect: Over-Expanded or Blown Core 79 3.5.2 Core Defect: Core Crushing or Movement 79 3.5.3 Core Defect: Core-Splice Spacing Exceeding Limits 80 3.5.4 Core Defect: Incorrect or Variable CoreThickness 80 3.5.5 Core Defect: Core Degradation Due to Core Defect –Water Entrapment in Core 81 3.5.6 Core Defect: Incorrect Core Density 81 3.5.7 Core Defect: Misaligned Nodes or Unbonded Nodes in Core Cell 81 3.5.8 Core Defect: Mismatched Nodes or Corrugations 82 3.5.9 Core Defect: Corrosion 82 3.5.10 Facesheet Defect: Pillowing,Wrinkling, or Orange Peel 82 3.5.11 Facesheet Defect: Dents in Facesheet 83 3.5.12 Facesheet/Core Disbond 83 3.5.13 Defects in Adhesive Fillets 84 3.5.14 Edge-Closeout Defects 84 3.6 Defects by Location: Mixed-Mode Fiber and Matrix Defects 86 3.6.1 Impact Damage with Fiber Breakage 86 3.6.2 Bearing Damage 87 3.6.3 Edge Cracking and Crushing 88 3.6.4 Cuts, Scratches, and Gouges 89 3.6.5 Composite Damage from Lightning Strikes 89 3.6.6 Misdrilled Holes 90 3.6.7 Mismatched Parts 90 3.6.8 Incorrect Fiber Orientation or Missing Plies 91 3.6.9 Galvanic Corrosion 91 3.6.10 Resin Migration and Uneven Fiber Volume Fraction 92 3.6.11 Residual Stresses and Dimensional Conformance 94 3.6.12 Delaminations 96 3.6.13 Composite Degradation Due to Excessive Temperature and Chemical Exposure 98 3.6.13.1 Fibers 98 3.6.13.2 Matrix 98 3.7 Defects by Location: Fastened and Bonded Joint Defects 98 3.7.1 Fastened Joints 98 3.7.1.1 Bearing Damage 99 3.7.1.2 Hole Delamination/Fraying 99 3.7.1.3 Hole Elongation or Out-of-Round Holes 99 3.7.1.4 Fastener Seating 99 3.7.1.5 Fastener Over-Torque 99 3.7.1.6 Fastener Under-Torque 100 3.7.1.7 Missing Fastener 100 3.7.1.8 Porosity Near the Fastener 100 3.7.1.9 Resin-Starved Bearing Surface 100 3.7.1.10 Insufficient Edge Margins 100 3.7.1.11 Tilted Hole 100 3.7.2 Bonded Joints 100 3.7.2.1 Poor Cure Due to Improper Material Chemistry: Mixing of Two-Part Resins or Material Past Shelf- or Out Life 103 3.7.2.2 Incorrect Bondline Thickness, Scarf, or Overlap Length 103 3.7.2.3 Zero-Volume Disbond or Long-Term Bond Failure Due to Contamination or Incorrect Surface Preparation 103 3.7.2.4 Bondline Degradation Due to Moisture or Incorrect Pressure During Processing 103 3.7.2.5 Bondline Degradation Due to Incorrect Heating Procedures 104 3.8 Future Directions 104 References 104 4 InspectionMethods 111 4.1 Introduction 111 4.2 Mechanical Vibration NDT Methods 117 4.2.1 Low Frequency Methods 117 4.2.1.1 Tap Testing 117 4.2.1.2 Mechanical Impedance 117 4.2.1.3 Membrane Resonance 118 4.2.2 High Frequency Ultrasonic Methods 118 4.2.2.1 Pulse Echo andThru-Transmission 118 4.2.2.2 Pulse Echo Ultrasonics 119 4.2.2.3 Through-Transmission Ultrasonics 119 4.2.2.4 Phased Array Ultrasonics 120 4.2.2.5 Ultrasonic Spectroscopy for Zero-Volume Disbonds 120 4.2.2.6 Ultrasonic Methods for Fiber Distortion 120 4.2.2.7 Guided LambWaves 122 4.2.2.8 Air-Coupled Ultrasonics 122 4.2.3 Acoustic Emission 123 4.3 Visual and Enhanced Visual Methods 125 4.3.1 Visual Inspections 125 4.3.2 Verification or Pressure Film 125 4.3.3 Leak Testing 126 4.4 Electromagnetic Radiation (X-Ray, Gamma, and Neutron) 126 4.4.1 Radiography 126 4.4.2 Computed Tomography 127 4.4.3 Compton Scattering 130 4.4.4 Neutron Tomography 131 4.5 Optical Methods 131 4.5.1 Shearography 131 4.5.2 Digital Image Correlation (DIC) 133 4.5.3 Hyperspectral Near Infrared Method for Resin Migration and Fiber Distortion 135 4.5.4 Laser Profilometers and Image Processing 136 4.6 Strain Measurement 137 4.7 Thermography 138 4.7.1 ActiveThermography 139 4.7.1.1 Thermoelastic Stress Analysis 139 4.7.2 Passive Thermography 139 4.8 Destructive Methods 142 4.8.1 Physical Tests 142 4.8.2 Density and Porosity Measurements 144 4.8.3 Microscopy 145 4.9 NDT Standards 147 References 147 5 Effects of Defects – Design Values and Statistical Considerations 159 5.1 Introduction 159 5.2 Effects on Laminate Properties 162 5.2.1 Cure Cycle Anomalies 162 5.2.1.1 Porosity 162 5.2.1.2 Nonuniformly Distributed Voids (Stratified Porosity) 163 5.2.1.3 Stratified Porosity or Delamination in L-Shaped Details 163 5.2.1.4 In-Plane Fiber Misalignment 164 5.2.1.5 FiberWaviness (Out-of-Plane) 164 5.2.1.6 Waviness in Curved Parts 168 5.2.1.7 Ply Gaps and Overlaps 170 5.2.2 Cuts, Scratches, and Gouges 171 5.2.3 Edge Delaminations 172 5.2.4 Foreign Object Impact 172 5.3 Effects on Sandwich Composites Properties 174 5.3.1 Facesheet to Core Disbonding 174 5.3.2 Facesheet Pillowing 175 5.3.3 Node Disbonds 176 5.3.4 Core Splicing 176 5.4 Effects on Bolted Joint Properties 179 5.4.1 Delaminations at the Holes 180 5.4.2 Oversize Holes 182 5.4.3 Over-Torqued Fasteners 182 5.4.4 Porosity Near Fasteners 184 5.5 Effects on Bonded Joint Properties 184 5.5.1 Assessment of Defects in Design of Bonded Joints 185 5.6 Statistical Considerations 185 5.6.1 Mean versus Design Values 189 5.6.2 Simpson’s Paradox 189 5.6.3 Design of Experiments 189 5.7 Suggested Approach for Evaluation of Defects 191 5.8 Evaluation of Scaling and Multiple Defects 192 References 194 6 Selected Case Studies in Effects of Defects 201 6.1 Introduction 201 6.2 Case Study 1: The Ohio Timber Road IIWind Turbine Failure Due to Wrinkles 201 6.2.1 Event 201 6.2.2 Background 201 6.2.3 Investigation 202 6.2.4 Lessons Learned 202 6.3 Case Study 2: Faulty Repairs of Sandwich Core Structure 203 6.3.1 Event 203 6.3.2 Lessons Learned 203 6.4 Case Study 3: Bonded Repair Failure 205 6.4.1 Event 205 6.4.2 Investigation 205 6.4.3 Lessons Learned 205 6.5 Case Study 4: Air Transat 961 Sandwich-Composite Failure 206 6.5.1 Event 206 6.5.2 Investigation 206 6.5.3 Lessons Learned 207 6.6 Case Study 5: Debonding Failure of a Sandwich-Composite Cryogenic Fuel Tank 208 6.6.1 Event 208 6.6.2 Investigation 208 6.6.3 Lessons Learned 208 References 209 Glossary 211 Index 215

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe important resource that explores the twelve design principles of sustainable environmental engineering Sustainable Environmental Engineering (SEE) is to research, design, and build Environmental Engineering Infrastructure System (EEIS) in harmony with nature using life cycle cost analysis and benefit analysis and life cycle assessment and to protect human health and environments at minimal cost. The foundations of the SEE are the twelve design principles (TDPs) with three specific rules for each principle. The TDPs attempt to transform how environmental engineering could be taught by prioritizing six design hierarchies through six different dimensions. Six design hierarchies are prevention, recovery, separation, treatment, remediation, and optimization. Six dimensions are integrated system, material economy, reliability on spatial scale, resiliency on temporal scale, and cost effectiveness. In addition, the authors, two experts in the field, introduce major computer packages that aTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Renewable Resources and Environmental Quality 1 1.1 Renewable Resources and Energy 1 1.2 Human Demand and Footprint 5 1.2.1 Human Demand 5 1.2.2 Human Footprints 6 1.2.2.1 Water Footprints 7 1.2.2.2 Gray Water System 7 1.3 Challenges and Opportunities 9 1.3.1 Excessive Nitrogen Runoff 10 1.3.2 Phosphorus Depletion 10 1.3.3 Carbon Pollution 11 1.3.4 Peak Oil 11 1.3.5 Climate Change 11 1.4 Carrying Capacity 11 1.5 Air, Water, and Soil Quality Index 13 1.5.1 Air Quality Standards 13 1.5.2 Air Quality Index 13 1.5.3 Water Quality Index 14 1.5.4 Soil Quality Index 17 1.5.4.1 F1 (Scope) 17 1.5.4.2 F2 (Frequency) 17 1.5.4.3 F3 (Amplitude) 17 1.5.4.4 Soil Quality Index (SQI) 18 1.6 Air, Water, and Soil Pollution 19 1.6.1 Air Pollution 19 1.6.2 Water Pollution 19 1.7 Life Cycle Assessment 21 1.7.1 LCA Tools 22 1.8 Environmental Laws 22 1.9 Exercise 24 1.9.1 Questions 24 1.9.2 Assignment 25 1.9.3 Problems 25 1.9.4 Projects 25 1.9.4.1 Xiongan Project 25 1.9.4.2 Community Project 26 References 26 2 Health Risk Assessment 29 2.1 Environmental Health 29 2.2 Environmental Standards 31 2.3 Health Risk Assessment 36 2.3.1 Hazard Identification 36 2.3.2 Dose–Response Curves 37 2.3.2.1 Nonlinear Dose–Response Assessment 37 2.3.2.2 Linear Dose–Response Assessment 40 2.3.3 Exposure Assessment 41 2.3.3.1 Cancer Screening Calculation for Dermal Contaminants in Water 41 2.3.3.2 Noncancer Screening Calculation for Contaminants in Residential Soil 43 2.3.4 DBP Health Advisory Concentration 44 2.3.5 Risk Characterizations 46 2.4 QSAR Analysis in HRA 46 2.4.1 Multiple Linear Regression (MLR) 48 2.4.2 Validation of QSAR Models 49 2.5 Quantification of Uncertainty 54 2.5.1 Quantification of QSAR Model’s Uncertainty 55 2.5.2 Monte Carlo Simulation 56 2.5.3 Comparison of Uncertainties of Different QSAR Models 60 2.5.4 Sensitivity Analysis by Monte Carlo Simulation 61 2.5.5 Computer Software for Quantitative Risk Assessment 62 2.6 Exercise 62 2.6.1 Questions 62 2.6.2 Calculation 62 2.6.3 Assignment 63 2.6.4 Projects 63 2.6.4.1 Xiongan Project 63 2.6.4.2 Community Project 63 References 63 3 Twelve Design Principles of Sustainable Environmental Engineering 67 3.1 Sustainability 67 3.1.1 The United Nations Sustainable Development Goals 68 3.2 Challenges and Opportunities 69 3.2.1 Challenges 69 3.2.2 Opportunities 71 3.3 Sustainable Environmental Engineering 74 3.3.1 SEE Metrics 76 3.4 SEE Design Principles 78 3.4.1 Principle 1: Integrated and Interconnected System Hierarchy 78 3.4.2 Principle 2: Reliability on Spatial Scale 79 3.4.3 Principle 3: System Resiliency on a Temporal Scale 80 3.4.3.1 Principle 4: Efficiency of Renewable Material 80 3.4.4 Principle 6: Prevention 82 3.4.5 Principle 7: Recovery 83 3.5 Principle 8: Separation 84 3.5.1 Principle 9: Treatment 85 3.5.2 Principle 10: Retrofitting and Remediation 86 3.5.3 Principle 11: Optimization through Modeling and Simulation 86 3.5.4 Principle 12: Balance Between Capital and Operating Costs 87 3.6 Implementation of the SEE Design Principles 88 3.6.1 Procedure to Implement SEE Design Principles 88 3.6.2 Integration of SEE into Undergraduate Education 89 3.7 Exercise 91 3.7.1 Questions 91 3.7.2 Calculation 91 3.7.3 Projects 92 3.7.3.1 Xiongan Project 92 3.7.3.2 Community Projects 92 3.7.3.3 Proposal Development 92 References 93 4 Integrated and Interconnected Systems 95 4.1 Principle 1 95 4.2 Challenges and Opportunities 98 4.2.1 Market Size of Solid Waste Management in China 98 4.3 Integrated Solid Waste Management 103 4.3.1 Integrated Solid Waste Management Market in China 103 4.3.2 Strategy of ISWM 103 4.3.3 LCA on Footprint of Solid Waste Recycle 109 4.3.4 ISWM Data Analysis 115 4.3.4.1 Calculations for Measuring Quantity 115 4.3.4.2 Calculations for Composition 116 4.3.5 Determining Waste Composition 117 4.3.5.1 Moisture Content 117 4.3.5.2 Calorific Value 117 4.3.5.3 Chemical Composition 117 4.3.5.4 Calorific Values 119 4.3.5.5 Data Presentation 119 4.3.6 Zero Waste 120 4.3.7 Integrated Waster Resource Management (IWRM) 124 4.3.8 Water Resource Recovery Facilities (WRRF) 127 4.4 Integrated Air Quality Management (IAQM) 131 4.5 Exercise 132 4.5.1 Questions 132 4.5.2 Calculation 133 4.5.3 Projects 133 4.5.3.1 Community Projects 133 4.5.3.2 Xiongan Projects 134 References 134 5 Reliable Systems on a Spatial Scale 135 5.1 Principle 2 135 5.1.1 Central Versus Decentralized WWTP 136 5.1.2 Best Practice for Small WWTPs 137 5.2 Integrated System Approach 137 5.2.1 The EPA Tools 137 5.2.2 Integrated Engineering Design Example 137 5.3 Scale-up of Laboratory or Pilot Design to Full-scale Plant 141 5.3.1 Minimum Requirements for Validation Testing 141 5.3.1.1 Collimated Beam Test 141 5.3.2 Correlation of UV Sensitivity of Different Challenge Microorganisms with Target Microorganisms 143 5.3.2.1 Sampling Ports 144 5.3.3 Calculating the RED 145 5.3.3.1 Flow Rate for Validation 146 5.3.4 Uncertainty in Validation 149 5.3.4.1 Calculating UIN for the Calculated Dose Approach 149 5.3.4.2 Determining the Validated Dose and Validated Operating Conditions 149 5.3.5 Collimated Beam Data Uncertainty 152 5.3.6 Electrical Energy per Order (EE/O) 153 5.4 Exercise 154 5.4.1 Questions 154 5.4.2 Calculation 154 5.4.3 Projects 155 5.4.3.1 Xiongan Design Project 155 5.4.3.2 Community Proposal Project 155 References 155 6 Resiliency on Temporal Scale 157 6.1 Principle 3 157 6.2 Challenges and Opportunities 159 6.3 Discharge Standards 159 6.4 Population Growth 160 6.5 Steady Versus Unsteady 162 6.5.1 Equalization Basin 162 6.6 Hydraulic Condition of Different Reactors 167 6.7 Chemical Kinetics 168 6.8 Group Theory Predicting Hydroxyl Radical Kinetic Constants 172 6.9 Photocatalytic Oxidation of Halogen-substituted Meta-phenols by UV/TiO2 172 6.10 Environmental Issues on Different Temporal Scales 178 6.10.1 Correlation Between Temporal and Spatial Scales in the Sustainable Design of WTPs and WWTPs 178 6.11 Exercise 181 6.11.1 Questions 181 6.11.2 Calculation 181 6.11.3 Project 181 6.11.3.1 Xiongan Project 181 6.11.3.2 Community Proposal Project 182 References 182 7 Efficiency of Renewable Materials 185 7.1 Principle 4 185 7.2 Stoichiometry 185 7.3 Avoid the Addition of Chemicals 187 7.3.1 Avoid Acid Addition 187 7.3.2 Replacing Chlorination with UV Disinfection 193 7.3.3 Anammox to Replace Nitrification/Denitrification 199 7.3.3.1 Nitrogen Forms 199 7.3.3.2 Nitrification 200 7.3.3.3 Denitrification 200 7.3.3.4 Anammox 201 7.4 Design Efficient Reactors 203 7.4.1 Cost of Different Volume Reactors 212 7.5 Exercise 213 7.5.1 Questions 213 7.5.2 Calculation 213 7.5.3 Project 213 7.5.3.1 Xiongan Project 213 7.5.3.2 Proposal Project 214 References 214 8 Efficiency of Renewable Energy 215 8.1 Principle 5 215 8.2 Challenges and Opportunities 216 8.2.1 Inefficient Combustion of Fossil Fuels 216 8.2.2 Challenges in China 217 8.3 Energy Conservation Laws 218 8.3.1 Thermodynamics Laws 218 8.3.2 The First Thermodynamic Law 221 8.3.3 The Second Thermodynamic Law 221 8.3.3.1 Energy Conversion 221 8.3.3.2 Enthalpy 222 8.3.3.3 Conservation of Energy 222 8.4 Energy Balances 223 8.4.1 Physical Framework by Thermodynamics 224 8.4.2 Exergy 225 8.5 Benchmarks for Unit Energy Consumption in WTP and WWTP 225 8.5.1 Unit Energy Consumption Values in WTP 225 8.5.2 Unit Energy Consumption Values in WWTP 225 8.6 Energy Consumption by Pump 232 8.6.1 Flow in Pipe 232 8.6.2 Pump Station 232 8.7 Solar Energy 233 8.7.1 Calculation Solar Energy 233 8.7.2 Solar-powered WWTP 235 8.8 Exercise 235 8.8.1 Questions 235 8.8.2 Calculation 236 8.8.3 Project 236 8.8.3.1 Xiongan Project 236 8.8.3.2 Community Project 236 References 236 9 Prevention 239 9.1 Principle 6 239 9.2 Challenges and Opportunities 240 9.3 Green Infrastructure 241 9.3.1 Integrated Urban Water Management Paradigm 241 9.3.2 Green Infrastructure Design Tools 242 9.3.3 Green Infrastructure Modeling Tools 242 9.4 Design Tools of Rain Harvest 244 9.4.1 Determine the Water Demand of a Public Bathroom 244 9.4.2 Determine the Roof Area and the Tank Size 247 9.4.3 Design Rainwater System by Cumulative Plot Method 250 9.4.4 Design Rainwater System Design to Achieve the Smallest Roof Area 252 9.4.4.1 Flowchart for Rainwater System 252 9.4.5 Determine Roof Area for a Rainwater Harvest Tank Without Adding City Water in the First Year 254 9.4.6 Design Rainwater Harvest Tank for Specific Roof Areas 257 9.4.7 Design a Rainwater Harvest Tank of the Optimized Size 260 9.5 Design Anaerobic Digester Reactor 262 9.6 Green Roof Design 263 9.6.1 Life Cycle Assessment 265 9.6.2 Footprint 266 9.7 Rain Garden Design 268 9.7.1 Life Cycle Assessment 270 9.7.2 Environmental Impacts of Aluminum 271 9.7.3 Cost and Benefit Analysis of Rain Garden 271 9.7.4 Water Footprint 274 9.7.5 Nitrogen and Phosphorus Footprint 274 9.8 Exercise 276 9.8.1 Questions 276 9.8.2 Calculations 276 9.8.3 Projects 276 9.8.3.1 Xiongan Project 276 9.8.3.2 Community Proposal Project 277 References 277 10 Recovery 279 10.1 Principle 7 279 10.2 Phosphorus Removal from Wastewater 280 10.2.1 Phosphorus Removal in Conventional Treatment 281 10.2.2 Chemical Phosphorus Removal 281 10.3 Phosphorus Recovery 283 10.3.1 Enhanced Phosphorus Uptake 283 10.3.2 Struvite Precipitation 284 10.4 Capital and Operation Cost of Reclaiming Water for Reuse 286 10.4.1 Building 286 10.4.2 Headwork 290 10.4.3 Oxidation 293 10.4.4 Aerobic SBR 297 10.4.5 MBR 301 10.4.6 Microfiltration 304 10.4.7 Reverse Osmosis 308 10.4.8 Filtration 311 10.4.9 Disinfection 314 10.5 Exercise 317 10.5.1 Questions 317 10.5.2 Calculations 318 10.5.3 Projects 319 10.5.3.1 Xiongan Project 319 10.5.3.2 Community Proposal Project 319 References 319 11 Separation 321 11.1 Principle 8 321 11.2 Challenges and Opportunities 323 11.3 Precipitation 324 11.4 Coagulation and Flocculation 325 11.4.1 Camp–Stein Equation 326 11.4.2 Static and Plug-flow Reactor Mixers 327 11.4.3 Power, Pressure, and Pump in Reactors 327 11.5 Membrane Filtration Systems 333 11.6 Activated Carbon Adsorption 335 11.7 Anaerobic Membrane Biological Reactor 339 11.8 Air Stripping 341 11.9 LCA Tools for WWTPs 350 11.10 Capital and O&M Costs of Membrane Filtration 353 11.11 Exercise 361 11.11.1 Questions 361 11.11.2 Calculation 361 11.11.3 Projects 361 11.11.3.1 Xiongan Project 361 11.11.3.2 Community Projects 362 References 362 12 Treatment 365 12.1 Principle 9 365 12.2 Challenges 365 12.3 Environmental Regulations 366 12.4 UV Disinfection 370 12.4.1 History 370 12.4.2 Photochemistry 370 12.4.3 UV Dose 371 12.4.4 Absorption Coefficient 372 12.4.5 Fluence 372 12.4.6 UV Dose–Response 374 12.5 Virus Sensitivity Index of UV Disinfection 376 12.5.1 Virus Sensitivity Index (VSI) 376 12.5.2 Applications of VSI 379 12.6 Bacteria Sensitivity Index (BSI) with Shoulder Effect 381 12.6.1 Bacteria Sensitivity Index (BSI) 381 12.6.2 Shoulder Broadness Index (SBI) 382 12.6.3 Transformation of H into ΔH/ΔHr 382 12.6.4 Validation of the Models 384 12.6.5 Application of the Model 384 12.6.5.1 Experimental Data of UV Disinfection of ARBs 384 12.6.5.2 Error Analysis of Predicted H Compared with the Observed H 386 12.6.5.3 Prediction of Fluence Required at 5 log I for ARBs 386 12.7 Emerging Treatment Technologies 386 12.8 Design Considerations of UV Disinfection System 389 12.8.1 UV Dose 390 12.8.2 Hydraulic Retention Time 390 12.8.3 UV Lamps 391 12.8.4 Turbidity 391 12.8.5 Typical Design Lives of Major UV Components 391 12.9 Exercise 392 12.9.1 Questions 392 12.9.2 Calculations 392 12.9.3 Projects 392 12.9.3.1 Xiongan Project 392 12.9.3.2 Community Proposal Project 392 References 392 13 Green Retrofitting and Remediation 395 13.1 Principle 10 395 13.2 Challenges of WWTP Design 395 13.2.1 Energy Efficiency of Water and Wastewater Treatment 396 13.3 Anaerobic Digestion for Biogas Production 396 13.3.1 Operation Guidelines for Wastewater Treatment Plants 397 13.4 Best Practice Benchmark 399 13.5 Green Retrofitting 400 13.5.1 Energy Auditing 400 13.5.1.1 Phototrophic System 404 13.5.1.2 Renewable Energy for WWTPs 406 13.6 Sludge Processing and Disposal 406 13.6.1 Design of Wastewater Sludge Thickeners 407 13.6.2 Suspended Solids Removal Efficiency 408 13.6.3 Anaerobic Digester Capacity 409 13.6.4 Aerobic Sludge Digestion 409 13.6.5 Retrofitting Strategies of WWTPs 410 13.7 Green Remediation 410 13.7.1 Green Remediation Metrics and Methods 411 13.7.2 Approaches to Reducing Footprints 416 13.7.2.1 Approaches to Reducing Materials and Waste Footprints 416 13.7.2.2 Approaches to Reducing Water Footprints 416 13.7.2.3 Approaches to Reducing Energy and Air Footprints 417 13.7.3 Evaluation Methods 419 13.7.3.1 Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Emissions Evaluation Fact Sheet 419 13.7.3.2 Future Land Use 420 13.7.3.3 Green Building 420 13.7.3.4 Post-remediation Site Conditions 420 13.8 Tools 421 13.9 Exercise 421 13.9.1 Questions 421 13.9.2 Calculation 421 13.9.3 Projects 422 13.9.3.1 Xiongan Project 422 13.9.3.2 Community Project Proposal 422 References 423 14 Optimization through Modeling and Simulation 425 14.1 Principle 425 14.2 Introduction 425 14.2.1 History of Landfill Leachate Quality 426 14.2.2 Leachate Characteristics 426 14.3 Challenges and Opportunities 428 14.4 Modeling of the Fenton Process 428 14.4.1 Kinetic Model of DMPO–OH EPR Signal 429 14.5 Simulation 436 14.6 Optimization 437 14.6.1 Fenton Oxidation of Landfill Leachate 437 14.6.2 Optimization Fenton Oxidation of Leachate 439 14.6.3 Optimum Operating Conditions 440 14.6.3.1 pH 440 14.6.3.2 Reaction Time 440 14.6.3.3 Effect of Reaction Time on Fenton Oxidation 440 14.6.3.4 Temperature 442 14.6.3.5 Fenton Reagent Dose 442 14.6.3.6 Generalized Fenton Dosing for Landfill Leachate Treatment 443 14.6.3.7 Total COD Removal Under Different LCOD 444 14.6.3.8 Effect of LCOD on COD Removal Efficiency 445 14.6.3.9 Effect of LCOD on Biodegradability 445 14.6.3.10 Effect of LCOD on Cost of Fenton Process Treatment for Landfill Leachate 446 14.7 Validation and Uncertainty 447 14.8 Exercise 448 14.8.1 Questions 448 14.8.2 Calculations 449 14.8.3 Projects 449 14.8.3.1 Xiongan Project 449 14.8.3.2 Community Project 449 References 450 15 Life Cycle Cost and Benefit Analysis 453 15.1 Principle 453 15.2 Challenges and Opportunities 453 15.3 Optimum Pipe Size 454 15.4 Advanced Oxidation Process Costs 461 15.4.1 UV Disinfection 461 15.5 Recovery of N and P 465 15.5.1 Yield Coefficients 466 15.5.2 Capital Cost of P Recovery Systems 469 15.5.3 Activated Sludge 469 15.5.4 Two-Stage Activated Sludge 474 15.5.5 Three-Stage Activated Sludge 477 15.5.6 Three-Stage Activated Sludge with Alum Addition 479 15.5.7 Three-Stage Activated Sludge with Alum and Tertiary Clarifier 482 15.5.8 Three-Stage Activated Sludge with Alum, Tertiary Clarifier, and Filtration 484 15.5.9 Three-Stage Activated Sludge with Tertiary Clarifier and Activated Aluminum Absorption 487 15.5.10 Three-Stage Activated Sludge with Tertiary Clarifier and Activated Absorption 489 15.6 Entrepreneur in SEE 492 15.6.1 Business Plan 493 15.6.2 Finance of Environmental Infrastructure 493 15.6.3 EEI Financing 493 15.6.4 Financial Planning 495 15.7 Innovation in SEE 495 15.7.1 Innovative Technologies 495 15.7.2 Innovative Consumer Products 495 15.7.2.1 SteriPEN 495 15.7.2.2 Drinkable Book™ 496 15.7.3 Future of SEE 496 15.8 Exercise 497 15.8.1 Questions 497 15.8.2 Calculations 497 15.8.3 Projects 497 15.8.3.1 Xiongan Project 498 15.8.3.2 Community Project Proposal 498 15.8.3.3 Course Project and Beyond 499 References 499 Index 501

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to modern-day methods for earthquake engineering of concrete dams Earthquake analysis and design of concrete dams has progressed from static force methods based on seismic coefficients to modern procedures that are based on the dynamics of damwaterfoundation systems. Earthquake Engineering for Concrete Dams offers a comprehensive, integrated view of this progress over the last fifty years. The book offers an understanding of the limitations of the various methods of dynamic analysis used in practice and develops modern methods that overcome these limitations. This important book: Develops procedures for dynamic analysis of two-dimensional and three-dimensional models of concrete dams Identifies system parameters that influence their response Demonstrates the effects of damwaterfoundation interaction on earthquake response Identifies factors that must be included in earthquake analysis of concreTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Earthquake Experience: Cases with Strongest Shaking 1 1.2 Complexity of the Problem 6 1.3 Traditional Design Procedures: Gravity Dams 8 1.3.1 Traditional Analysis and Design 8 1.3.2 Earthquake Performance of Koyna Dam 9 1.3.3 Limitations of Traditional Procedures 9 1.4 Traditional Design Procedures: Arch Dams 11 1.4.1 Traditional Analysis and Design 11 1.4.2 Limitations of Traditional Procedures 12 1.5 Unrealistic Estimation of Seismic Demand and Structural Capacity 13 1.6 Reasons Why Standard Finite-Element Method is Inadequate 13 1.7 Rigorous Methods 14 1.8 Scope and Organization 16 Part I: Gravity Dams 2 Fundamental Mode Response of Dams Including Dam–Water Interaction 21 2.1 System and Ground Motion 21 2.2 Dam Response Analysis 22 2.2.1 Frequency Response Function 22 2.2.2 Earthquake Response: Horizontal Ground Motion 23 2.3 Hydrodynamic Pressures 24 2.3.1 Governing Equation and Boundary Conditions 24 2.3.2 Solutions to Boundary Value Problems 26 2.3.3 Hydrodynamic Forces on Rigid Dams 28 2.3.4 Westergaard’s Results and Added Mass Analogy 30 2.4 Dam Response Analysis Including Dam–Water Interaction 32 2.5 Dam Response 33 2.5.1 System Parameters 33 2.5.2 System and Cases Analyzed 34 2.5.3 Dam–Water Interaction Effects 34 2.5.4 Implications of Ignoring Water Compressibility 37 2.5.5 Comparison of Responses to Horizontal and Vertical Ground Motions 39 2.6 Equivalent SDF System: Horizontal Ground Motion 40 2.6.1 Modified Natural Frequency and Damping Ratio 40 2.6.2 Evaluation of Equivalent SDF System 42 2.6.3 Hydrodynamic Effects on Natural Frequency and Damping Ratio 43 2.6.4 Peak Response 45 Appendix 2: Wave-Absorptive Reservoir Bottom 46 3 Fundamental Mode Response of Dams Including Dam–Water–Foundation Interaction 49 3.1 System and Ground Motion 50 3.2 Dam Response Analysis Including Dam–Foundation Interaction 51 3.2.1 Governing Equations: Dam Substructure 51 3.2.2 Governing Equations: Foundation Substructure 52 3.2.3 Governing Equations: Dam–Foundation System 53 3.2.4 Dam Response Analysis 54 3.3 Dam–Foundation Interaction 54 3.3.1 Interaction Effects 54 3.3.2 Implications of Ignoring Foundation Mass 55 3.4 Equivalent SDF System: Dam–Foundation System 56 3.4.1 Modified Natural Frequency and Damping Ratio 56 3.4.2 Evaluation of Equivalent SDF System 57 3.4.3 Peak Response 59 3.5 Equivalent SDF System: Dam–Water–Foundation System 60 3.5.1 Modified Natural Frequency and Damping Ratio 60 3.5.2 Evaluation of Equivalent SDF System 61 3.5.3 Peak Response 62 Appendix 3: Equivalent SDF System 63 4 Response Spectrum Analysis of Dams Including Dam–Water–Foundation Interaction 65 4.1 Equivalent Static Lateral Forces: Fundamental Mode 66 4.1.1 One-Dimensional Representation 66 4.1.2 Approximation of Hydrodynamic Pressure 67 4.2 Equivalent Static Lateral Forces: Higher Modes 68 4.3 Response Analysis 70 4.3.1 Dynamic Response 70 4.3.2 Total Response 70 4.4 Standard Properties for Fundamental Mode Response 71 4.4.1 Vibration Period and Mode Shape 71 4.4.2 Modification of Period and Damping: Dam–Water Interaction 72 4.4.3 Modification of Period and Damping: Dam–Foundation Interaction 72 4.4.5 Generalized Mass and Earthquake Force Coefficient 74 4.5 Computational Steps 74 4.6 CADAM Computer Program 76 4.7 Accuracy of Response Spectrum Analysis Procedure 77 4.7.1 System Considered 77 4.7.2 Ground Motions 77 4.7.3 Response Spectrum Analysis 78 4.7.4 Comparison with Response History Analysis 79 5 Response History Analysis of Dams Including Dam–Water–Foundation Interaction 83 5.1 Dam–Water–Foundation System 83 5.1.1 Two-Dimensional Idealization 83 5.1.2 System Considered 84 5.1.3 Ground Motion 85 5.2 Frequency-Domain Equations: Dam Substructure 86 5.3 Frequency-Domain Equations: Foundation Substructure 87 5.4 Dam–Foundation System 88 5.4.1 Frequency-Domain Equations 88 5.4.2 Reduction of Degrees of Freedom 89 5.5 Frequency–Domain Equations: Fluid Domain Substructure 90 5.5.1 Boundary Value Problems 90 5.5.2 Solutions for Hydrodynamic Pressure Terms 91 5.5.3 Hydrodynamic Force Vectors 92 5.6 Frequency-Domain Equations: Dam–Water–Foundation System 93 5.7 Response History Analysis 94 5.8 EAGD-84 Computer Program 95 Appendix 5: Water–Foundation Interaction 96 6 Dam–Water–Foundation Interaction Effects in Earthquake Response 101 6.1 System, Ground Motion, Cases Analyzed, and Spectral Ordinates 101 6.1.1 Pine Flat Dam 101 6.1.2 Ground Motion 103 6.1.3 Cases Analyzed and Response Results 103 6.2 Dam–Water Interaction 105 6.2.1 Hydrodynamic Effects 105 6.2.2 Reservoir Bottom Absorption Effects 107 6.2.3 Implications of Ignoring Water Compressibility 108 6.3 Dam–Foundation Interaction 112 6.3.1 Dam–Foundation Interaction Effects 112 6.3.2 Implications of Ignoring Foundation Mass 112 6.4 Dam–Water–Foundation Interaction Effects 115 7 Comparison of Computed and Recorded Earthquake Responses of Dams 117 7.1 Comparison of Computed and Recorded Motions 117 7.1.1 Choice of Example 117 7.1.2 Tsuruda Dam and Earthquake Records 118 7.1.3 System Analyzed 119 7.1.4 Comparison of Computed and Recorded Responses 120 7.2 Koyna Dam Case History 122 7.2.1 Koyna Dam and Earthquake Damage 122 7.2.2 Computed Response of Koyna Dam 123 7.2.3 Response of Typical Gravity Dam Sections 126 7.2.4 Response of Dams with Modified Profiles 127 Appendix 7: System Properties 129 Part II: Arch Dams 8 Response History Analysis of Arch Dams Including Dam–Water–Foundation Interaction 133 8.1 System and Ground Motion 133 8.2 Frequency-Domain Equations: Dam Substructure 136 8.3 Frequency-Domain Equations: Foundation Substructure 137 8.4 Dam–Foundation System 138 8.4.1 Frequency-Domain Equations 138 8.4.2 Reduction of Degrees of Freedom 139 8.5 Frequency-Domain Equations: Fluid Domain Substructure 140 8.6 Frequency-Domain Equations: Dam–Water–Foundation System 142 8.7 Response History Analysis 143 8.8 Extension to Spatially Varying Ground Motion 144 8.9 EACD-3D-2008 Computer Program 146 9 Earthquake Analysis of Arch Dams: Factors to Be Included 149 9.1 Dam–Water–Foundation Interaction Effects 149 9.1.1 Dam–Water Interaction 150 9.1.2 Dam–Foundation Interaction 151 9.1.3 Dam–Water–Foundation Interaction 153 9.1.4 Earthquake Responses 153 9.2 Bureau of Reclamation Analyses 153 9.2.1 Implications of Ignoring Foundation Mass 156 9.2.2 Implications of Ignoring Water Compressibility 157 9.3 Influence of Spatial Variations in Ground Motions 158 9.3.1 January 13, 2001 Earthquake 159 9.3.2 January 17, 1994 Northridge Earthquake 160 10 Comparison of Computed and Recorded Motions 163 10.1 Earthquake Response of Mauvoisin Dam 163 10.1.1 Mauvoisin Dam and Earthquake Records 163 10.1.2 System Analyzed 165 10.1.3 Spatially Varying Ground Motion 166 10.1.4 Comparison of Computed and Recorded Responses 166 10.2 Earthquake Response of Pacoima Dam 168 10.2.1 Pacoima Dam and Earthquake Records 168 10.2.2 System Analyzed 171 10.2.3 Comparison of Computed and Recorded Responses: January 13, 2001 Earthquake 172 10.2.4 Comparison of Computed Responses and Observed Damage: Northridge Earthquake 172 10.3 Calibration of Numerical Model: Damping 174 11 Nonlinear Response History Analysis of Dams 177 Part A: Nonlinear Mechanisms and Modeling 178 11.1 Limitations of Linear Dynamic Analyses 178 11.2 Nonlinear Mechanisms 178 11.2.1 Concrete Dams 178 11.2.2 Foundation Rock 181 11.2.3 Impounded Water 181 11.2.4 Pre-Earthquake Static Analysis 181 11.3 Nonlinear Material Models 182 11.3.1 Concrete Cracking 182 11.3.2 Contraction Joints: Opening, Closing, and Sliding 183 11.3.3 Lift Joints and Concrete–Rock Interfaces: Sliding and Separation 184 11.3.4 Discontinuities in Foundation Rock 185 11.4 Material Models in Commercial Finite-Element Codes 185 Part B: Direct Finite-Element Method 186 11.5 Concepts and Requirements 186 11.6 System and Ground Motion 187 11.6.1 Semi-Unbounded Dam–Water–Foundation System 187 11.6.2 Earthquake Excitation 189 11.7 Equations of Motion 191 11.8 Effective Earthquake Forces 193 11.8.1 Forces at Bottom Boundary of Foundation Domain 193 11.8.2 Forces at Side Boundaries of Foundation Domain 194 11.8.3 Forces at Upstream Boundary of Fluid Domain 195 11.9 Numerical Validation of the Direct Finite Element Method 196 11.9.1 System Considered and Validation Methodology 196 11.9.2 Frequency Response Functions 199 11.9.3 Earthquake Response History 200 11.10 Simplifications of Analysis Procedure 201 11.10.1 Using 1D Analysis to Compute Effective Earthquake Forces 201 11.10.2 Ignoring Effective Earthquake Forces at Side Boundaries 203 11.10.3 Avoiding Deconvolution of the Surface Free-Field Motion 203 11.10.4 Ignoring Effective Earthquake Forces at Upstream Boundary of Fluid Domain 206 11.10.5 Ignoring Sediments at the Reservoir Boundary 207 11.11 Example Nonlinear Response History Analysis 211 11.11.1 System and Ground Motion 211 11.11.2 Computer Implementation 212 11.11.3 Earthquake Response Results 213 11.12 Challenges in Predicting Nonlinear Response of Dams 215 Part III: Design and Evaluation 12 Design and Evaluation Methodology 219 12.1 Design Earthquakes and Ground Motions 219 12.1.1 ICOLD and FEMA 220 12.1.2 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) 221 12.1.3 Division of Safety of Dams (DSOD), State of California 221 12.1.4 U.S. Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) 221 12.1.5 Comments and Observations 221 12.2 Progressive Seismic Demand Analyses 224 12.3 Progressive Capacity Evaluation 226 12.4 Evaluating Seismic Performance 227 12.5 Potential Failure Mode Analysis 228 13 Ground-Motion Selection and Modification 231 Part A: Single Horizontal Component of Ground Motion 232 13.1 Target Spectrum 232 13.1.1 Uniform Hazard Spectrum 232 13.1.2 Uniform Hazard Spectrum Versus Recorded Ground Motions 232 13.1.3 Conditional Mean Spectrum 234 13.1.4 CMS-UHS Composite Spectrum 235 13.2 Ground-Motion Selection and Amplitude Scaling 239 13.3 Ground-Motion Selection to Match Target Spectrum Mean and Variance 241 13.4 Ground-Motion Selection and Spectral Matching 243 13.5 Amplitude Scaling Versus Spectral Matching of Ground Motions 247 Part B: Two Horizontal Components of Ground Motion 247 13.6 Target Spectra 247 13.7 Selection, Scaling, and Orientation of Ground-Motion Components 250 Part C: Three Components of Ground Motion 252 13.8 Target Spectra and Ground-Motion Selection 252 14 Application of Dynamic Analysis to Evaluate Existing Dams and Design New Dams 253 14.1 Seismic Evaluation of Folsom Dam 253 14.2 Seismic Design of Olivenhain Dam 257 14.3 Seismic Evaluation of Hoover Dam 261 14.4 Seismic Design of Dagangshan Dam 265 References 271 Notation 281 Index 291

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive overview of high precision surveying, including recent developments in geomatics and their applications This book covers advanced precision surveying techniques, their proper use in engineering and geoscience projects, and their importance in the detailed analysis and evaluation of surveying projects. The early chapters review the fundamentals of precision surveying: the types of surveys; survey observations; standards and specifications; and accuracy assessments for angle, distance and position difference measurement systems. The book also covers network design and 3-D coordinating systems before discussing specialized topics such as structural and ground deformation monitoring techniques and analysis, mining surveys, tunneling surveys, and alignment surveys. Precision Surveying: The Principles and Geomatics Practice: Covers structural and ground deformation monitoring analysis, advanced techniques in mining and tunneling surTable of ContentsAbout the Author xvii Foreword xix Preface xxi Acknowledgments xxv 1 Precision Survey Properties and Techniques 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Basic Classification of Precision Surveys 3 1.3 Precision Geodetic Survey Techniques 8 1.4 Review of Some Safety Issues 12 2 Observables, Measuring Instruments, and Theory of Observation Errors 15 2.1 Observables, Measurements and Measuring Instruments 15 2.2 Angle and Direction Measuring Instruments 16 2.3 Elevation Difference Measuring Instrument 20 2.4 Distance Measuring Instrument 24 2.5 Accuracy Limitations of Modern Survey Instruments 25 2.6 Error Properties of Measurements 28 2.7 Precision and Accuracy Indicators 29 2.8 Systematic Error and Random Error Propagation Laws 30 2.9 Statistical Test of Hypotheses: The Tools for Data Analysis 38 2.10 Need for Equipment Calibration and Testing 44 3 Standards and Specifications for Precision Surveys 47 3.1 Introduction 48 3.2 Standards and the Concept of Confidence Regions 51 3.3 Standards for Traditional Vertical Control Surveys 52 3.4 Standards for Horizontal Control Surveys 66 3.5 Unified Standards for Positional Accuracy 72 3.6 Map and Geospatial Data Accuracy Standards 77 3.7 Quality and Standards 82 4 Accuracy Analysis and Evaluation of Angle Measurement System 87 4.1 Sources of Errors in Angle Measurements 87 4.2 Systematic Errors Eliminated by Measurement Process 88 4.3 Systematic Errors Eliminated by Adjustment Process 98 4.4 Summary of Systematic Error Elimination 106 4.5 Random Error Estimation 106 4.6 Testing Procedure for Precision Theodolites 123 5 Accuracy Analysis and Evaluation of Distance Measurement System 133 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 General Properties of Waves 134 5.3 Application of EM Waves to EDM 138 5.4 EDM Instrumental Errors 153 5.5 EDM External Errors 154 5.6 Random Error Propagation of EDM Distance Measurement 155 5.7 Calibration and Testing Procedures for EDM Instruments 165 6 Accuracy Analysis and Evaluation of Elevation and Coordinate Difference Measurement Systems 189 6.1 Introduction 189 6.2 Pointing Error 190 6.3 Reading/Rod Plumbing Error 191 6.4 Leveling Error 191 6.5 Collimation, Rod Scale, and Rod Index Errors 192 6.6 Effects of Vertical Atmospheric Refraction and Earth Curvature 193 6.7 Random Error Propagation for Elevation Difference Measurements 194 6.8 Testing Procedures for Leveling Equipment 197 6.9 Calibration of Coordinate Difference Measurement System (GNSS Equipment) 203 7 Survey Design and Analysis 209 7.1 Introduction 209 7.2 Network Design 211 7.3 Solution Approaches to Design Problems 218 7.4 Network Adjustment and Analysis 223 7.5 Angular Measurement Design Example 223 7.6 Distance Measurement Design Example 226 7.7 Traverse Measurement Design Examples 227 7.8 Elevation Difference Measurement Design Example 235 8 Three-Dimensional Coordinating Systems 237 8.1 Introduction 238 8.2 Coordinate System for Three-Dimensional Coordinating Systems 243 8.3 Three-Dimensional Coordination with Global Navigation Satellite System 244 8.4 Three-Dimensional Coordination with Electronic Theodolites 244 8.5 Three-Dimensional Coordination with Laser Systems 258 9 Deformation Monitoring and Analysis: Geodetic Techniques 267 9.1 Introduction 268 9.2 Geodetic Deformation Monitoring Schemes and the Design Approach 273 9.3 Monumentation and Targeting 278 9.4 Horizontal Deformation Monitoring and Analysis 284 9.5 Vertical Deformation Monitoring and Analysis 322 10 Deformation Monitoring and Analysis: High-Definition Survey and Remote Sensing Techniques 329 10.1 Introduction 330 10.2 Laser Systems 330 10.3 Interferometric Synthetic Aperture Radar Technologies 350 10.4 Comparison of Laser (LiDAR) and Radar (InSAR) Technologies 376 11 Deformation Monitoring and Analysis: Geotechnical and Structural Techniques 377 11.1 Introduction 378 11.2 Overview of Geotechnical and Structural Instrumentation 380 11.3 Design of Geotechnical and Structural Monitoring Schemes 419 11.4 Analysis of Geotechnical Measurements 422 11.5 Integrated Deformation Monitoring System 437 12 Mining Surveying 441 12.1 Introduction 442 12.2 Mining Terminology 445 12.3 Horizontal Mine Orientation Surveys 446 12.4 Transferring Levels or Heights Underground 483 12.5 Volume Determination in Mines 491 13 Tunneling Surveys 495 13.1 Introduction 495 13.2 Basic Elements and Methods of Tunneling Surveys 496 13.3 Main Sources of Error in Tunneling Surveys 500 13.4 Horizontal Design and Simulation of Tunneling Surveys 503 13.5 Vertical Design and Simulation of Tunneling Surveys 508 13.6 Numerical Example: Horizontal Breakthrough Analysis 512 13.7 Examples of Tunneling Surveys 516 13.8 Analysis of Underground Traverse Surveys 520 14 Precision Alignment Surveys 527 14.1 Introduction 527 14.2 Direct Laser Alignment Technique 530 14.3 Conventional Surveying Techniques of Alignment 530 14.4 Optical-Tooling Techniques 538 14.5 Metrology by Laser Interferometer Systems 559 14.6 Alignment by Polar Measurement Systems 565 14.7 Main Sources of Error in Alignment Surveys 573 Appendix I: Extracts From Baarda’s Nomogram 575 Appendix II: Commonly used Statistical Tables 577 Appendix III: Tau Distribution Table for Significance Level α 581 Appendix IV: Important Units 587 References 589 Index 607

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroduction to Built Asset Management Provides a multidisciplinary introduction to building maintenance management and execution, covering a wide range of current technical and management issues The maintenance and upgrading of existing buildings is no longer viewed as separate from the operational phase of the completed building. Maintenance and management are now regarded as fundamental parts of a building's life cycle, forming a significant percentage of the construction industry's total output. As higher education programmes in the UK and elsewhere continue to place greater emphasis on the longer-term view of construction projects, students and instructors require a thorough and up-to-date textbook that emphasises the comprehensive nature of building maintenance. Introduction to Built Asset Management is a systematic introduction to both the technology and management issues central to building maintenance and refurbishment. Covering the entire life cycle of built assets, the texTable of ContentsList of Figures ix List of Tables xi Foreword xiii Acknowledgement xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction to the Book 1 1.2 The Main Areas and Themes Covered in the Book 1 1.3 Research Sources 7 2 Surveying Existing Buildings 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 A Background to Conducting Building Surveys 10 2.3 The Process of Undertaking Building Survey 11 2.4 Challenges and Obstacles When Undertaking Building Surveys 17 2.5 The Importance of Building Investigations 19 2.6 Managing the Remedial Work Process 21 2.7 Summary 23 3 Common Maintenance Issues and Managing Defects 25 3.1 Introduction 25 3.2 Exploring the Pathology of Building Maintenance Issues 26 3.3 Context to the Discussion on Building Defects 27 3.4 The Importance of Understanding the Nature and Effect of Agents That Can Lead to Building Defects 31 3.5 Dilemmas Associated with Repair or Renewal Decisions 33 3.6 Managing the Remedial Works Process to Address Maintenance Issues and Defects 35 3.7 Measures to Mitigate and Prevent Defects 37 3.8 Summary 39 Reference 41 4 Maintenance Management and Performance Measurement as Part of Private Financing Initiative (PFI) Schemes 43 4.1 Introduction 43 4.2 Definitions and Concepts of Facilities Management 44 4.3 Background to the Discussion on Performance Measurement (PM) of Facilities Management and Maintenance in the Healthcare Sector 45 4.4 The Advantages and Disadvantages of PFI Ventures in a Facilities Management Context 53 4.5 Quality Improvements in Maintenance Management Brought about through Performance Measurement 53 4.6 Financial and Non-financial Measurements 55 4.7 Performance Management 56 4.8 The Challenges for Performance Measurement 56 4.9 Payment Mechanisms as Part of PFI Contracts 59 4.10 Performance Monitoring Tools 60 4.11 The Importance of the Helpdesk for the Success of Maintenance and Facilities Management Services in PFI Initiatives 68 4.12 The Performance Monitoring Process 68 4.13 Key Issues Arising for Performance Management as Part of a Maintenance Management and FM Tool on PFI Schemes 72 4.14 Conclusions and Reflections 72 Acknowledgement 73 References 73 Further Reading 80 5 Procurement and Contracting for Maintenance and Refurbishment Works 87 5.1 Introduction 87 5.2 Rationale for Procurement of Maintenance Interventions 87 5.3 The Procurement Process 88 5.4 Project Initiation 90 5.5 Procurement Strategy 92 5.6 Client Brief 93 5.7 Procurement Route 94 5.7.1 Categorisation of Procurement Routes and Pricing Mechanisms 94 5.7.2 Pricing Mechanism 97 5.7.3 Procurement Routes 100 5.8 Contract Arrangements 109 5.8.1 The Joint Contracts Tribunal (JCT) Suite of Contracts 110 5.8.2 The New Engineering Contract (NEC) Suite of Contracts 111 5.8.3 The ACA PPC 2000 Form of Contract 115 5.9 Summary 120 References 120 6 Financial Management: Capital Costs 123 6.1 Introduction 123 6.2 Project Appraisal and Developing the Business Case 124 6.2.1 Optional Appraisal 126 6.3 Order of Cost Estimate 127 6.3.1 Developing the Order of Cost Estimate 127 6.3.2 Developing the Order of Cost Estimate Using the Functional Unit Method 129 6.3.3 Developing the Order of Cost Estimate Using the Floor Area Method 130 6.3.4 Developing the Order of Cost Estimate Using the Elemental Method 134 6.4 Cost Planning 137 6.4.1 Preparing the Cost Plan 140 6.4.2 Formal Cost Plan 1 147 6.4.3 Formal Cost Plan 2 155 6.4.4 Formal Cost Plan 3 157 6.5 Summary 158 References 159 7 Financial Management: Life Cycle Costing 161 7.1 Introduction 161 7.2 Forecasting Financial Impacts of Building Maintenance 162 7.3 Defining Life Cycle Costing 165 7.4 Challenges Associated with Life Cycle Prediction 167 7.4.1 Benefits of LCC 170 7.5 Undertaking Life Cycle Costing 170 7.5.1 Time Value of Money 170 7.5.2 Determining the Time Period of Appraisal 181 7.5.3 Component Life Considerations 185 7.5.4 Discount Rate, Interest Rate and Inflation 186 7.5.5 Building In-Use Considerations 189 7.5.6 Life Cycle Costing – Applications through the Building Life Cycle 190 7.5.7 Developing a Life Cycle Cost Plan 191 7.6 Example Life Cycle Cost Models 194 7.7 Summary 197 References 198 8 Sustainable Maintenance Management 201 8.1 Introduction 201 8.2 Sustainable Maintenance Management 201 8.3 Circular Economy 203 8.4 Carbon Neutrality 204 8.5 Retrofitting 207 8.6 BREEAM 210 8.7 Corporate Social Responsibility 212 8.8 Sustainable Development Goals 214 8.9 Conclusion 216 Reference 216 9 Risk Management 217 9.1 Introduction 217 9.2 What Is Risk? 217 9.3 The Nature of Risk 219 9.4 Risk in the Built Environment 220 9.5 Risk in Asset Management and Maintenance 224 9.6 What Is Risk Management? 224 9.7 The Nature of Risk Management 228 9.8 Risk Management in Asset Management and Maintenance 228 9.9 How Is Risk Classified? 232 9.10 Risk Events in Building Maintenance and Asset Management 233 9.11 The Consequences of Risk Events 235 9.12 Proactive and Reactive Risk Management 237 9.13 Procurement Risk 238 9.14 Why Risk Events Still Happen 239 9.15 Conclusion 240 References 240 10 Managing the Maintenance Process 243 10.1 Introduction 243 10.2 How to Manage Building Maintenance 243 10.3 Planning for Building Maintenance 244 10.4 Proactive Maintenance 244 10.5 Reactive Maintenance 245 10.6 Maintenance Schedules and Budgets 246 10.7 The Importance of a Programme 246 10.8 Site and Task Constraints 248 10.9 Health and Safety of Building Maintenance 249 10.9.1 Having Thorough Supply Chain Selection Methods in Place 250 10.9.2 Operating a Permit to Work System 250 10.9.3 Ensuring Inspections Are Carried Out for All Required Works 250 10.9.4 Ensuring the Risks Are Fully Understood 250 10.9.5 Being Up-to-Date with the Latest Guidance and Legislation 250 10.9.6 Having an Up to Date Training Matrix 251 10.10 Common Difficulties Encountered during Maintenance Works 251 10.11 Soft Landings 252 10.12 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 253 10.13 Building Information Modelling 254 10.14 Conclusion 255 11 Conclusion 257 About the Authors 261 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisTriaxial Testing of Soils explains how to carry out triaxial tests to demonstrate the effects of soil behaviour on engineering designs. An authoritative and comprehensive manual, it reflects current best practice and instrumentation.Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Author xvii 1 Principles of Triaxial Testing 1 1.1 Purpose of triaxial tests 1 1.2 Concept of testing 1 1.3 The triaxial test 2 1.4 Advantages and limitations 3 1.5 Test stages – consolidation and shearing 4 1.5.1 Consolidation 5 1.5.2 Shearing 5 1.6 Types of tests 5 1.6.1 Simulation of field conditions 6 1.6.2 Selection of test type 12 2 Computations and Presentation of Test Results 13 2.1 Data reduction 13 2.1.1 Sign rule – 2D 13 2.1.2 Strains 13 2.1.3 Cross‐sectional area 23 2.1.4 Stresses 24 2.1.5 Corrections 25 2.1.6 The effective stress principle 25 2.1.7 Stress analysis in two dimensions – Mohr’s circle 25 2.1.8 Strain analysis in two dimensions – Mohr’s circle 27 2.2 Stress–strain diagrams 28 2.2.1 Basic diagrams 28 2.2.2 Modulus evaluation 37 2.2.3 Derived diagrams 41 2.2.4 Normalized stress–strain behavior 48 2.2.5 Patterns of soil behavior – error recognition 49 2.3 Strength diagrams 51 2.3.1 Definition of effective and total strengths 51 2.3.2 Mohr–Coulomb failure concept 51 2.3.3 Mohr–Coulomb for triaxial compression 54 2.3.4 Curved failure envelope 55 2.3.5 MIT p–q diagram 57 2.3.6 Cambridge p–q diagram 59 2.3.7 Determination of best‐fit soil strength parameters 60 2.3.8 Characterization of total strength 60 2.4 Stress paths 61 2.4.1 Drained stress paths 61 2.4.2 Total stress paths in undrained tests 61 2.4.3 Effective stress paths in undrained tests 61 2.4.4 Normalized p–q diagrams 66 2.4.5 Vector curves 68 2.5 Linear regression analysis 72 2.5.1 MIT p–q diagram 72 2.5.2 Cambridge p–q diagram 74 2.5.3 Correct and incorrect linear regression analyses 75 2.6 Three‐dimensional stress states 76 2.6.1 General 3D stress states 76 2.6.2 Stress invariants 76 2.6.3 Stress deviator invariants 80 2.6.4 Magnitudes and directions of principal stresses 81 2.7 Principal stress space 83 2.7.1 Octahedral stresses 83 2.7.2 Triaxial plane 84 2.7.3 Octahedral plane 86 2.7.4 Characterization of 3D stress conditions 87 2.7.5 Shapes of stress invariants in principal stress space 89 2.7.6 Procedures for projecting stress points onto a common octahedral plane 90 2.7.7 Procedure for plotting stress points on an octahedral plane 96 2.7.8 Representation of test results with principal stress rotation 97 3 Triaxial Equipment 99 3.1 Triaxial setup 99 3.1.1 Specimen, cap, and base 99 3.1.2 Membrane 103 3.1.3 O‐rings 105 3.1.4 Drainage system 106 3.1.5 Leakage of triaxial setup 112 3.1.6 Volume change devices 113 3.1.7 Cell fluid 113 3.1.8 Lubricated ends 120 3.2 Triaxial cell 125 3.2.1 Cell types 125 3.2.2 Cell wall 127 3.2.3 Hoek cell 128 3.3 Piston 128 3.3.1 Piston friction 129 3.3.2 Connections between piston, cap, and specimen 132 3.4 Pressure supply 133 3.4.1 Water column 133 3.4.2 Mercury pot system 134 3.4.3 Compressed gas 135 3.4.4 Mechanically compressed fluids 136 3.4.5 Pressure intensifiers 137 3.4.6 Pressure transfer to triaxial cell 137 3.4.7 Vacuum to supply effective confining pressure 138 3.5 Vertical loading equipment 139 3.5.1 Deformation or strain control 139 3.5.2 Load control 140 3.5.3 Stress control 141 3.5.4 Combination of load control and deformation control 141 3.5.5 Stiffness requirements 143 3.5.6 Strain control versus load control 143 3.6 Triaxial cell with integrated loading system 143 4 Instrumentation, Measurements, and Control 145 4.1 Purpose of instrumentation 145 4.2 Principle of measurements 145 4.3 Instrument characteristics 147 4.4 Electrical instrument operation principles 149 4.4.1 Strain gage 149 4.4.2 Linear variable differential transformer 151 4.4.3 Proximity gage 153 4.4.4 Reluctance gage 153 4.4.5 Electrolytic liquid level 154 4.4.6 Hall effect technique 154 4.4.7 Elastomer gage 154 4.4.8 Capacitance technique 155 4.5 Instrument measurement uncertainty 155 4.5.1 Accuracy, precision, and resolution 156 4.5.2 Measurement uncertainty in triaxial tests 156 4.6 Instrument performance characteristics 158 4.6.1 Excitation 158 4.6.2 Zero shift 159 4.6.3 Sensitivity 159 4.6.4 Thermal effects on zero shift and sensitivity 159 4.6.5 Natural frequency 159 4.6.6 Nonlinearity 159 4.6.7 Hysteresis 159 4.6.8 Repeatability 159 4.6.9 Range 159 4.6.10 Overload capacity 160 4.6.11 Overload protection 160 4.6.12 Volumetric flexibility of pressure transducers 160 4.7 Measurement of linear deformations 160 4.7.1 Inside and outside measurements 160 4.7.2 Recommended gage length 162 4.7.3 Operational requirements 162 4.7.4 Electric wires 163 4.7.5 Clip gages 163 4.7.6 Linear variable differential transformer setup 167 4.7.7 Proximity gage setup 168 4.7.8 Inclinometer gages 170 4.7.9 Hall effect gage 171 4.7.10 X‐ray technique 171 4.7.11 Video tracking and high‐speed photography 171 4.7.12 Optical deformation measurements 172 4.7.13 Characteristics of linear deformation measurement devices 174 4.8 Measurement of volume changes 178 4.8.1 Requirements for volume change devices 178 4.8.2 Measurements from saturated specimens 180 4.8.3 Measurements from a triaxial cell 189 4.8.4 Measurements from dry and partly saturated specimens 192 4.9 Measurement of axial load 195 4.9.1 Mechanical force transducers 195 4.9.2 Operating principle of strain gage load cells 197 4.9.3 Primary sensors 197 4.9.4 Fabrication of diaphragm load cells 198 4.9.5 Load capacity and overload protection 198 4.10 Measurement of pressure 199 4.10.1 Measurement of cell pressure 199 4.10.2 Measurement of pore pressure 199 4.10.3 Operating principles of pressure transducers 201 4.10.4 Fabrication of pressure transducers 201 4.10.5 Pressure capacity and overpressure protection 201 4.11 Specifications for instruments 201 4.12 Factors in the selection of instruments 202 4.13 Measurement redundancy 202 4.14 Calibration of instruments 203 4.14.1 Calibration of linear deformation devices 203 4.14.2 Calibration of volume change devices 204 4.14.3 Calibration of axial load devices 204 4.14.4 Calibration of pressure gages and transducers 204 4.15 Data acquisition 206 4.15.1 Manual datalogging 206 4.15.2 Computer datalogging 206 4.16 Test control 206 4.16.1 Control of load, pressure, and deformations 206 4.16.2 Principles of control systems 207 5 Preparation of Triaxial Specimens 211 5.1 Intact specimens 211 5.1.1 Storage of samples 211 5.1.2 Sample inspection and documentation 212 5.1.3 Ejection of specimens 214 5.1.4 Trimming of specimens 215 5.1.5 Freezing technique to produce intact samples of granular materials 217 5.2 Laboratory preparation of specimens 217 5.2.1 Slurry consolidation of clay 217 5.2.2 Air pluviation of sand 219 5.2.3 Depositional techniques for silty sand 222 5.2.4 Undercompaction 227 5.2.5 Compaction of clayey soils 232 5.2.6 Compaction of soils with oversize particles 234 5.2.7 Extrusion and storage 235 5.2.8 Effects of specimen aging 235 5.3 Measurement of specimen dimensions 235 5.3.1 Compacted specimens 235 5.4 Specimen installation 235 5.4.1 Fully saturated clay specimen 236 5.4.2 Unsaturated clayey soil specimen 237 6 Specimen Saturation 239 6.1 Reasons for saturation 239 6.2 Reasons for lack of full saturation 239 6.3 Effects of lack of full saturation 240 6.4 B‐value test 241 6.4.1 Effects of primary factors on B‐value 241 6.4.2 Effects of secondary factors on B‐value 243 6.4.3 Performance of B‐value test 246 6.5 Determination of degree of saturation 249 6.6 Methods of saturating triaxial specimens 250 6.6.1 Percolation with water 250 6.6.2 CO2‐method 251 6.6.3 Application of back pressure 252 6.6.4 Vacuum procedure 258 6.7 Range of application of saturation methods 262 7 Testing Stage I: Consolidation 263 7.1 Objective of consolidation 263 7.2 Selection of consolidation stresses 263 7.2.1 Anisotropic consolidation 264 7.2.2 Isotropic consolidation 267 7.2.3 Effects of sampling 268 7.2.4 SHANSEP for soft clay 268 7.2.5 Very sensitive clay 272 7.3 Coefficient of consolidation 272 7.3.1 Effects of boundary drainage conditions 272 7.3.2 Determination of time for 100% consolidation 272 8 Testing Stage II: Shearing 277 8.1 Introduction 277 8.2 Selection of vertical strain rate 277 8.2.1 UU‐tests on clay soils 277 8.2.2 CD‐ and CU‐tests on granular materials 277 8.2.3 CD‐ and CU‐tests on clayey soils 277 8.2.4 Effects of lubricated ends in undrained tests 282 8.3 Effects of lubricated ends and specimen shape 282 8.3.1 Strain uniformity and stability of test configuration 282 8.3.2 Modes of instability in soils 284 8.3.3 Triaxial tests on sand 284 8.3.4 Triaxial tests on clay 290 8.4 Selection of specimen size 292 8.5 Effects of membrane penetration 293 8.5.1 Drained tests 293 8.5.2 Undrained tests 293 8.6 Post test inspection of specimen 293 9 Corrections to Measurements 295 9.1 Principles of measurements 295 9.2 Types of corrections 295 9.3 Importance of corrections – strong and weak specimens 295 9.4 Tests on very short specimens 296 9.5 Vertical load 296 9.5.1 Piston uplift 296 9.5.2 Piston friction 296 9.5.3 Side drains 298 9.5.4 Membrane 301 9.5.5 Buoyancy effects 308 9.5.6 Techniques to avoid corrections to vertical load 309 9.6 Vertical deformation 309 9.6.1 Compression of interfaces 309 9.6.2 Bedding errors 309 9.6.3 Techniques to avoid corrections to vertical deformations 311 9.7 Volume change 312 9.7.1 Membrane penetration 312 9.7.2 Volume change due to bedding errors 317 9.7.3 Leaking membrane 317 9.7.4 Techniques to avoid corrections to volume change 319 9.8 Cell and pore pressures 319 9.8.1 Membrane tension 319 9.8.2 Fluid self‐weight pressures 319 9.8.3 Sand penetration into lubricated ends 319 9.8.4 Membrane penetration 319 9.8.5 Techniques to avoid corrections to cell and pore pressures 320 10 Special Tests and Test Considerations 321 10.1 Introduction 321 10.1.1 Low confining pressure tests on clays 321 10.1.2 Conventional low pressure tests on any soil 321 10.1.3 High pressure tests 322 10.1.4 Peats and organic soils 322 10.2 K0‐tests 322 10.3 Extension tests 322 10.3.1 Problems with the conventional triaxial extension test 323 10.3.2 Enforcing uniform strains in extension tests 324 10.4 Tests on unsaturated soils 326 10.4.1 Soil water retention curve 326 10.4.2 Hydraulic conductivity function 327 10.4.3 Low matric suction 327 10.4.4 High matric suction 329 10.4.5 Modeling 330 10.4.6 Triaxial testing 331 10.5 Frozen soils 331 10.6 Time effects tests 333 10.6.1 Creep tests 333 10.6.2 Stress relaxation tests 333 10.7 Determination of hydraulic conductivity 335 10.8 Bender element tests 335 10.8.1 Fabrication of bender elements 336 10.8.2 Shear modulus 337 10.8.3 Signal interpretation 338 10.8.4 First arrival time 338 10.8.5 Specimen size and geometry 340 10.8.6 Ray path analysis 340 10.8.7 Surface mounted elements 340 10.8.8 Effects of specimen material 341 10.8.9 Effects of cross‐anisotropy 341 11 Tests with Three Unequal Principal Stresses 343 11.1 Introduction 343 11.2 Tests with constant principal stress directions 344 11.2.1 Plane strain equipment 344 11.2.2 True triaxial equipment 345 11.2.3 Results from true triaxial tests 348 11.2.4 Strength characteristics 353 11.2.5 Failure criteria for soils 355 11.3 Tests with rotating principal stress directions 360 11.3.1 Simple shear equipment 360 11.3.2 Directional shear cell 362 11.3.3 Torsion shear apparatus 364 11.3.4 Summary and conclusion 370 Appendix A: Manufacturing of Latex Rubber Membranes 373 A.1 The process 373 A.2 Products for membrane fabrication 373 A.3 Create an aluminum mold 374 A.4 Two tanks 374 A.5 Mold preparation 374 A.6 Dipping processes 374 A.7 Post production 375 A.8 Storage 375 A.9 Membrane repair 375 Appendix B: Design of Diaphragm Load Cells 377 B.1 Load cells with uniform diaphragm 377 B.2 Load cells with tapered diaphragm 378 B.3 Example: Design of 5 kN beryllium copper load cell 378 B.3.1 Punching failure 379 References 381 Index 397

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroducing a new practical approach within the field of applied mechanics developed to solve beam strength and bending problems using classical beam theory and beam modeling, this outstanding new volume offers the engineer, scientist, or student a revolutionary new approach to subsea pipeline design. Integrating use of the Mathematica program into these models and designs, the engineer can utilize this unique approach to build stronger, more efficient and less costly subsea pipelines, a very important phase of the world''s energy infrastructure. Significant advances have been achieved in implementation of the applied beam theory in various engineering design technologies over the last few decades, and the implementation of this theory also takes an important place within the practical area of re-qualification and reassessment for onshore and offshore pipeline engineering. A general strategy of applying beam theory into the design procedure of subsea pipelines has been develoTable of ContentsList of Figures xiii Abstract xvii Preface xix List of Symbols xxiii Acronyms xxv PART I CLASSICAL BEAM THEORY: PROBLEMSET AND TRADITIONAL METHOD OF SOLUTION 1 Euler's beam approach: Linear theory of Beam Bending 3 1.1 Objective to the part I 3 1.2 Scope for part I 3 1.3 Theory of Euler’s beam: How to utilize general beam theory for solving the problems in question? 4 1.3.1 Short history of beam theory 4 1.3.2 General Euler – Bernoulli method: Traditional approach 5 1.3.3 Loading considerations (from Wikipedia). Symbolic solutions 8 PART II STATICALLY INDETERMINATE BEAMS: CLASSICAL APPROACH 2 Beam in classical evaluations 13 2.1 Fixed both edges beam 13 2.1.1 Problem set and traditional method of solution: Unknown reactions 13 2.1.2 The equations of beam equilibrium 15 2.1.3 Differential equation of beam bending 16 2.1.4 The boundary conditions for a beam 16 2.1.5 The solution for forces and moments 17 2.1.6 Visualizations of solutions 17 2.1.7 Well-known results from "black box" program 20 2.2 Fixed beam with a leg in the middle part 20 2.2.1 Problem set 20 2.2.2 Static equations 22 2.2.3 Differential equations for the deflections of the spans 23 2.2.4 Transmission and boundary conditions 24 2.2.5 Reactions 24 2.2.6 Visualizations of the symbolic solutions 24 PART III NEW METHOD OF SYMBOLIC EVALUATIONS IN THE BEAMTHEORY 3 New method for solving beam static equations 33 3.1 Objective 33 3.2 Problem set 34 3.3 Boundary conditions 37 3.4 New practical application for Classical Beam Theory: Uniform load 38 3.4.1 Elementary Problems: Rectangular Load Distributions. Hinge and roller supporters of beam 38 3.5 Statically indeterminate beams 46 3.5.1 Objective 46 3.5.2 Problem b): Rectangular load distribution 47 3.5.3 Problem c): Pointed force 50 3.5.4 Problem d): Moment at the point 57 3.5.5 Problem set: Beam with hinge at the edge 61 3.5.6 Problem set: Beam with weak stiff ness at edge 65 3.6 Statically indeterminate beams with a leg 68 3.6.1 Problem bb): Two spans 68 3.6.2 Exercises 75 3.7 Cantilever Beam: Point Force at the Free Edge 75 3.7.1 Simple cantilever beam 75 3.7.2 Cantilever Beam: Point Force in the middle part of the beam 78 3.8 Point Force in the middle part of the beam: Hinge and Roller 83 3.8.1 Simple beam: Mechanical Problem Set 83 3.8.2 Point Force in the middle part of the beam: Three-point bending 84 3.8.3 Exercise 87 3.8.4 Moment at the edge of beam 91 3.8.5 Fixed beam with the Hinge at the edge of the beam 94 3.9 Multispan beam 101 3.9.1 Symbolic evaluation for multispan beam 101 3.9.2 Example of strength of multispan beam: Symbolic solutions 106 3.9.3 Numerical solutions for a peak like force 111 3.9.4 Numerical and symbolic solutions formultispan beam 115 3.9.5 Fixed edges of multispan beam 121 PART IV BEAMS ON AN ELASTIC BED: APPLICATION OF THE NEWMETHOD 4 Beam installed at the elastic foundation: Rectangular load. Symbolic Evaluations 129 4.1 Beam at elastic bed: Problem set 129 4.2 Finited size beam at the Winkler bed: Fixed edges 130 PART V APPLICATIONS FOR SUBSEA PIPELINES: COMPUTATIONAL EVALUATIONS 5 Fixed beam on elastic bed: Symbolic Solutions for Point Force 141 5.1 Boundary problem: Uncertain constants method 142 5.2 Symbolic solution: Steel Pipeline at seabed 151 5.3 Fixed Pipeline on elastic seabed in Arctic: Iceberg's Dragging Load. Numeric solutions 156 5.3.1 Problem set. Iceberg load 156 5.3.2 Free beam on elastic bed: Narrow rectangular load 156 5.3.3 Free pipeline on elastic bed: Combined loads 164 PART VI INSTALLATION OF THE SUBSEA PIPELINE AT SHALLOWWATER: INSTALLATION MODE IN ARCTIC REGION 6 Linear quadratic control 173 6.1 Objective 173 6.2 Subsea pipeline on elastic seabed in Arctic region: Impact of Iceberg Dragging Force 174 6.3 Strength and stability of the subsea pipeline 178 6.4 Subsea pipeline in current: Subsea Current Dragging Force. Strength and Stability 186 PART VII SUBSEA PIPELINES IN ARCTIC REGION: PERSPECTIVE AND PROJECTS 7 Subsea Pipeline: Installation and Operation Stages 199 7.1 Linear Th eory of Bending of Pipeline 199 7.2 French Method of Installation with Lay Barge: MultiLayers Pipe 206 7.2.1 Theory of bending of multilayers pipe: Timoshenko's beam approximation 206 7.2.2 Subsea Pipeline Installation by S-method 208 7.2.3 Equilibrium of the sagging part of subsea pipeline 208 7.2.4 Symbolic Solutions of the Bending Shape of Subsea Pipeline 211 7.2.5 Bending Shape and Strength of Subsea Pipeline. Case 1 212 7.2.6 Numeric solution for French Installation Project. Case 2 223 7.2.7 Numeric solution for French Lay Barge Project. Case 3 229 PART VIII IMPACT OF ICEBERG ON SUBSEA PIPELINE: INSTALLATION MODE 8 Historical view: Arctic regions 239 8.1 Norway, Barents Sea 239 8.2 Russia: Prirazlomnoye (Off shore) 242 9 Subsea Pipeline in Arctic Region 245 9.1 Problem set 248 9.1.1 Design properties 248 9.1.2 Iceberg load 250 9.1.3 Mechanical model. Symbolic solutions 252 9.2 Strength of the Pipeline under Impact of Iceberg. Numeric solutions 255 Conclusion 267 References 269 Appendix A 275 Index 277

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe guide that explores how procurement and contracts can create an integrated team while improving value, economy, quality and client satisfaction Collaborative Construction Procurement and Improved Value provides an important guide for project managers, lawyers, designers, constructors and operators, showing step by step how proven collaborative models and processes can move from the margins to the mainstream. It covers all stages of the project lifecycle and offers new ways to embed learning from one project to the next. Collaborative Construction Procurement and Improved Value explores how strategic thinking, intelligent team selection, contract integration and the use of digital technology can enhance the value of construction projects and programmes of work. With 50 UK case studies, plus chapters from specialists in 6 other jurisdictions, it describes in detail the legal and procedural route maps for successful collaborative teams. Collaborative Construction Procurement and ImTrade Review'We have had a great deal written about the problems with construction procurement: what David Mosey succeeds in showing in Collaborative Construction Procurement and Improved Value is how construction contracts can improve it. (...) Mosey persuasively argues that statements of good intention, references to alliancing and partnering at the outset of a project, and vague exhortations to deal in “good faith” in contract forms are inadequate to create and maintain the commercial and legal bridges between team members. Instead, collaborative procurement is best achieved by robust underpinning from contracts that not only support but promote joint working. One of the core messages that comes out of the book is the potential for contracts to “reach beyond individual projects and support long-term collaborative relationships”. (...)In this book, Professor Mosey has demonstrated through extensive research that collaborative construction procurement, supported by robust contractual structures, has achieved measurable success across a range of projects. It is now up to the industry to take note.' David Sawtell, Construction Law Journal, 2019, 35(6), 384-389 1. Sir Rupert Jackson PC, retired Lord Justice of Appeal: ‘A successful procurement exercise or construction project is one in which all participants work together collaboratively to achieve a common end. That is not easy to achieve because the participants each have their own commercial interests and reputations to protect. I have long believed that the mere inclusion of platitudes that "the parties will work together in good faith" adds little to the implied term of co-operation, and a series of recent cases have shown that such wording seldom avails the parties when a dispute erupts. The present book goes far beyond platitudes. It explores new ways of working and new contractual structures which can actually bring about collaborative working. It demonstrates how the use of BIM can facilitate the ready sharing of information between members of the team. It explains how the team members can benefit from the creation and development of a project alliance. The research and case studies set out in this book will offer practical guidance to all who are working in the construction sector.’ 2. Matthew Bell, Senior Lecturer and Co-Director of Studies for Construction Law, Melbourne Law School: ‘For many in the construction industry, collaborative procurement is the holy grail. This new text by Professor David Mosey and leading practitioners from around the world provides a uniquely-valuable road map in pursuit of that goal. It not only explains the benefits of collaborative ways of working, it also helps industry professionals and their lawyers navigate the potential pitfalls by compiling a critical assessment of experience to date. The text harnesses lessons learned and the value of technological innovations such as BIM. In this way, it provides both a ‘how to’ and ‘why to’ manual for realising the potential of collaborative construction procurement as we enter the third decade of the 21st century. ‘ 3. Mark Farmer, CEO Cast Consultancy and author of ‘Modernise or Die’: ‘There is a crucial need to adopt an integrated procurement model in order to deliver projects more efficiently, for example through increasing ‘pre-manufactured value’ by moving processes from the final site into controlled manufacturing environments. I commend this book whose international co-authors have collated an excellent global reference point, demonstrating how organising projects differently can create better outcomes for all parties. The recommended procurement and contract systems are shown to achieve better aligned interests by harnessing learning and relationships from project to project and by using value-based selection and remuneration techniques. Unless you can deliver specific value-adding expertise through integrated working behaviours, the construction world will become an increasingly difficult place to make money and survive. Reading this publication is a vital part of future-proofing yourself!’ 4. Ann Bentley, Construction Leadership Council Board Member and Rider Levett Bucknall Global Board Member: ‘As any harassed parent knows, telling restive children to “play-nicely” is no guarantee that they will. Collaboration is much the same, and a broad expression of collaborative intent is no guarantee of collaborative behaviour: it requires knowledge, structure and commitment. With this comprehensive and far-reaching analysis, taking us from the birth of collaborative contracts to their relevance and use around the world, David Mosey and his King’s College team go a very long way to filling important knowledge gaps. Collaborative Construction Procurement and Improved Value should be recommended reading for anyone considering undertaking a construction project, and compulsory reading for their advisers. I commend David and his team for this work and the contributions that it will make to improving the way construction is procured and delivered.’ 5. Professor John Uff CBE QC: ‘This seminal work brings together the fruits of studies and writings spanning many years and encompassing many projects throughout the world under a variety of legal systems. The need for collaboration in the construction process has been a constant theme in the search for procedures and systems which can harness the expertise and energies of parties with divergent commercial interests while avoiding disputes. Procurement is the point at which collaboration begins, with the choice of project alliancing for a single enterprise or a framework or other longer-term arrangement bringing wider opportunities for collaboration. These extended relationships are supported by the authors’ work in developing the FAC-1 and TAC-1 models for which impressive case studies are described. The key to success is seen as the development of personal relationships, enhanced by digital technology including BIM, shared knowledge and appropriate motivation.’ 6. Shelagh Grant, Chief Executive, Housing Forum: ‘David Mosey’s extensive knowledge of the construction industry, and his well thought through solutions to delivering the best possible outcomes, come over strongly in this work. Many examples are given of the collaborative links and early interactions that help achieve good quality and good value in difficult and complex situations. The elements of successful collaboration are clearly laid out with particular emphasis on the selection of and relationships between team members. The application of digital technology is shown to work in particular alliance with this approach.’ 7. Nick Barrett, Editor, Construction Law: ‘Anyone viewing a typical construction project sees the impressive collaboration that brings designs, people, machinery and materials together in the one place, but they may not see the dangerous divisions that still exist in construction’s procurement and contractual underpinnings.This book’s authors show how a new focus on collaborative procurement can treat many of the industry’s ills. Evidence has been gathered internationally, not just from the UK, that collaborative approaches can make a major difference to outcomes. The need for a new industry strategy has never been greater, particularly after the Grenfell Tower disaster and the Carillion collapse. Collaborative procurement approaches that can be easily adopted are detailed in these pages, with a diversity of case studies that should convince even the sceptical.’ 8. Jason Russell,Executive Director, Highways, Transport & Environment, Surrey County Council: ‘As a Local Government Director, I am being challenged as never before to reduce costs whilst improving outcomes for our communities. This timely book demonstrates that bringing together the wider supply chain at the right time, with clear outcomes and underpinned by effective processes, can deliver significant benefits. It provides a practical guide, built on the experience of many projects that have delivered proven results over a number of years, and it is essential reading for anyone interested in getting better value from their construction projects.’ 9. Kevin Murray, Deputy Director - Construction & Property, Government Property Agency: ‘This book provides comprehensive evidence that lays waste to the myth that collaboration does not need contractual provisions, commitment and accountability.’ 10. Dr David Hancock, Construction Director, Infrastructure and Projects Authority, Cabinet Office: ‘Since the success of Terminal 5 Heathrow, I have been a great supporter of collaborative approaches and ECI for complex construction projects. This book recognises that collaboration may not be a universal panacea, and it sets out the arguments and opportunities that need to be debated prior to making procurement decisions. Where those opportunities outweigh the risks, it provides the foundations both contractually and behaviourally to ensure the best chance of success, with real examples from industry. This is a book that will benefit both the novice and the expert, providing a high-level overview and a dive into details for the practitioner to implement, without bias to a single contract type and with guidance on Alliance Contract forms for those who wish to realise their benefits.’ 11. Don Ward, Chief Executive, Constructing Excellence: ‘Many people have worked to implement the recommendations of Latham and Egan for construction reform, but few can match David Mosey’s first-hand experience and expertise in delivering the approaches which he promotes in this book with characteristic clarity and skill. He has probably worked on more collaborative projects than anyone else in the UK construction industry in the last two decades. He can literally point to billions of pounds worth of projects which he directly influenced and helped on a journey to implement better collaboration, using contracts and procurement routes as a key enabling tools. Consequently, David has had more success and gained extensive first-hand knowledge of what works and what doesn’t, and the plentiful case studies throughout this book illustrate this so very well. I have been honoured to work alongside him, including in the trial projects programme on which he draws heavily, and I hope this book will provide many more people with access to his thinking, approaches and practical advice. I hope you find David’s experience and expertise as valuable as I have done, and that he convinces you to implement collaborative procurement just as energetically.’Table of ContentsReviews xiii Preface xix Acknowledgements xxi About the Authors xxiii 1 What Is Collaborative Construction Procurement? 1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 What Is Collaborative Construction Procurement? 2 1.3 Why Is Collaborative Procurement Important? 4 1.4 What Research Has Examined Collaborative Construction Procurement? 6 1.5 What Case Studies Support Collaborative Procurement? 7 1.6 How Is Collaborative Procurement Connected to Digital Technology? 9 1.7 How Is Collaborative Procurement Connected to Contracts? 10 1.8 Who Was Sir Michael Latham? 12 1.9 How Can Collaborative Procurement Reflect ISO 44001? 13 1.10 What Should Collaborative Procurement Provide? 15 2 What Are the Foundations for Collaborative Construction Procurement? 19 2.1 Overview 19 2.2 What Is Different About Collaborative Construction Procurement? 20 2.3 How Are Construction Contracts Formed? 23 2.4 What Is Different About a Collaborative Construction Contract? 25 2.5 What Is an Alliance? 26 2.6 How Does BIM Affect Collaborative Procurement? 29 2.7 What Is Early Contractor Involvement? 30 2.8 What Are Two Stage Open Book, Cost Led Procurement and Integrated Project Insurance? 31 2.9 What Is Supply Chain Collaboration? 34 2.10 What Are the Supply Chain Collaboration Activities? 37 3 How Does a Project Alliance Operate? 39 3.1 Overview 39 3.2 What Is a Collaborative Project Team? 40 3.3 How Can a Collaborative Team Form a Project Alliance? 41 3.4 How Does a Project Alliance Operate? 42 3.5 How Can a Project Alliance Use Early Contractor Involvement? 45 3.6 How Can a Project Alliance Use Supply Chain Collaboration? 47 3.7 How Can a Project Alliance Measure and Reward Performance? 49 3.8 How Can a Project Alliance Improve Value and Outcomes? 51 3.9 How Can a Project Alliance Deal with Problems? 52 3.10 Project Alliance Case Studies 54 4 How Does a Framework Alliance Operate? 59 4.1 Overview 59 4.2 What Is a Framework? 60 4.3 How Does a Framework Contract Operate? 61 4.4 What Is a Framework Alliance? 63 4.5 How Does a Framework Alliance Award Work? 65 4.6 How Can a Framework Alliance Use Supply Chain Collaboration? 66 4.7 How Can a Framework Alliance Measure and Reward Performance? 68 4.8 How Can a Framework Alliance Improve Value? 69 4.9 How Can a Framework Alliance Deal with Problems? 71 4.10 Framework Alliance Case Studies 73 5 How Does a Term Alliance Operate? 79 5.1 Overview 79 5.2 How Does a Term Contract Operate? 80 5.3 What Are the Term Contract Forms? 81 5.4 What Is a Term Alliance? 83 5.5 How Does a Term Alliance Award Work? 85 5.6 How Can a Term Alliance Use Supply Chain Collaboration? 86 5.7 How Can a Term Alliance Improve Asset Management? 87 5.8 How Can a Term Alliance Improve Value? 88 5.9 How Can a Term Alliance Deal with Problems? 90 5.10 Term Alliance Case Studies 92 6 How Are Collaborative Team Members Selected? 97 6.1 Overview 97 6.2 What Are the Problems with Single Stage Selection? 98 6.3 How Can Early Contractor Selection Enable Collaborative Procurement? 100 6.4 How Can Early Contractor Selection Create More Accurate Prices? 102 6.5 How Are Collaborative Team Members Selected? 104 6.6 How Do Framework Selection Procedures Operate? 107 6.7 How Can Evaluation Criteria Balance Cost and Quality? 109 6.8 Can Early Contractor Selection Comply with Public Procurement? 111 6.9 Can Collaborative Working Occur During Selection? 113 6.10 Collaborative Selection Case Studies 115 7 Does Collaborative Procurement Need a Contract? 119 7.1 Overview 119 7.2 What Is the Impact of a Non-binding Agreement? 120 7.3 What Is the Impact of a Letter of Intent? 123 7.4 What Is the Impact of Implied Good Faith? 124 7.5 What Is the Impact of Express Good Faith? 128 7.6 What Is a Virtual Organisation? 130 7.7 What Is the Impact of a No Blame Clause? 132 7.8 What Is the Impact of a Collaborative Contract? 135 7.9 What Is the Impact of a Multi-Party Contract? 136 7.10 Collaborative Construction Management Case Studies 139 8 What Types of Contract Support Collaborative Procurement? 143 8.1 Overview 143 8.2 What Is a Relational Contract? 144 8.3 What Is a Conditional Contract? 146 8.4 What Is Enterprise Planning? 148 8.5 What Is an Enterprise Contract? 149 8.6 What Are the Enterprise Features of a Project Alliance Contract? 152 8.7 What Are the Enterprise Features of a Framework Alliance Contract? 153 8.8 How Can Collaborative Procurement Support a Joint Venture or Client Consortium? 154 8.9 How Can Collaborative Procurement Support a Public Private Partnership? 157 8.10 Collaborative Joint Venture and Consortium Case Studies 159 9 What Standard Form Contracts Support Collaborative Procurement? 165 9.1 Overview 165 9.2 What Is the Role of Standard Form Contracts? 166 9.3 How Can Standard Form Contracts Support Collaborative Procurement? 167 9.4 How Does FIDIC 2017 Support Collaborative Procurement? 169 9.5 How Does ICC 2014 Support Collaborative Procurement? 170 9.6 How Does JCT 2016 Support Collaborative Procurement? 172 9.7 How Does NEC4 Support Collaborative Procurement? 174 9.8 How Does PPC2000 Support Collaborative Procurement? 177 9.9 Which Standard Form Contracts Support a Project Alliance? 179 9.10 How Are Collaborative Project Contracts Used in Practice? 185 10 How Does the FAC-1 Framework Alliance Contract Operate? 187 10.1 Overview 187 10.2 What Are the Key Features of FAC-1? 188 10.3 How Does FAC-1 Award Work? 191 10.4 How Does FAC-1 Support Supply Chain Collaboration? 193 10.5 How Does FAC-1 Measure and Reward Performance? 194 10.6 How Does FAC-1 Support Collaborative Risk Management? 195 10.7 How Can FAC-1 Reflect Differing Requirements? 197 10.8 How Does FAC-1 Reflect UK Government and Industry Recommendations? 199 10.9 How Is FAC-1 Being Used in Practice? 201 10.10 FAC-1 Framework Alliance Case Studies 203 11 How Does the TAC-1 Term Alliance Contract Operate? 211 11.1 Overview 211 11.2 How Was TAC-1 Developed? 212 11.3 What Are the Key Features of TAC-1? 213 11.4 How Does TAC-1 Award Work? 215 11.5 How Does TAC-1 Support Supply Chain Collaboration? 217 11.6 How Does TAC-1 Measure and Reward Performance? 219 11.7 How Does TAC-1 Support Collaborative Risk Management? 220 11.8 How Can TAC-1 Reflect Differing Requirements? 221 11.9 How Does TAC-1 Differ from TPC2005? 222 11.10 How Are TPC2005 and TAC-1 Used in Practice? 223 12 How Is a Collaborative Culture Created? 227 12.1 Overview 227 12.2 What Is the Role of People in a Collaborative Culture? 228 12.3 Who Leads a Collaborative Culture? 230 12.4 Who Manages a Collaborative Culture? 232 12.5 How Can a Collaborative Culture Include all Stakeholders? 235 12.6 How Can a Collaborative Culture Improve Communication? 237 12.7 What Is the Role of a Core Group or Alliance Board? 239 12.8 What Is the Value of Training and Workshops? 242 12.9 What Is the Role of an Independent Adviser? 244 12.10 Collaborative Culture Case Studies 246 13 How Can BIM Support Collaborative Procurement? 251 13.1 Overview 251 13.2 What Is the Impact of Digital Technology? 252 13.3 What Is the Impact of BIM? 254 13.4 How Can BIM Enable Collaborative Procurement? 255 13.5 How Can BIM Support Early Contractor Involvement? 257 13.6 How Can BIM Support Whole Life Asset Management? 258 13.7 How Do Collaborative Teams Use BIM in Practice? 260 13.8 What Is the Impact of Smart Contracts? 261 13.9 What Are the Limits of Smart Contracts? 262 13.10 BIM Research Results 263 14 How Does BIM Support Collaborative Contracts? 267 14.1 Overview 267 14.2 How Does BIM Affect a Duty of Care? 268 14.3 How Does BIM Affect Agreed Deadlines and Interfaces? 270 14.4 How Does BIM Affect Intellectual Property Rights? 271 14.5 How Does BIM Affect Reliance on Data? 273 14.6 Who Manages BIM Data? 275 14.7 How Is BIM Treated in Construction Contracts? 276 14.8 How Does BIM Affect Alliances? 278 14.9 How Can BIM Deal with Problems? 281 14.10 BIM Alliance Case Studies 281 15 How Can Collaborative Procurement Improve Economic and Social Value? 285 15.1 Overview 285 15.2 How Can Collaborative Procurement Benefit All Team Members? 286 15.3 How Can Collaborative Procurement Create Cost Certainty and Cost Savings? 287 15.4 How Can Collaborative Procurement Improve Quality? 290 15.5 How Can Collaborative Procurement Improve Supply Chain Relationships? 292 15.6 How Can Collaborative Procurement Create Local and Regional Opportunities? 294 15.7 How Can Collaborative Procurement Support Employment and Training? 295 15.8 How Can Collaborative Procurement Support Improved Safety? 296 15.9 How Can Collaborative Procurement Support Environmental Benefits? 298 15.10 Benefits of Two Stage Open Book and Supply Chain Collaboration 301 16 How Is Collaborative Procurement Costed and Incentivised? 303 16.1 Overview 303 16.2 What Is the Impact of Open Book Costing? 305 16.3 How Can Collaborative Procurement Achieve a Fixed Price? 306 16.4 How Do Target Costs and Cost Reimbursement Operate? 308 16.5 How Can Early Contractor Involvement Control Costs? 310 16.6 How Is a Framework Alliance Costed? 313 16.7 How Is a Term Alliance Costed? 315 16.8 How Do Shared Pain/Gain Incentives Operate? 317 16.9 What Other Incentives Support Collaborative Procurement? 320 16.10 Collaborative Costing Case Studies 322 17 How Does Collaborative Procurement Manage Time and Change? 325 17.1 Overview 325 17.2 Why Is Collaborative Time Management Important? 326 17.3 Is a Programme the Same as a Timetable? 328 17.4 How Are Programmes and Timetables Treated in Construction Contracts? 331 17.5 What Timetables Support a Collaborative Team? 334 17.6 What Timetables Integrate Collaborative Design? 336 17.7 What Timetables Support a Framework Alliance or Term Alliance? 338 17.8 How Can an Integrated Timetable Improve Value? 339 17.9 How Can a Collaborative Team Manage Change? 341 17.10 Collaborative Time Management Case Studies 343 18 How Can Collaborative Procurement Improve Risk Management? 347 18.1 Overview 347 18.2 How Are Risks Priced? 348 18.3 How Can Risks Be Managed Jointly? 350 18.4 How Do Construction Contracts Treat Risk Management? 352 18.5 How Can Collaborative Procurement Improve Risk Management? 355 18.6 How Can a Collaborative Team Manage Ground Risk? 357 18.7 How Can Risk Be Managed Through No Blame Clauses? 361 18.8 How Can Risk Be Managed Through New Insurance? 362 18.9 What Is the Role of Project Bank Accounts? 364 18.10 Collaborative Risk Management Case Studies 366 19 How Can Collaborative Procurement Reduce Disputes? 371 19.1 Overview 371 19.2 Are Construction Disputes a Bad Thing? 372 19.3 What Are the Causes of Construction Disputes? 373 19.4 How Can Early Contractor Involvement Reduce Disputes? 374 19.5 How Can a Collaborative Team Avoid Disputes? 376 19.6 How Can Early Warning Avoid Disputes? 378 19.7 How Can a Core Group or Alliance Board Resolve a Dispute? 380 19.8 How Can an Independent Adviser Resolve a Dispute? 382 19.9 Are There Other Collaborative Ways to Resolve a Dispute? 384 19.10 Collaborative Dispute Resolution Case Studies 386 20 How Does Collaborative Procurement Operate in Australia? 391 Professor Paula Gerber and Marko Misko 20.1 What Is the Approach to Alliances in Australia? 391 20.2 What Is the Approach to BIM in Australia? 394 20.3 What Is the Approach to Construction Contracts in Australia? 396 20.4 What Is the Potential for a Framework Alliance in Australia? 398 20.5 What Are the Legal Issues Affecting an Alliance in Australia? 399 21 How Does Collaborative Procurement Operate in Brazil? 403 Dr Alexandre Aroeira Salles, Mariana Miraglia and Matatias Parente 21.1 What Is the Approach to Alliances in Brazil? 403 21.2 What Is the Approach to BIM in Brazil? 405 21.3 What Is the Approach to Construction Contracts in Brazil? 407 21.4 What Is the Potential for a Framework Alliance in Brazil? 410 21.5 What Are the Legal Issues Affecting an Alliance in Brazil? 412 22 How Does Collaborative Procurement Operate in Bulgaria? 415 Adriana Spassova 22.1 What Is the Approach to Alliances in Bulgaria? 415 22.2 What Is the Approach to BIM in Bulgaria? 418 22.3 What Is the Approach to Construction Contracts in Bulgaria? 421 22.4 What Is the Potential for a Framework Alliance in Bulgaria? 425 22.5 What Are the Legal Issues Affecting an Alliance in Bulgaria? 427 23 How Does Collaborative Procurement Operate in Germany? 433 Dr Wolfgang Breyer and Professor Stefan Leupertz 23.1 What Is the Approach to Construction Contracts in Germany? 433 23.2 What Is the Approach to Alliances in Germany? 437 23.3 What Is the Potential for a Framework Alliance in Germany? 439 23.4 What Is the Approach to BIM in Germany? 439 23.5 What Are the Legal Issues Affecting an Alliance in Germany? 440 24 How Does Collaborative Procurement Operate in Italy? 445 Professor Sara Valaguzza 24.1 What Is the Approach to Alliances in Italy? 445 24.2 What Is the Approach to BIM in Italy? 450 24.3 What Is the Approach to Construction Contracts in Italy? 453 24.4 What Is the Potential for a Framework Alliance in Italy? 454 24.5 What Are the Legal Issues Affecting an Alliance in Italy? 456 25 How Does Collaborative Procurement Operate in the USA? 461 Howard W. Ashcraft 25.1 What Is the Approach to Alliances in the USA? 461 25.2 What Is the Approach to BIM in the USA? 464 25.3 What Is the Approach to Construction Contracts in the USA? 466 25.4 What Is the Potential for a Framework Alliance in the USA? 467 25.5 What Are the Legal Issues Affecting an Alliance in the USA? 468 Appendix A Research Timelines 473 A.1 How Has Improved Value Been Delivered Using Early Contractor Involvement, Collaborative Working and BIM? 473 A.2 What Is the Relationship Between Procurement, Contracts and BIM? 473 A.3 What Are the Benefits of a Standard Form Framework Alliance Contract? 474 Appendix B Trial Projects Process 477 Appendix C Case Studies 481 Appendix D BIM Research Projects and Interviewees 487 Appendix E FAC-1 Consultation Group Members 489 Appendix F Amendments to FAC-1 and TAC-1 Consultation Drafts 493 Appendix G Completing FAC-1 501 Bibliography 509 Index 531

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a comprehensive introduction to ion exchange for beginners and in-depth coverage of the latest advances for those already in the field As environmental and energy related regulations have grown, ion exchange has assumed a dominant role in offering solutions to many concurrent problems both in the developed and the developing world. Written by an internationally acknowledged leader in ion exchange research and innovation, Ion Exchange:inEnvironmental Processes is both a comprehensive introduction to the science behind ion exchange and an expert assessment of the latest ion exchange technologies. Its purpose is to provide a valuable reference and learning tool for virtually anyone working in ion exchange or interested in becoming involved in that incredibly fertile field. Written for beginners as well as those already working the in the field, Dr. SenGupta provides stepwise coverage, advancing from ion exchange fundamentals to trace ion exchTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgment xvii 1 Ion Exchange and Ion Exchangers: An Introduction 1 1.1 Historical Perspective 1 1.2 Water and Ion Exchange: An Eternal Kinship 6 1.3 Constituents of an Ion Exchanger 9 1.4 What is Ion Exchange and What it is Not? 10 1.5 Genesis of Ion Exchange Capacity 12 1.5.1 Inorganic 12 1.5.2 Organic/Polymeric Ion Exchanger 13 1.5.3 Strong-Base Type I and Type II Anion Exchanger 20 1.6 Biosorbent, Liquid Ion Exchanger, and Solvent Impregnated Resin 23 1.6.1 Biosorbent 23 1.6.2 Liquid Ion Exchange 25 1.6.3 Solvent-Impregnated Resins 27 1.7 Amphoteric Inorganic Ion Exchangers 28 1.8 Ion Exchanger versus Activated Carbon: Commonalities and Contrasts 33 1.9 Ion Exchanger Morphologies 34 1.10 Widely Used Ion Exchange Processes 34 1.10.1 Softening 35 1.10.2 Deionization or Demineralization 40 Summary 44 References 45 2 Ion Exchange Fundamentals 50 2.1 Physical Realities 50 2.2 Swelling/Shrinking: Ion Exchange Osmosis 51 2.3 Ion Exchange Equilibrium 55 2.3.1 Genesis of Non-Ideality 57 2.4 Other Equilibrium Constants and Equilibrium Parameters 59 2.4.1 Corrected Selectivity Coefficient 59 2.4.2 Selectivity Coefficient, K IXse 60 2.4.3 Separation Factor (α A B) 60 2.4.4 Separation Factor: Homovalent Ion Exchange 61 2.4.5 Separation Factor: Heterovalent Exchange 62 2.4.6 Physical Reality of Selectivity Reversal: Role of Le Châtelier’s Principle 65 2.4.7 Equilibrium Constant: Inconsistencies and Potential Pitfalls 66 2.5 Electrostatic Interaction: Genesis of Counterion Selectivity 69 2.5.1 Monovalent–Monovalent Coulombic Interaction 69 2.6 Ion Exchange Capacity: Isotherms 73 2.6.1 Batch Technique 75 2.6.2 Regenerable Mini-Column Method 79 2.6.3 Step-Feed Frontal Column Run 81 2.7 The Donnan Membrane Effect in Ion Exchanger 84 2.7.1 Coion Invasion or Electrolyte Penetration 84 2.7.2 Role of Cross-linking 90 2.7.3 Genesis of the Donnan Potential 90 2.8 Weak-Acid and Weak-Base Ion Exchange Resins 92 2.8.1 pKa Values of Weak Ion Exchange Resins 94 2.8.2 Weak-Acid and Weak-Base Functional Groups 96 2.9 Regeneration 98 2.9.1 Selectivity Reversal in Heterovalent Ion Exchange 100 2.9.2 pH Swings 101 2.9.3 Ligand Exchange with Metal Oxides 105 2.9.4 Use of Co-Solvent 106 2.9.5 Dual-Temperature Regeneration 108 2.9.6 Carbon Dioxide Regeneration 111 2.9.7 Regeneration with Water 112 2.10 Resin Degradation and Trace Toxin Formation 112 2.10.1 Formation of Trace Nitrosodimethylamine (NDMA) from Resin Degradation 114 2.11 Ion Exclusion and Ion Retardation 115 2.11.1 Ion Exclusion 115 2.11.2 Ion Retardation 116 2.12 Zwitterion and Amino Acid Sorption 118 2.12.1 Interaction with a Cation Exchanger: Role of pH 119 2.13 Solution Osmotic Pressure and Ion Exchange 121 2.14 Ion Exchanger as a Catalyst 124 Summary 126 References 127 3 Trace Ion Exchange 130 3.1 Genesis of Selectivity 130 3.2 Trace Isotherms 136 3.3 Multi-Component Equilibrium 138 3.4 Agreement with Henry’s Law 140 3.5 Multiple Trace Species: Genesis of Elution Chromatography 143 3.5.1 Determining Separation Factor from Elution Chromatogram 143 3.6 Uphill Transport of Trace Ions: Donnan Membrane Effect 149 3.7 Trace Leakage 151 3.8 Trace Fouling by Natural Organic Matter 153 3.9 Ion Exchange Accompanied by Chemical Reaction 156 3.9.1 Precipitation 156 3.9.2 Complexation 157 3.9.3 Redox Reaction 157 3.10 Monovalent–Divalent Selectivity 158 3.10.1 Effect of Charge Separation: Mechanistic Explanation 158 3.10.2 Nitrate/Sulfate and Chloride/Sulfate Selectivity in Anion Exchange 160 3.10.3 Genesis of Nitrate-Selective Resin 162 3.10.4 Chromate Ion Selectivity 164 3.11 Entropy-Driven Selective Ion Exchange: The Case of Hydrophobic Ionizable Organic Compound (HIOC) 166 3.11.1 Focus of the Study and Related Implications 167 3.11.2 Nature of Solute–Sorbent and Solute–Solvent Interactions 169 3.11.3 Experimental Observations: Stoichiometry, Affinity Sequence, and Cosolvent Effect 173 3.11.4 Energetics of the Sorption Process 177 3.11.5 Unifying Hydrophobic Interaction: From Gas–Liquid to Liquid–Solid System 179 3.11.6 Effect of Polymer Matrix and Solute Hydrophobicity 182 3.12 Linear Free Energy Relationship and Relative Selectivity 183 3.13 Simultaneous Removal of Target Metal Cations and Anions 186 3.14 Deviation from Henry’s Law 188 3.14.1 Ions Forming Polynuclear Species 188 3.15 Tunable Sorption Behaviors of Amphoteric Metal Oxides 192 3.16 Ion Sieving 195 3.17 Trace Ion Removal 201 3.17.1 Uranium(VI) 201 3.17.2 Radium 203 3.17.3 Boron 204 3.17.4 Perchlorate (ClO − 4) 205 3.17.5 Emerging Contaminants of Concern and Multi-Contaminant Systems 208 3.17.6 Arsenic and Phosphorus: As(V), P(V), and As(III) 210 3.17.7 Fluoride (F −) 214 Summary 215 References 216 4 Ion Exchange Kinetics: Intraparticle Diffusion 224 4.1 Role of Selectivity 224 4.2 State of Water Molecules inside Ion Exchange Materials 232 4.3 Activation Energy Level in Ion Exchangers: Chemical Kinetics 235 4.3.1 Activation Energy Determination from Experimental Results 236 4.4 Physical Anatomy of an Ion Exchanger: Gel, Macroporous and Fibrous Morphology 242 4.4.1 Gel-Type Ion Exchanger Beads 242 4.4.2 Macroporous Ion Exchanger Beads 243 4.4.3 Ion Exchange Fibers 246 4.5 Column Interruption Test: Determinant of Diffusion Mechanism 248 4.6 Observations Related to Ion Exchange Kinetics 250 4.6.1 Effect of Concentration on Half-time (t 1∕2) 251 4.6.2 Major Differences in Ion Exchange Rate 252 4.6.3 Chemically Similar Counterions with Significant Differences in Intraparticle Diffusivity 252 4.6.4 Effect of Competing Ion Concentrations: Gel versus Macroporous 254 4.6.5 Intraparticle Diffusion during Regeneration 255 4.6.6 Shell Progressive Kinetics versus Slow Diffusing Species 255 4.7 Interdiffusion Coefficients for Intraparticle Diffusion 257 4.8 Trace Ion Exchange Kinetics 264 4.8.1 Chlorophenols as the Target Trace Ions 264 4.8.2 Intraparticle Diffusion inside a Macroporous Ion Exchanger 266 4.8.3 Effect of Sorption Affinity on Intraparticle Diffusion 268 4.8.4 Solute Concentration Effect 271 4.9 Rectangular Isotherms and Shell Progressive Kinetics 272 4.9.1 Anomalies in Arrival Sequence of Solutes 274 4.9.2 Quantitative Interpretation 275 4.10 Responses to Observations in Section 4.6 276 4.10.1 Effect of Concentration on Half-time (t 1∕2) 276 4.10.2 Slow Kinetics of Weak-Acid Resin 277 4.10.3 Chemically Similar Counterions: Drastic Difference in Intraparticle Diffusivity 277 4.10.4 Gel versus Macroporous 278 4.10.5 Intraparticle Diffusion during Regeneration 278 4.10.6 Shrinking Core or Shell Progressive Kinetics 279 4.11 Rate-Limiting Step: Dimensionless Numbers 280 4.11.1 Implications of Biot Number: Trace Ion Exchange 281 4.12 Intraparticle Diffusion: From Theory to Practice 284 4.12.1 Reducing Diffusion Path Length: Short-Bed Process and Shell–Core Resins 285 4.12.2 Development of Bifunctional Diphonix ® Resin 288 4.12.3 Ion Exchanger as a Host for Enhanced Kinetics 289 Summary 292 References 293 5 Solid- and Gas-Phase Ion Exchange 297 5.1 Solid-Phase Ion Exchange 297 5.1.1 Poorly Soluble Solids 297 5.1.2 Desalting by Ion Exchange Induced Precipitation 303 5.1.3 Separation of Competing Solid Phases 305 5.1.4 Recovery from Ion Exchange Sites of Soil 306 5.1.5 Composite or Cloth-like Ion Exchanger (CIX) 307 5.1.6 Heavy Metals (Me 2+) with Solids Possessing High Buffer Capacity 309 5.1.7 Ligand-Induced Metal Recovery with a Chelating Exchanger 315 5.2 Coagulant Recovery from Water Treatment Sludge 317 5.2.1 Development of Donnan IX Membrane Process 318 5.2.2 Alum Recovery: Governing Donnan Equilibrium 318 5.2.3 Process Validation 322 5.3 Gas Phase Ion Exchange 323 5.3.1 Sorption of Acidic and Basic Gases 324 5.3.2 CO2and SO2 Capture with Weak-Base Anion (WBA) Exchanger 325 5.3.3 Effect of Ion Exchanger Morphology 327 5.3.4 Redox Active Gases: Hydrogen Sulfide and Oxygen 330 5.4 CO2 Gas as a Regenerant for IX Softening Processes: A Case Study 334 Summary 339 References 340 6 Hybrid Ion Exchange Nanotechnology (HIX-Nanotech) 345 6.1 Magnetically Active Polymer Particles (MAPPs) 347 6.1.1 Characterization of MAPPs 351 6.1.2 Factors Affecting Acquired Magnetic Activity 353 6.1.3 Retention of Magnetic Activity and Sorption Behavior 355 6.2 Hybrid Nanosorbents for Selective Sorption of Ligands (e.g., HIX-NanoFe) 357 6.2.1 Synthesis of Hybrid Ion Exchange Nanomaterials 359 6.2.2 Characterization of Hybrid Nanosorbents 361 6.2.3 Parent Anion Exchanger versus Hybrid Anion Exchanger (HAIX-NanoFe(III)): A Comparison 363 6.2.4 Support of Hybrid Ion Exchangers: Cation versus Anion 365 6.2.5 Efficiency of Regeneration and Field Application 369 6.2.6 Hybrid Ion Exchange Fibers: Simultaneous Perchlorate and Arsenic Removal 370 6.3 HAIX-NanoZr(IV): Simultaneous Defluoridation and Desalination 376 6.3.1 Field-Scale Validation 377 6.4 Promise of HIX-Nanotechnology 381 Summary 383 References 384 7 Heavy Metal Chelation and Polymeric Ligand Exchange 391 7.1 Heavy Metals and Chelating Ion Exchangers 391 7.1.1 Heavy Metals: What are They? 391 7.1.2 Properties of Heavy Metals and Separation Strategies 393 7.1.3 Emergence of Chelating Exchangers 395 7.1.4 Lewis Acid–Base Interactions in Chelating Ion Exchangers 398 7.1.5 Regeneration, Kinetics and Metals Affinity 402 7.2 Polymeric Ligand Exchange 405 7.2.1 Conceptualization and Characterization of the Polymeric Ligand Exchanger (ple) 406 7.2.2 Sorption of Polymeric Ligand Exchangers 407 7.2.3 Validation of Ligand Exchange Mechanism 410 Summary 413 References 413 8 Synergy and Sustainability 417 8.1 Waste Acid Neutralization: An Introduction 417 8.1.1 Underlying Scientific Concept 418 8.1.2 Mechanical Work through a Cyclic Engine 421 8.2 Improving Stability of Anaerobic Biological Reactors 423 8.2.1 Potential Use of Selective Ion Exchanger 424 8.2.2 Ion Exchange Fibers: Characterization and Performance 424 8.3 Sustainable Aluminum-Cycle Softening for Hardness Removal 429 8.3.1 Current Status and Challenges 429 8.3.2 Sodium-Free Approaches and Alternatives to Na-Cycle Softening 429 8.3.3 Underlying Scientific Approach of Al-cycle Cation Exchange 430 8.3.4 Comparison in Performance: Na-Cycle versus Al-Cycle 432 8.3.5 Regeneration Efficiency and Calcium Removal Capacity 436 8.3.6 Sustainability Issues and New Opportunities 438 8.4 Closure 438 Summary 439 References 440 A Commercial Ion Exchangers 445 B Different Units of Capacity, Concentration, Mass, and Volume 457 B.1 Capacity 457 B.2 Concentration (Expressed as CaCO 3) 457 B.3 Mass 458 B.4 Volume 458 C Table of Solubility Product constants at 25 ∘ c 459 D Acid and Base dissociation constants at 25 ∘ c 461 Periodic Table and Atomic Weights of Elements 463 Index 467

Read more less

Book SynopsisA critical review of key developments and latest advances in Structural Health Monitoring technologies applied to civil engineering structures, covering all aspects required for practical application Structural Health Monitoring (SHM) provides the facilities for in-service monitoring of structural performance and damage assessment, and is a key element of condition based maintenance and damage prognosis. This comprehensive book brings readers up to date on the most important changes and advancements in the structural health monitoring technologies applied to civil engineering structures. It covers all aspects required for such monitoring in the field, including sensors and networks, data acquisition and processing, damage detection techniques and damage prognostics techniques. The book also includes a number of case studies showing how the techniques can be applied in the development of sustainable and resilient civil infrastructure systems. Structural Health Monitoring of Large CiTable of ContentsPreface xiii Biography xv 1 Introduction to Structural Health Monitoring 1 1.1 Advances in Structural Health Monitoring Technology 1 1.1.1 Structural Health in Civil Engineering 1 1.1.2 Aims of Structural Health Monitoring 2 1.1.3 Development of SHM Methods 3 1.2 Structural Health Monitoring System and Strategy 4 1.2.1 SHM System and its Components 4 1.2.2 SHM Strategy and Method 6 1.3 Potential Benefits of SHM in Civil Engineering 7 1.3.1 Character of SHM in Civil Engineering 7 1.3.2 Potential Benefits of SHM 9 1.4 Challenges and Further Work of SHM 10 1.4.1 Challenges of SHM in Civil Engineering 10 1.4.2 Further Work on SHM for Practical Applications 11 1.5 Concluding Remarks 13 References 13 2 Sensors and Sensing Technology for Structural Monitoring 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Sensor Types 16 2.3 Sensor Measurements in Structural Monitoring 21 2.3.1 Structural Responses 21 2.3.2 Environmental Quantities 24 2.3.3 Operational Quantities 25 2.3.4 Typical Quantities for Bridge Monitoring 25 2.3.5 Example of an SHM System–a Suspension Bridge (I) 27 2.4 Fibre Optic Sensors 33 2.4.1 Classification of Fibre Optic Sensors 33 2.4.2 Typical Fibre Optic Sensors in SHM 33 2.4.3 Fibre Optic Sensors for Structural Monitoring 36 2.5 Wireless Sensors 37 2.5.1 Components of Wireless Sensors 38 2.5.2 Field Deployment in Civil Infrastructure 39 2.6 Optimum Sensor Selection and Placement 39 2.6.1 Factors for Sensor Selection 40 2.6.2 Optimal Sensor Placement 41 2.7 Case Study 42 2.7.1 Sensors and Sensing System for SHM 43 2.7.2 Installation of FBG Sensors 43 2.8 Concluding Remarks 47 References 48 3 Data Acquisition, Transmission and Management 51 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Data Acquisition Systems 52 3.2.1 Data Acquisition for Structural Monitoring 52 3.2.2 Data Acquisition in Bridge Monitoring 53 3.3 Data Transmission Systems 54 3.3.1 Wired Transmission Systems 54 3.3.2 Wireless Transmission Systems 55 3.3.3 Data Transmission in Bridge Monitoring 56 3.4 Data Processing Systems 57 3.4.1 Data Pre‐Processing for SHM 57 3.4.2 Data Analysis and Compression 58 3.4.3 Data Processing in Bridge Monitoring 58 3.5 Data Management Systems 59 3.5.1 Data Storage and File Management 59 3.5.2 Data Management in Bridge Monitoring 60 3.6 Case Study 61 3.7 Concluding Remarks 64 References 66 4 Structural Damage Identification Techniques 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Damage in Structures 70 4.3 Non‐Destructive Testing Techniques 71 4.3.1 Acoustic Emission 72 4.3.2 Ultrasound 73 4.3.3 Guided (Lamb) Waves 74 4.3.4 Thermography 75 4.3.5 Electromagnetic Methods 76 4.3.6 Capacitive Methods 76 4.3.7 Laser Doppler Vibrometer 77 4.3.8 Global Positioning System 78 4.3.9 Visual Inspection 79 4.4 Comparison of NDT and SHM 79 4.5 Signal Processing for Damage Detection 81 4.5.1 Fourier Based Transforms 81 4.5.2 Wavelet Transforms 81 4.5.3 Hilbert–Huang Transform 83 4.5.4 Comparison of Various Transforms 84 4.6 Data‐Based Versus Model‐Based Techniques 84 4.7 Development of Vibration‐Based Methods 87 4.8 Concluding Remarks 88 References 89 5 Modal Analysis of Civil Engineering Structures 91 5.1 Introduction 91 5.2 Basic Equations for Structural Dynamics 92 5.2.1 Modal Solution 93 5.2.2 Frequency Response Function 94 5.3 Input‐Output Modal Identification 94 5.3.1 Equipment and Test Procedure 95 5.3.2 Modal Identification Techniques 96 5.3.2.1 Frequency‐Domain Techniques 96 5.3.2.2 Time‐Domain Techniques 96 5.3.3 Example for Modal Identification – a Steel Space Frame (I) 96 5.4 Output‐Only Modal Identification 98 5.4.1 Equipment and Test Procedure 98 5.4.2 Operational Modal Identification Techniques 99 5.4.2.1 Frequency‐Domain Methods 99 5.4.2.2 Time‐Domain Methods 100 5.4.3 Damping Estimation 101 5.4.4 Effect of Temperature on Modal Data 101 5.4.5 Comparison of Methods 102 5.4.6 Example for Modal Identification – a Cable‐Stayed Bridge 103 5.5 Correlation Between Test and Calculated Results 104 5.5.1 Modal Assurance Criterion 105 5.5.2 Orthogonality Checks 107 5.5.3 Modal Scale Factor 108 5.5.4 Coordinate Modal Assurance Criterion 108 5.6 Mode Shape Expansion and Model Reduction 109 5.6.1 General Expansion and Reduction Methods 109 5.6.2 Perturbed Force Approach 111 5.6.3 Comparison of Methods 112 5.7 Case Study 114 5.7.1 Operational Modal Analysis 115 5.7.2 Mode Shape Expansion 118 5.8 Concluding Remarks 118 References 120 6 Finite Element Model Updating 123 6.1 Introduction 123 6.2 Finite Element Modelling 125 6.2.1 Stiffness and Mass Matrices 125 6.2.2 Finite Element Modelling Error 125 6.3 Structural Parameters for Model Updating 126 6.3.1 Updating Parameters for Framed Structures 127 6.3.1.1 Updating Stiffness and Mass at Element Level 127 6.3.1.2 Updating Stiffness at Integration Point Level 127 6.3.1.3 Updating Material and Sectional Properties 128 6.3.1.4 Updating Joints and Boundary Conditions 128 6.3.2 Updating Parameters for Continuum Structures 128 6.4 Sensitivity Based Methods 129 6.4.1 Sensitivity Matrix 129 6.4.1.1 Sensitivity of Eigenvalue 130 6.4.1.2 Sensitivity of Eigenvector 130 6.4.1.3 Sensitivity of Input Force 131 6.4.2 Direct Parameter Estimation 131 6.4.3 Residual Minimisation Methods 132 6.4.4 Example for Model Updating – a Cantilever Beam 133 6.5 Dynamic Perturbation Method 135 6.5.1 Governing Equations 135 6.5.2 Regularised Solution Procedure 137 6.6 Use of Dynamic Perturbation Method for Model Updating 139 6.6.1 Use of Frequencies Only 139 6.6.2 Use of Incomplete Modes 140 6.6.2.1 Iterative Solution Method 142 6.6.2.2 Simplified Direct Solution Method 142 6.6.3 Example for Model Updating – a Plane Frame 143 6.6.4 Example for Model Updating – a Steel Space Frame (II) 145 6.7 Case Study 149 6.8 Concluding Remarks 151 References 153 7 Vibration‐Based Damage Identification Methods 155 7.1 Introduction 155 7.2 Structural Modelling for Damage Identification 156 7.3 Methods Using Change of Modal Parameters 159 7.3.1 Natural Frequencies 159 7.3.2 Direct Mode Shape Comparison 160 7.3.3 Mode Shape Curvature 161 7.3.4 Damping 162 7.3.5 Frequency Response Function Curvature 162 7.3.6 Modal Strain Energy 163 7.3.7 Example for Damage Localisation – a Suspension Bridge (II) 165 7.4 Methods Using Change of Structural Parameters 169 7.4.1 Flexibility Matrix 169 7.4.2 Strain Energy Based Damage Index 172 7.4.3 Modal Strain‐Based Damage Index 174 7.4.4 Example for Damage Localisation – a Suspension Bridge (III) 175 7.5 Pattern Recognition Methods 177 7.5.1 Stochastic Pattern Recognition 178 7.5.2 Novelty Detection 179 7.5.3 Example for Damage Detection – a Suspension Bridge (IV) 180 7.6 Neural Network Techniques 182 7.6.1 Back‐Propagation Neural Network 182 7.6.2 Input Parameters and Pre‐Processing 184 7.6.3 Probabilistic Neural Network 185 7.6.4 Example for Damage Localisation – a Suspension Bridge (V) 186 7.7 Concluding Remarks 189 References 190 8 Model‐Based Damage Assessment Methods 195 8.1 Introduction 195 8.2 Characterisation of Damage in Structures 196 8.2.1 Damage in Framed Structures 197 8.2.1.1 Damage Characterisation at Element Level 197 8.2.1.2 Damage Characterisation at Critical Point Level 197 8.2.2 Damage in Continuum Structures 199 8.2.2.1 Damage Characterisation at Element Level 199 8.2.2.2 Damage Characterisation at Integration Point Level 199 8.3 Matrix Update Methods 200 8.3.1 Residual Force Vector Method 200 8.3.2 Minimum Rank Update Method 201 8.3.3 Optimal Matrix Updating Method 202 8.3.4 Example for Damage Assessment – a Plane Truss 203 8.4 Sensitivity Based Methods 204 8.4.1 Eigen‐Parameter Sensitivity Method 204 8.4.2 FRF Sensitivity Method 205 8.4.3 Example for Damage Assessment – a Grid Structure 207 8.5 Damage Assessment Using Dynamic Perturbation Method 207 8.5.1 Use of Frequencies Only 208 8.5.2 Use of Incomplete Modes 209 8.5.3 Examples for Damage Assessment – Simple Framed Structures 211 8.5.3.1 Damage Assessment of a Grid Structure Using Frequencies Only 211 8.5.3.2 Damage Assessment of a Plane Truss Using Incomplete Modes 212 8.6 Numerical Examples 213 8.6.1 Framed Building Structure 213 8.6.2 Gravity Dam Structure 218 8.7 Potential Problems in Vibration‐Based Damage Identification 220 8.7.1 Finite Element Model and Experimental Data 220 8.7.2 Effect of Modelling and Measurement Errors 221 8.7.3 Effect of Environmental Factors 222 8.7.4 Frequency Range and Damage Detectability 222 8.7.5 Damage Diagnosis and Prognosis 223 8.8 Concluding Remarks 224 References 225 9 Monitoring Based Reliability Analysis and Damage Prognosis 227 9.1 Introduction 227 9.2 Usage Monitoring 229 9.2.1 Lifecycle Monitoring 229 9.2.2 Load Monitoring and Evaluation 230 9.2.3 Monitoring of Environmental Factors 231 9.2.4 Example for Usage Monitoring – a Suspension Bridge (VI) 233 9.3 Probabilistic Deterioration Modelling 235 9.3.1 Sources of Deterioration 235 9.3.2 Modelling and Parameter Uncertainty 236 9.3.3 Probabilistic Deterioration Models 237 9.3.3.1 Failure Rate Function 237 9.3.3.2 Markov Process 237 9.3.3.3 Gamma Process 238 9.3.4 Example for Fatigue Cracking Modelling – a Steel Bridge (I) 239 9.4 Lifetime Distribution Analysis 240 9.4.1 Stochastic Gamma Process 240 9.4.2 Weibull Life Distribution Model 241 9.4.3 Data Informed Updating 242 9.4.4 Example for Lifetime Distribution Analysis – a Concrete Bridge 243 9.5 Structural Reliability Analysis 244 9.5.1 Limit States and Reliability Analysis 245 9.5.2 Time‐Variant Reliability 247 9.5.3 Remaining Useful Life 248 9.5.4 Example for Fatigue Reliability Analysis – a Suspension Bridge (VII) 248 9.6 Optimum Maintenance Strategy 250 9.6.1 Lifetime Costs 251 9.6.2 Decision Based on Lifetime Deterioration 253 9.6.2.1 Failure Rate Function Model 253 9.6.2.2 Markov Process Model 253 9.6.2.3 Gamma Process Model 254 9.6.2.4 Survival Function 254 9.6.3 Decision Based on Structural Reliability 255 9.6.4 Example for Optimal Maintenance – a Steel Bridge (II) 256 9.7 Case Study 256 9.7.1 Traffic Loads Monitoring 257 9.7.2 Cable Force Monitoring 260 9.7.3 Stiffening Deck System Stress Monitoring 261 9.8 Concluding Remarks 263 References 264 10 Applications of SHM Strategies to Large Civil Structures 267 10.1 Introduction 267 10.2 SHM System and Damage Identification of a Cable‐Stayed Bridge 268 10.2.1 Sensors and Sensing Network 268 10.2.2 Data Management System 270 10.2.3 Operational Modal Analysis and Mode Identifiability 270 10.2.4 Finite Element Modelling 271 10.2.5 Damage Localisation Using Mode Shape Curvature Index 273 10.2.6 Damage Detection Using Neural Network 275 10.3 In‐Construction Monitoring of a High‐Rise Building 277 10.3.1 Long‐Term SHM System 278 10.3.2 Monitoring During Shoring Dismantlement 279 10.3.3 Wireless Sensing Network for Vibration Monitoring 280 10.3.4 Ambient Vibration Tests and Results 282 10.4 Monitoring of Tunnel Construction Using FBG Sensors 284 10.4.1 Temperature Monitoring of Tunnel Cross Passage Construction 284 10.4.2 Settlement Monitoring of Undercrossing Tunnel Construction 287 10.5 Safety Monitoring of Rail Using Acoustic Emission 288 10.5.1 Rail Track Damage Detection System 289 10.5.2 On‐Site Monitoring Data 290 10.6 Structural Integrity Monitoring of Water Mains 294 10.6.1 FBG Sensory System 294 10.6.2 Implementation of Monitoring System 296 10.6.3 Measurements Under Different Operational Conditions 296 10.7 Concluding Remarks 301 References 302 Index 303

Read more less

Book SynopsisActivity Based Cotsting for Construction Companies provides guidelines on how overhead costs can be managed for using Activity Based Costing (ABC), providing gains in contractor competiveness.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 What comprises costs in a construction company? 2 1.1.1 Construction costs (project costs) 3 1.1.2 Overhead costs in a construction company 3 1.1.3 The cost classification in use and the duality of overhead costs 5 1.2 Overhead costs in new business environments 6 1.3 Role of overhead cost management 10 1.3.1 Overhead costing system should provide accurate costing on cost objects 10 1.3.2 Overhead costing system should contribute to reducing total costs without sacrificing value 11 1.4 Structure of this book 11 References 12 2 What Is Activity-Based Costing? 15 2.1 Traditional accounting method: resource-based costing with volume-based allocation 16 2.1.1 Resource-based costing 16 2.1.2 Overhead costs allocation 17 2.2 What are the problems with the current method? 18 2.2.1 Is the current method contributing to reducing total costs? 19 2.2.2 Does the current method provide accurate pricing? 19 2.3 What is activity-based costing? 20 2.3.1 Definition 20 2.3.2 Characteristics of ABC 21 2.3.3 Objectives of ABC system 25 2.4 Implementing activity-based costing 26 2.4.1 Develop an activity-based costing charter 26 2.4.2 Define cost objects 27 2.4.3 Identify activities 28 2.4.4 Assign resource costs to activities 29 2.4.5 Assign activity costs to cost objects 32 2.5 Chapter summary 35 References 36 3 Managing Overhead Costs in Construction Projects 39 3.1 Project overhead costs as profit points 40 3.2 Implementing ABC to manage project overhead costs 42 3.3 Case study: xx Commercial Complex 42 3.3.1 Developing an activity-based costing charter 43 3.3.2 Workshop 45 3.3.3 Defining cost objects 46 3.3.4 Identifying activities 47 3.3.5 Assigning resource costs to activities 48 3.3.6 Assigning activity costs to cost objects 53 3.4 Using ABC data for managerial purposes 58 3.4.1 Evaluating management areas with activity analysis 64 3.4.2 Evaluating subcontractors 68 3.5 Chapter summary 70 References 70 4 Managing Your General Overhead Costs 73 4.1 General overhead costs 74 4.2 Managing general overhead costs 75 4.2.1 Accurate general overhead allocation 75 4.2.2 Providing a process view for process improvements 79 4.3 Does current practice for managing general overhead costs work? 80 4.3.1 Resource-based costing 80 4.3.2 Volume-based assignment 80 4.4 How can ABC be implemented in managing general overhead costs? 82 4.4.1 Case study: xx Construction (general contractor) 82 4.5 How can ABC data be used in managing general overhead costs? 92 4.5.1 Cost driver analysis 93 4.5.2 Profitability analysis for each project 93 4.5.3 Profitability analysis for each market sector 97 4.5.4 Profitability analysis for each customer 104 4.6 Chapter summary 105 References 105 5 Managing Overhead Costs in a Fabrication Shop 107 5.1 Rebar supply system 108 5.2 Case study: PQR Construction Inc. 111 5.2.1 The rebar fabrication shop’s cost structure 111 5.2.2 Allocation of rebar fabrication shop’s costs to projects 113 5.3 Analysis using traditional rebar costs allocation 113 5.3.1 Identify cost objects and direct costs 114 5.3.2 Identify the overhead costs to be allocated and calculate the allocation base 114 5.3.3 Calculate the overhead costs allocated to each project 116 5.4 Analysis using activity-based costing 117 5.4.1 Determining system objectives and defining cost objects 118 5.4.2 Identifying resources and activities 119 5.4.3 Assigning resource costs to activities 120 5.4.4 Determining a cost driver for each activity 122 5.4.5 Calculating a unit rate of activity costs (cost driver rate) and allocating activity costs to cost objects 124 5.5 How can ABC data be used for managerial purposes? 125 5.5.1 Accurate cost information through overhead cost allocation 125 5.5.2 Cost information on processes 127 5.5.3 Cost driver analysis 129 5.5.4 Ways to reduce overhead costs 130 5.6 Chapter summary 130 References 132 6 Activity-Based Costing in Your Organization 133 6.1 The benefits of the ABC journey 134 6.2 Implementation roadmap for ABC 138 6.2.1 Concept-level roadmap 138 6.2.2 Implementation roadmap for a focused application 139 6.2.3 Phase 1. Planning stage: preparing for your ABC journey 140 6.2.4 Phase 2. Execution stage: developing your ABC system 144 6.2.5 Phase 3. Internalization stage: final tune-up 154 6.3 Common mistakes in the journey 156 6.3.1 Beginning your ABC journey without strong commitment from top management 156 6.3.2 Beginning your journey with poorly defined objectives and scope 157 6.3.3 Developing a task force that does not have the necessary authority 157 6.3.4 Developing more cost objects than needed 158 6.3.5 Making activities ambiguous 158 6.3.6 The effect of distorted time–effort % assigned to activities 159 6.3.7 Choosing cost drivers that are hard to measure 159 Index 161

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe practical, clear, and concise guide for conducting experimental modal tests Modal Testing: A Practitioner''s Guide outlines the basic information necessary to conduct an experimental modal test. The text draws on the author's extensive experience to cover the practical side of the concerns that may arise when performing an experimental modal test. Taking a hands-on approach, the book explores the issues related to conducting a test from start to finish. It covers the cornerstones of the basic information needed and summarizes all the pertinent theory related to experimental modal testing. Designed to be accessible, Modal Testing presents the most common excitation techniques used for modal testing today and is filled with illustrative examples related to impact testing which is the most widely used excitation technique for traditional experimental modal tests. This practical text is not about developing the details of the theory but rathTable of ContentsPreface xv About the CompanionWebsite xix Part I Overview of Experimental Modal Analysis using the Frequency Response Method 1 1 Introduction to ExperimentalModal Analysis: A Simple Non-mathematical Presentation 3 1.1 Could you Explain Modal Analysis to Me? 6 1.2 Just what are these Measurements called FRFs? 10 1.2.1 Why is Only One Row or Column of the FRF Matrix Needed? 13 1.3 What’s the Difference between a Shaker Test and an Impact Test? 17 1.3.1 What Measurements do we Actually make to Compute the FRF? 18 1.4 What’s the Most ImportantThing toThink about when Impact Testing? 21 1.5 What’s the Most ImportantThing toThink about when Shaker Testing? 22 1.6 Tell me More AboutWindows; They Seem Pretty Important! 24 1.7 So how do we get Mode Shapes from the Plate FRFs? 25 1.8 Modal Data and Operating Data 29 1.8.1 What is Operating Data? 29 1.8.2 So what Good is Modal Data? 33 1.8.3 So Should I Collect Modal Data or Operating Data? 34 1.9 Closing Remarks 36 2 General Theory of Experimental Modal Analysis 37 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Basic Modal AnalysisTheory – SDOF 38 2.2.1 Single Degree of Freedom System Equation 38 2.2.2 Single Degree of Freedom System Response due to Harmonic Excitation 40 2.2.3 Damping Estimation for Single Degree of Freedom System 42 2.2.4 Response Assessment with Varying Damping 43 2.2.5 Laplace Domain Approach for Single Degree of Freedom System 46 2.2.6 System Transfer Function 47 2.2.7 Different Forms of the Transfer Function 48 2.2.8 Residue of the SDOF System 49 2.2.9 Frequency Response Function for a Single Degree of Freedom System 49 2.2.10 Transfer Function/Frequency Response Function/S-plane for a Single Degree of Freedom System 51 2.2.11 Frequency Response Function Regions for a Single Degree of Freedom System 51 2.2.12 Different Forms of the Frequency Response Function 53 2.2.13 Complex Frequency Response Function 53 2.3 Basic Modal AnalysisTheory – MDOF 56 2.3.1 Multiple Degree of Freedom System Equations 57 2.3.2 Laplace Domain for Multiple Degree of Freedom System 66 2.3.3 The Frequency Response Function 68 2.3.4 Mode Shapes from Frequency Response Equations 68 2.3.5 Point-to-Point Frequency Response Function 71 2.3.6 Response of Multiple Degree of Freedom System to Harmonic Excitations 72 2.3.7 Example: Cantilever Beam Model with Three Measured DOFs 75 2.3.8 Summary of Time, Frequency, and Modal Domains 83 2.3.9 Response due to Forced Excitation using Mode Superposition 87 2.4 Summary 89 3 General Signal Processing andMeasurements Related to Experimental Modal Analysis 93 3.1 Introduction 93 3.2 Time and Frequency Domain 93 3.3 Some General Information Regarding Data Acquisition 96 3.4 Digitization of Time Signals 97 3.5 Quantization 97 3.5.1 ADC Underload 98 3.5.2 ADC Overload 100 3.6 AC Coupling 100 3.7 SamplingTheory 101 3.8 Aliasing 103 3.9 What is the Fourier Transform? 105 3.9.1 Fourier Transform and Discrete Fourier Transform 107 3.9.2 FFT: Periodic Signal 108 3.9.3 FFT: Non-periodic Signal 108 3.10 Leakage and Minimization of Leakage 109 3.10.1 Minimization of Leakage 111 3.11 Windows and Leakage 111 3.11.1 RectangularWindow 112 3.11.2 HanningWindow 116 3.11.3 Flat TopWindow 116 3.11.4 Comparison ofWindows withWorst Leakage Distortion Possible 116 3.11.5 Comparison of Rectangular, Hanning and Flat TopWindow 119 3.11.6 ForceWindow 119 3.11.7 ExponentialWindow 119 3.11.8 Convolution of theWindow in the Frequency Domain 119 3.12 Frequency Response Function Formulation 119 3.13 TypicalMeasurements 123 3.13.1 Time Signal and Auto-power Functions 123 3.13.2 TypicalMeasurement: Cross Power Function 124 3.13.3 TypicalMeasurement: Frequency Response Function 124 3.13.4 TypicalMeasurement: Coherence Function 124 3.14 Time and Frequency Relationship Definition 126 3.15 Input–Output Model with Noise 127 3.15.1 H1 Formulation: Output Noise Only 127 3.15.2 H2 Formulation: Output Noise Only 128 3.15.3 H1 Formulation: Input Noise Only 128 3.15.4 H2 Formulation: Input Noise Only 128 3.16 Summary 129 4 Excitation Techniques 131 4.1 Introduction 131 4.2 Impact Excitation Technique 132 4.2.1 Impact Hammer 132 4.2.2 Hammer Impact Tip Selection 136 4.2.3 Useful Frequency Range for Impact Excitation 137 4.2.4 ForceWindow for Impact Excitation 137 4.2.5 Pre-trigger Delay 137 4.2.6 Double Impact 140 4.2.7 Response due to Impact 140 4.2.8 Roving Hammer vs Stationary Hammer and Reciprocity 143 4.2.9 Impact Testing: an Example Set of Measurements 147 4.3 Shaker Excitation 159 4.3.1 Modal Shaker Setup 161 4.3.2 Historical Development of Shaker Excitation Techniques 162 4.3.3 Swept Sine Excitation 163 4.3.4 Pure Random Excitation 163 4.3.5 Pure Random Excitation withWindows Applied 165 4.3.6 Pure Random Excitation with Overlap Processing 165 4.3.7 Pseudo-random Excitation 167 4.3.8 Periodic Random Excitation 167 4.3.9 Burst Random Excitation 168 4.3.10 Sine Chirp Excitation 170 4.3.11 Digital Stepped Sine Excitation 170 4.4 Comparison of Different Excitations for aWeldment Structure 172 4.4.1 Random Excitation with NoWindow 172 4.4.2 Random Excitation with HanningWindow 173 4.4.3 Burst Random Excitation with NoWindow 173 4.4.4 Sine Chirp Excitation with NoWindow 174 4.4.5 Comparison of Random, Burst Random and Sine Chirp 175 4.4.6 Comparison of Random and Burst Random at Resonant Peaks 175 4.4.7 Linearity Check Using Sine Chirp 175 4.5 Multiple-input,Multiple-outputMeasurement 175 4.5.1 Multiple Input vs Single Input Testing 177 4.5.2 Multiple Input vs Single Input for aWeldment Structure 181 4.5.3 Multiple Input vs Single Input Testing 181 4.5.4 Comparison of Multiple Input and Single Input forWeldment Structure 182 4.5.5 MIMO Measurements on a Multi-component Structure 182 4.6 Summary 187 5 Modal Parameter Estimation Techniques 189 5.1 Introduction 189 5.2 ExperimentalModal Analysis 190 5.2.1 Least Squares Approximation of Data 190 5.2.2 Classification of Modal Parameter Estimation Techniques 193 5.3 Extraction of Modal Parameters 198 5.3.1 Peak Picking Technique 198 5.3.2 Circle Fitting – Kennedy and Pancu 199 5.3.3 SDOF Polynomial 200 5.3.4 Residual Effects of Out of Band Modes 200 5.3.5 MDOF Polynomial 201 5.3.6 Least Squares Complex Exponential 201 5.3.7 Advanced Forms of Time and Frequency Domain Estimators 203 5.3.8 General Time Domain Techniques 203 5.3.9 General Frequency Domain Techniques 203 5.3.10 General Consideration for Time vs Frequency Representation 204 5.3.11 Additional Remarks on Modal Parameter Estimation 204 5.3.12 Two Step Process for Modal Parameter Estimation 205 5.4 Mode Identification Tools 206 5.4.1 Summation Function 206 5.4.2 Mode Indicator Function 206 5.4.3 Complex Mode Indicator Function 207 5.4.4 Stability Diagram 208 5.4.5 PolyMAX 210 5.5 Modal Model Validation Tools 212 5.5.1 Synthesis of Frequency Response Functions using Extracted Parameters 212 5.5.2 Modal Assurance Criterion 213 5.5.3 Mode Participation Factors 215 5.5.4 Mode Overcomplexity 215 5.5.5 Mean Phase Co-linearity and Mean Phase Deviation 216 5.6 Operating Modal Analysis 216 5.7 Summary 219 Part II Practical Considerations for ExperimentalModal Testing 221 6 Test Setup Considerations 223 6.1 Test Plan? 224 6.2 How Many Modes Required? 225 6.3 Frequency Range of Interest? 228 6.4 Transducer Possibilities? 232 6.5 Test Configurations? 232 6.6 How Many Measurement Points Needed? 235 6.7 Excitation Techniques 238 6.8 Miscellaneous Items to Consider 238 6.9 Summary 245 7 Impact Testing Considerations 247 7.1 Hammer Impact Location 247 7.2 Hammer Tip and Frequency Range 248 7.3 Hammers for Different Size Structures 249 7.4 How Does Impact Skew and Deviation of Input Point Affect theMeasurement? 256 7.4.1 Skewed Impact Force 256 7.4.2 Inconsistent Impact Force Location 256 7.5 Impact Hammer Frequency Bandwidth 256 7.6 Accelerometer ICP Considerations for Low Frequency Measurements 264 7.7 Considerations for Reciprocity Measurements 264 7.8 Roving Hammer vs Roving Accelerometer 267 7.9 Picking a Good Reference Location 268 7.10 Multiple Impact Difficulties and Considerations 268 7.10.1 Academic Structure 269 7.10.2 LargeWind Turbine Blade 271 7.11 What is “Filter Ring” during an Impact Measurement? 274 7.12 Test Bandwidth MuchWider than Desired Frequency Range 275 7.13 Why Does the Structure Response Need to Come to Zero at the End of the Sample Time? 279 7.14 Measurements with no Overload but Transducers are Saturated 282 7.14.1 Case 1: Sensitive Accelerometer with ExponentialWindow 282 7.14.2 Case 2: Sensitive Accelerometer with NoWindow 283 7.14.3 Case 3: Less Sensitive Accelerometer with NoWindow 283 7.15 How much Roll Off in the Input Hammer Force Spectrum is Acceptable? 286 7.16 Can the Hammer be Switched in the Middle of a Test to Avoid Double Impacts? 289 7.17 Closing Remarks 292 8 Shaker Testing Considerations 293 8.1 General Hardware Related Issues 293 8.1.1 General Information about Shakers and Amplifiers 293 8.1.2 What is the Difference between the Constant Current and Constant Voltage Settings on the Shaker Amplifier? 294 8.1.3 Some Shakers have a Trunnion: Is it Really Needed andWhy Do You Have It? 294 8.1.4 Where is the Best Location to Place a Shaker for a Modal Test? 295 8.1.5 How Should the Shaker be Constrained when Testing? 296 8.1.6 What’s the BestWay to Support a Shaker for Lateral Vibration When it is Hung? 296 8.1.7 What are the Most Common Practical Failures with Shaker Setup? 297 8.1.8 What is the Correct Level of Shaker Excitation for Modal Testing? 297 8.1.9 How many Shakers should I use in my Modal Test? 297 8.1.10 Shaker and Stinger Alignment Issues 297 8.1.11 When should the Shaker be Attached to the Structure? 298 8.1.12 Should I Disconnect the Stingers while not Testing? 298 8.1.13 Force Gage or Impedance Head must be Mounted on Structure Side of Stinger? 300 8.1.14 What’s an Impedance Head? Why use it?Where does it go? 301 8.2 Stinger Related Issues 302 8.2.1 Why should Stingers be used? 302 8.2.2 Can a Poorly Designed Shaker/Stinger Setup Produce Incorrect Results? 303 8.2.3 Stingers and their Effect on Measured Frequency Response Functions 306 8.2.3.1 Stinger Location 307 8.2.3.2 Stinger Alignment 307 8.2.3.3 Stinger Length 308 8.2.3.4 Stinger Type 310 8.2.3.5 Sleeved Stingers 310 8.2.3.6 How do PianoWire StingersWork? How are they Pretensioned?? 314 8.3 Shaker Related Issues 314 8.3.1 Is MIMO needed for Structures with DirectionalModes? 314 8.3.2 Shaker Force Levels and SISO vs MIMO Considerations 316 8.3.2.1 High Shaker Force Levels 316 8.3.2.2 High Shaker Force Levels 318 8.3.2.3 Effects of FRF Measurements in the Modal Parameter Estimation Process 320 8.4 Concluding Remarks 325 9 Insight intoModal Parameter Estimation 327 9.1 Introductory Remarks 327 9.2 Mode Indicator Tools Help Identify Modes 328 9.3 SDOF vsMDOF for a Simple System 330 9.4 Local vs Global: MACL Frame 332 9.5 Repeated Root: Composite Spar 334 9.6 Wind Turbine Blade: Same Geometry but Very Different Modes 335 9.7 Stability Diagram Demystified 337 9.8 Curvefitting Demystified 340 9.9 Curvefitting Different Bands for the Poles and Residues 343 9.10 Synthesizing the FRF from Parameters from Several Bands Stitched Together 344 9.11 A Large Multiple Reference Modal Test Parameter Estimation 346 9.11.1 Case 1: Use of All Measured FRFs 346 9.11.2 Case 2: Use of Selected Sets of Measured FRFs 350 9.11.3 Case 3: Use of PolyMAX 352 9.12 Operating Modal Analysis 357 9.13 Concluding Remarks 363 10 General Considerations 365 10.1 An ExperimentalModal Test: a Thought Process Divulged 369 10.2 FFT Analyzer Setup 377 10.2.1 General FFT Analyzer Setup 377 10.2.2 Setup for Impact Testing 378 10.2.3 Setup for Shaker Testing 379 10.3 Log Sheets 379 10.4 Practical Considerations: Checklists 379 10.4.1 Checklist for Analyzer Setup 380 10.4.2 Checklist for Impact Testing 382 10.4.3 Checklist for Shaker Testing 384 10.4.4 Checklist for Measurement Adequacy 386 10.4.5 Checklist for Miscellaneous 388 10.5 Summary 391 Appendix: Logbook Forms 392 11 Tips, Tricks, and Other Stuff 395 11.1 Modal Testing Primer 396 11.1.1 Impact Setup 396 11.1.2 Shaker Setup 397 11.1.3 Drive Point Measurements 398 11.1.4 Reciprocity 398 11.1.5 Inappropriate Reference Location 399 11.1.6 Multiple-input,Multiple-output Testing 399 11.1.7 Multiple Reference Testing 400 11.2 Impact Hammer and Impulsive Excitation 400 11.2.1 The Right Hammer for the Test 400 11.2.2 Hammer – Get the Swing of it 401 11.2.3 Hammer Tripod 401 11.2.4 Hammer tip selection 401 11.2.5 No Hammer: Improvise 402 11.2.6 Pete’s Hammer Test Impact Ritual 402 11.3 Accelerometer Issues 403 11.3.1 Mass Loading 403 11.3.2 Mass Loading Effects from Tri-axial Accelerometers 404 11.3.3 Accelerometer Sensitivity Selection 407 11.3.4 Tri-axial Accelerometers 408 11.4 Curvefitting Considerations 411 11.4.1 Should all Measurements be used when Curvefitting 412 11.5 Blue Frame with Three Plate Subsystem 414 11.6 Miscellaneous Issues 422 11.6.1 Modal Test Axis Labels 422 11.6.2 Testing Does Not Need to Start at point 1 423 11.6.3 Test to aWider Frequency Range 423 11.6.4 Ui times Uj; the key to many questions 423 11.7 Summary 425 A Linear Algebra: Basic Operations Needed forModal Analysis Operations 427 A.1 Define a Matrix 427 A.2 Define a Column Vector 427 A.3 Define a Row Vector 428 A.4 Define a Diagonal Matrix 428 A.5 Define Matrix Addition 428 A.6 Define Matrix Scalar Multiply 428 A.7 Define Matrix Multiply 429 A.8 Matrix Multiplication Rules 429 A.9 Transpose of a Matrix 430 A.10 Transposition Rules 430 A.11 Symmetric Matrix Rules 430 A.12 Define a Matrix Inverse 431 A.13 Matrix Inverse Properties 431 A.14 Define an Eigenvalue Problem 431 A.15 Generalized Inverse 431 A.16 Singular Value Decomposition 432 B Example Using Two Degree of Freedom System: Eigenproblem 433 C Pole, Residue, and FRF Problem for 2-DOF System 437 D Example using Three Degree of Freedom System 443 E DYNSYSWebsite Materials 451 E.1 Technical Materials Developed 451 E.1.1 Theoretical Aspects of First and Second Order Systems 452 E.1.2 First Order Systems: Modeling Step with ODE and Block Diagram 452 E.1.3 Second Order Systems: Modeling Step, Impulse, IC with ODE and Block Diagram 452 E.1.4 MathematicalModeling Considerations 452 E.1.5 Simulink and MATLAB Primer Materials 453 E.1.6 Miscellaneous Materials 453 E.2 DYNSYS.UML.EDUWebsite 453 F Basic Modal Analysis Information 463 F.1 SDOF Definitions 463 F.1.1 Damping Estimates 463 F.1.2 System Transfer Function 464 F.1.3 Different Forms of the System Transfer Function 464 F.1.4 Frequency Response Function 465 F.2 MDOF Definitions 466 Part III Collection of Sets of Modal Data Collected for Processing 467 G Repeated Root Frame: Boundary Condition Effects 469 G.1 Corner Supports Set #1 470 G.2 Midlength Supports Set #2 474 G.3 Modal Correlation between Set #1 and Set #2 474 H Radarsat Satellite Testing 479 H.1 Data Reduction Set 1: Reference BUS:109:Z, BUS:118:Z, PMS:217:X and PMS:1211:Y 479 H.2 Data Reduction Set 2: Reference PMS:217:X and PMS:1211:Y 479 I Demo Airplane Testing 487 I.1 Impact Testing 487 I.2 SIMO Testing with Skewed Shaker 487 I.3 MIMO Testing with Two Vertical Modal Shakers 493 J Whirlpool Dryer Cabinet Modal Testing 497 K GM MTU Automobile Round Robin Modal Testing 501 L UML Composite Spar Modal Testing 505 M UML BUHModal Testing 509 N Nomenclature 515 Index 519

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe definitive text/reference for students, researchers and practicing engineers This book provides comprehensive coverage on refrigeration systems and applications, ranging from the fundamental principles of thermodynamics to food cooling applications for a wide range of sectoral utilizations. Energy and exergy analyses as well as performance assessments through energy and exergy efficiencies and energetic and exergetic coefficients of performance are explored, and numerous analysis techniques, models, correlations and procedures are introduced with examples and case studies. There are specific sections allocated to environmental impact assessment and sustainable development studies. Also featured are discussions of important recent developments in the field, including those stemming from the author's pioneering research. Refrigeration is a uniquely positioned multi-disciplinary field encompassing mechanical, chemical, industrial and food engineering, as well Table of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgments xix 1 General Aspects of Thermodynamics 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Dimensions and Units 2 1.2.1 Systems of Units 2 1.2.1.1 Mass 2 1.2.1.2 Length 2 1.2.1.3 Force 3 1.2.1.4 Density and Specific Volume 3 1.2.1.5 Mass Flow Rate and Volumetric Flow Rate 3 1.2.1.6 Temperature 4 1.2.1.7 Pressure 6 1.3 Thermodynamics 9 1.3.1 Thermodynamic Systems 9 1.3.2 Thermodynamic Laws 10 1.3.3 First Law of Thermodynamics 10 1.3.4 Second Law of Thermodynamics 12 1.3.4.1 Exergy and its Importance 13 1.3.4.2 Reversibility and Irreversibility 15 1.3.4.3 Reversible Work and Exergy Destruction 15 1.3.5 Dincer’s Six-step Approach 15 1.3.6 Pure Substances 25 1.3.6.1 State and Change of State 25 1.3.6.2 Vapor States 27 1.3.6.3 Sensible Heat, Latent Heat and Latent Heat of Fusion 27 1.3.6.4 Specific Heat 27 1.3.6.5 Specific Internal Energy 28 1.3.6.6 Specific Enthalpy 28 1.3.6.7 Specific Entropy 28 1.3.6.8 Energy Change and Energy Transfer 29 1.3.6.9 Flow Energy 29 1.3.6.10 Heat Transfer 29 1.3.6.11 Work 30 1.3.6.12 Thermodynamic Tables 30 1.4 Ideal and Real Gases 30 1.5 Refrigerators and Heat Pumps 36 1.5.1 The Carnot Refrigerators and Heat Pumps 38 1.6 Psychrometrics 49 1.6.1 Common Definitions in Psychrometrics 50 1.6.2 Balance Equations for Air and Water Vapor Mixtures 52 1.6.3 The Psychrometric Chart 53 1.7 Concluding Remarks 64 Nomenclature 64 Study Problems 67 References 70 2 Refrigerants 71 2.1 Introduction 71 2.2 Classification of Refrigerants 72 2.2.1 Halocarbons 72 2.2.2 Hydrocarbons 73 2.2.3 Inorganic Compounds 74 2.2.3.1 Ammonia (R-717) 74 2.2.3.2 Carbon dioxide (R-744) 75 2.2.3.3 Air (R-729) 75 2.2.4 Azeotropic mixtures 75 2.2.5 Nonazeotropic mixtures 76 2.3 Prefixes and Decoding of Refrigerants 76 2.3.1 Prefixes 76 2.3.2 Decoding the Number 77 2.3.3 Isomers 78 2.4 Secondary Refrigerants 79 2.5 Refrigerant–absorbent Combinations 80 2.6 Stratospheric Ozone Layer 82 2.6.1 Stratospheric Ozone Layer Depletion 84 2.6.2 Ozone Depletion Potential 85 2.6.3 Montreal Protocol 88 2.7 Global Warming 89 2.7.1 Global Warming Potential 93 2.8 Clean Air Act 94 2.8.1 Significant New Alternative Policies Program 94 2.8.2 Classification of Substances 96 2.9 Key Refrigerants 103 2.9.1 R-134a 103 2.9.2 R- 123 105 2.9.3 Nonazeotropic (Zeotropic) Mixtures 106 2.9.4 Azeotropic Mixtures 108 2.9.5 Ammonia (R-717) 110 2.9.6 Propane (R-290) 111 2.9.7 Carbon Dioxide (R-744) 113 2.10 Selection of Refrigerants 115 2.11 Thermophysical Properties of Refrigerants 116 2.12 Lubricating Oils and their Effects 120 2.13 Concluding Remarks 122 Study Problems 122 References 125 3 Refrigeration System Components 127 3.1 Introduction 127 3.2 History of Refrigeration 128 3.3 Main Refrigeration Systems 130 3.4 Refrigeration System Components 131 3.5 Compressors 132 3.5.1 Hermetic Compressors 133 3.5.2 Semi-hermetic Compressors 135 3.5.3 Open Compressors 136 3.5.4 Classification of Compressors 136 3.5.5 Positive Displacement Compressors 137 3.5.5.1 Reciprocating Compressors 137 3.5.5.2 Rotary Compressors 137 3.5.6 Dynamic Compressors 144 3.5.6.1 Centrifugal Compressors 144 3.5.6.2 Axial Compressors 147 3.5.7 Thermodynamic Analysis of Compressor 147 3.5.8 Compressor Capacity and Performance Assessment 149 3.5.8.1 Compression Ratio 149 3.5.8.2 Compressor Efficiency 150 3.5.8.3 Compressor Capacity Control for Better Performance 151 3.6 Condensers 156 3.6.1 Water-cooled Condensers 157 3.6.2 Air-cooled Condensers 157 3.6.3 Evaporative Condensers 158 3.6.4 Cooling Towers 159 3.6.5 Thermodynamic Analysis of Condenser 160 3.7 Evaporators 165 3.7.1 Liquid Coolers 165 3.7.2 Air and Gas Coolers 166 3.7.3 Thermodynamic Analysis of Evaporator 167 3.8 Throttling Devices 172 3.8.1 Thermostatic Expansion Valves 172 3.8.2 Constant Pressure Expansion Valves 173 3.8.3 Float Valves 173 3.8.4 Capillary Tubes 174 3.8.5 Thermodynamic Analysis of Throttling Valve 174 3.9 Auxiliary Devices 177 3.9.1 Accumulators 177 3.9.2 Receivers 178 3.9.3 Oil Separators 178 3.9.4 Strainers 179 3.9.5 Dryers 179 3.9.6 Check Valves 179 3.9.7 Solenoid Valves 179 3.9.8 Defrost Controllers 179 3.10 Concluding Remarks 180 Nomenclature 180 Study Problems 182 References 187 4 Refrigeration Cycles and Systems 189 4.1 Introduction 189 4.2 Vapor-compression Refrigeration Systems 189 4.2.1 Evaporation 190 4.2.2 Compression 190 4.2.3 Condensation 190 4.2.4 Expansion 191 4.3 Energy Analysis of Vapor-compression Refrigeration Cycle 192 4.4 Exergy Analysis of Vapor-compression Refrigeration Cycle 195 4.5 Actual Vapor-compression Refrigeration Cycle 200 4.5.1 Superheating and Subcooling 201 4.5.1.1 Superheating 201 4.5.1.2 Subcooling 203 4.5.2 Defrosting 204 4.5.3 Purging Air in Refrigeration Systems 205 4.5.3.1 Air Purging Methods 206 4.5.4 Twin Refrigeration System 209 4.6 Air-standard Refrigeration Systems 210 4.6.1 Energy and Exergy Analyses of a Basic Air-standard Refrigeration Cycle 211 4.7 Absorption Refrigeration Systems 216 4.7.1 Basic Absorption Refrigeration Systems 218 4.7.2 Ammonia–water (NH3–H2O) Absorption Refrigeration Systems 219 4.7.3 Energy Analysis of an Absorption Refrigeration System 221 4.7.4 Three-fluid (Gas Diffusion) Absorption Refrigeration Systems 224 4.7.5 Water–lithium Bromide (H2O –LiBr) Absorption Refrigeration Systems 225 4.7.5.1 Single-effect Absorption Refrigeration Systems 226 4.7.5.2 Double-effect Absorption Refrigeration Systems 227 4.7.5.3 Crystallization 229 4.7.6 Steam Ejector Recompression Absorption Refrigeration Systems 230 4.7.7 Electrochemical Absorption Refrigeration Systems 231 4.7.8 Absorption-augmented Refrigeration System 232 4.7.9 Exergy Analysis of an Absorption Refrigeration System 239 4.7.10 Performance Evaluation of an Absorption Refrigeration System 243 4.8 Concluding Remarks 245 Nomenclature 245 Study Problems 247 References 258 5 Advanced Refrigeration Cycles and Systems 261 5.1 Introduction 261 5.2 Multistage Refrigeration Cycles 262 5.3 Cascade Refrigeration Systems 268 5.3.1 Two-stage Cascade Systems 269 5.3.2 Three-stage (Ternary) Cascade Refrigeration System 274 5.4 Multi-effect Absorption Refrigeration Systems 280 5.5 Steam-jet Refrigeration Systems 311 5.6 Adsorption Refrigeration 317 5.7 Stirling Cycle Refrigeration 322 5.7.1 Performance Assessment 325 5.8 Thermoelectric Refrigeration 328 5.8.1 Performance Assessment of Thermoelectric Coolers 329 5.9 Thermoacoustic Refrigeration 332 5.10 Metal Hydride Refrigeration 334 5.10.1 Operational Principles 335 5.10.2 Regeneration Process 336 5.10.3 Refrigeration Process 336 5.11 Magnetic Refrigeration 337 5.11.1 Magnetic Refrigeration Cycle 339 5.11.2 Active Magnetic Regenerators 340 5.12 Supermarket Refrigeration Practices 345 5.12.1 Direct Expansion Systems 346 5.12.2 Distributed Systems 347 5.12.3 Secondary Loop Systems 348 5.13 Concluding Remarks 349 Nomenclature 349 Study Problems 351 References 354 6 Renewable Energy-based Integrated Refrigeration Systems 357 6.1 Introduction 357 6.2 Solar-powered Absorption Refrigeration Systems 358 6.3 Solar-powered Vapor-compression Refrigeration Systems 364 6.4 Wind-powered Vapor-compression Refrigeration Systems 368 6.5 Hydropowered Vapor-compression Refrigeration Systems 371 6.6 Geothermal-powered Vapor-compression Refrigeration Systems 375 6.7 Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion Powered Vapor-compression Refrigeration Systems 379 6.8 Biomass-powered Absorption Refrigeration Systems 383 6.9 Concluding Remarks 393 Nomenclature 394 Study Problems 395 Reference 398 7 Heat Pipes 399 7.1 Introduction 399 7.2 Heat Pipes 400 7.2.1 Heat Pipe Use 403 7.3 Heat Pipe Applications 403 7.3.1 Heat Pipe Coolers 404 7.3.2 Insulated Water Coolers 404 7.3.3 Heat Exchanger Coolers 404 7.4 Heat Pipes for Electronics Cooling 405 7.5 Types of Heat Pipes 407 7.5.1 Micro Heat Pipes 408 7.5.2 Cryogenic Heat Pipes 408 7.6 Heat Pipe Components 408 7.6.1 Container 410 7.6.2 Working Fluid 411 7.6.3 Selection of Working Fluid 413 7.6.4 Wick or Capillary Structure 414 7.7 Operational Principles of Heat Pipes 417 7.7.1 Heat Pipe Operating Predictions 418 7.7.1.1 Gravity-aided Orientation 419 7.7.1.2 Horizontal Orientation 419 7.7.1.3 Against Gravity Orientation 420 7.7.2 Heat Pipe Arrangement 421 7.8 Heat Pipe Performance 421 7.8.1 Effective Heat Pipe Thermal Resistance 423 7.9 Design and Manufacture of Heat Pipes 424 7.9.1 Thermal Conductivity of a Heat Pipe 427 7.9.2 Common Heat Pipe Diameters and Lengths 427 7.10 Heat-transfer Limitations 428 7.11 Heat Pipes in Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 429 7.11.1 Dehumidifier Heat Pipes 430 7.11.1.1 Working Principle 431 7.11.1.2 Indoor Dehumidifier Heat Pipes 432 7.11.2 Energy Recovery Heat Pipes 433 7.12 Concluding Remarks 436 Nomenclature 436 Study Problems 437 References 439 8 Food Refrigeration 441 8.1 Introduction 441 8.2 Food Deterioration 442 8.3 Food Preservation 443 8.4 Food Quality 444 8.5 Food Precooling and Cooling 446 8.6 Food Precooling Systems 448 8.6.1 Energy Coefficient 449 8.6.2 Hydrocooling 450 8.6.2.1 Hydrocooling using Ice or Ice–slush Cooling 453 8.6.2.2 Hydrocooling using Artificial Ice 453 8.6.2.3 Hydrocooling using Natural Ice 454 8.6.2.4 Hydrocooling using Natural Snow 455 8.6.2.5 Hydrocooling using Compacted Snow 455 8.6.3 Forced-air Cooling 456 8.6.3.1 Methods of Forced-air Cooling 459 8.6.3.2 Cold-wall-type Tunnel Forced-air Cooling 461 8.6.3.3 Serpentine Cooling 463 8.6.3.4 Single-pallet Forced-air Cooling 464 8.6.3.5 Room Cooling (with Storage and Shipping) 464 8.6.3.6 Ice-bank Forced-air Cooling System 464 8.6.3.7 Forced-air Cooling with Winter Coldness 465 8.6.3.8 Technical Details of Forced-air Cooling Systems 466 8.6.3.9 Engineering/economic Model for Forced-air Cooling Systems 468 8.6.4 Hydraircooling 469 8.6.5 Vacuum Cooling 471 8.6.6 Hydrovac Cooling 475 8.6.7 Evaporative Cooling 475 8.6.8 Ice Cooling 476 8.7 Precooling of Milk 477 8.8 Food Freezing 479 8.9 Cool and Cold Storage 480 8.9.1 Chilling Injury 481 8.9.2 Optimum Storage Conditions 481 8.9.2.1 Optimum Temperature 481 8.9.2.2 Optimum Relative Humidity 482 8.9.3 Technical Aspects of Cold Stores 485 8.9.3.1 Shape and Size 486 8.9.3.2 Construction Methods 486 8.9.3.3 Insulation 487 8.9.3.4 Vapor Barriers 488 8.9.3.5 Floors 488 8.9.3.6 Cold-air Distribution 488 8.9.3.7 Defrosting 489 8.9.3.8 Cold Store Planning 489 8.9.3.9 Refrigeration 490 8.9.4 Calculation of Cold Store Refrigeration Loads 490 8.9.5 Energy-efficient Cold Store 492 8.9.6 Photovoltaic-powered Cold Store 493 8.10 Controlled Atmosphere Storage 496 8.10.1 Controlled Atmosphere Storage Ripening and Waxing 500 8.10.2 Container-controlled Atmospheres 501 8.10.2.1 Controlled Modified Atmosphere Systems 501 8.10.2.2 Modified Atmospheres in Containers 502 8.10.2.3 Modified Atmospheres in Packaging 502 8.10.2.4 Pressure Swing Absorption Systems 502 8.10.2.5 Membrane Separation Systems 502 8.10.3 Packaging 503 8.10.4 Definitions 503 8.10.5 Modified Atmosphere Packaging 503 8.10.6 Modified Atmosphere Cooling 505 8.11 Refrigerated Transport 506 8.11.1 Reefer Technology 507 8.11.1.1 Controlled-atmosphere Reefer Containers 507 8.11.2 Quality Aspects of Products 507 8.11.3 Effective Packaging for Quality 508 8.11.4 Transport Storage 509 8.11.5 Temperature Control 511 8.11.5.1 Temperature Control and Monitoring 512 8.11.5.2 Temperature Monitoring Systems 513 8.11.6 Transportation Aspects 513 8.11.7 Recommended Transit and Storage Procedures 514 8.11.8 Developments in Refrigerated Transport 514 8.11.8.1 Sea and Land Transport 515 8.11.8.2 Air Transport 515 8.12 Respiration (Heat Generation) 515 8.12.1 Measurement of Respiratory Heat Generation 516 8.13 Transpiration (Moisture Loss) 516 8.13.1 Shrinkage 521 8.14 Cooling Process Parameters 522 8.14.1 Cooling Coefficient 522 8.14.2 Lag Factor 523 8.14.3 Half Cooling Time 523 8.14.4 Seven-eighths Cooling Time 523 8.15 Analysis of Cooling Process Parameters 524 8.15.1 Lin et al.’s Model for Irregular Shapes 527 8.16 Fourier–Reynolds Correlations 529 8.16.1 Development of Fourier–Reynolds Correlations 530 8.17 Cooling Heat-transfer Parameters 533 8.17.1 Specific Heat 533 8.17.1.1 Some Correlations for Specific Heat 534 8.17.2 Thermal Conductivity 535 8.17.2.1 Some Correlations for Thermal Conductivity 536 8.17.3 Thermal Diffusivity 538 8.17.4 Effective Heat-transfer Coefficients 540 8.17.4.1 Smith et al.’s Model 543 8.17.4.2 Ansari’s Model 544 8.17.4.3 Stewart et al.’s Model 544 8.17.4.4 Dincer and Dost’s Models 545 8.17.4.5 Some Methods for Effective Heat-transfer Coefficients 546 8.17.5 Modeling for Thermal Diffusivity and Heat-transfer Coefficient 547 8.17.6 Effective Nusselt–Reynolds Correlations 555 8.17.7 The Dincer Number 557 8.18 Conclusions 560 Nomenclature 561 Study Problems 563 References 565 9 Food Freezing 573 9.1 Introduction 573 9.2 Food Freezing Aspects 574 9.2.1 Enzymatic Reactions 575 9.2.2 Microbiological Activities 576 9.3 Quick Freezing 577 9.4 Enthalpy 577 9.5 Crystallization 578 9.6 Moisture Migration 579 9.7 Weight Loss 579 9.8 Blanching 580 9.9 Packaging 582 9.10 Quality of Frozen Foods 582 9.10.1 Objective Tests 583 9.10.2 Sensory Tests 583 9.10.3 Tests on the Kinetics of Quality Loss 583 9.11 Food Freezing Process 585 9.11.1 Freezing of Fruits 586 9.11.2 Freezing of Vegetables 586 9.12 Freezing Point 588 9.13 Freezing Rate 589 9.14 Freezing Times 590 9.14.1 Plank’s Model 592 9.14.2 Mellor’s Model 592 9.14.3 Pham’s Model 593 9.14.4 Cleland and Earle’s Model 594 9.14.5 Mannapperuma et al.’s Model 595 9.15 Freezing Equipment 598 9.15.1 Tunnel Freezers 599 9.15.1.1 Packaged Tunnel Freezers 600 9.15.1.2 Modular Tunnel Freezers 601 9.15.1.3 Multipass Tunnel Freezers 602 9.15.1.4 Contact Belt Tunnel Freezers 603 9.15.1.5 Drag Thru Doly Freezers 603 9.15.2 Spiral Freezers 604 9.15.2.1 Packaged Spiral Freezers 605 9.15.2.2 Site-built Spiral Freezers 606 9.15.3 Plate (Tray) Freezers 606 9.15.3.1 Packaged Tray Freezers 608 9.15.4 Impingement Jet Freezers 608 9.15.5 Cryogenic Freezers 609 9.15.5.1 Immersing Cryogenic Freezers 611 9.15.5.2 Tunnel Cryogenic Freezers 612 9.15.6 Control in Freezers 612 9.16 Ice Making 613 9.16.1 Block Ice Manufacture 613 9.16.2 Shell Ice Manufacture 614 9.16.3 Flake Ice Manufacture 614 9.16.4 Tube Ice Manufacture 614 9.16.5 Plate Ice Manufacture 615 9.16.6 Slush, Slurry or Binary Ice Manufacture 615 9.17 Thawing 615 9.18 Freeze-drying 616 9.18.1 Operation Principles 617 9.18.2 Freeze-drying Times 619 9.18.3 Freeze-dryers 621 9.18.3.1 Batch-type Freeze-dryers 622 9.18.3.2 Continuous-type Freeze-dryers 624 9.18.3.3 Microwave and Dielectric Freeze-dryers 625 9.18.4 Atmospheric Freeze-drying 625 9.19 Conclusions 625 Nomenclature 626 Study Problems 627 References 628 10 Environmental Impact and Sustainability Assessment of Refrigeration Systems 631 10.1 Introduction 631 10.2 Environmental Concerns 633 10.3 Energy and Environmental Impact 637 10.4 Dincer’s Six Pillars 638 10.5 Dincer’s 3S Concept 638 10.6 System Greenization 639 10.7 Sustainability 641 10.8 Energy and Sustainability 643 10.9 Exergy and Sustainability 645 10.10 Concluding Remarks 667 Study Problems 668 References 668 Appendix A Conversion Factors 671 Appendix B Thermophysical Properties 675 Appendix C Food Refrigeration Data 701 Index 719

Read more less

Book SynopsisConstruction Science & Materialsis designed to cover topics studied at levels 2 5 on Construction HND courses and is also suitable for first year undergraduates on construction courses as well as Building surveying, Architectural Technology and Quantity Surveying. Itis an essential text for those who have done no science since their GCSEs.Divided into 17 chapters, each with written explanations supplemented by solved examples and relevant diagrams to substantiate the text. Chapters end with numerical questions covering a range of problems and their answers are given at the end of the book and on the book's website.Table of ContentsPreface to the second edition xv About the companion website xvii 1 Introduction to Physics 1 1.1 Speed and Velocity 1 1.2 Acceleration 1 1.3 Mass 2 1.4 Gravitation 2 1.5 Weight 3 1.6 Volume 4 1.7 Density 4 1.8 Specific Gravity 6 1.9 Newton’s First Law of Motion 6 1.10 Newton’s Second Law of Motion 6 1.11 Newton’s Third Law of Motion 7 1.12 Friction 7 1.13 Work 8 1.14 Energy 9 1.14.1 Potential Energy 9 1.14.2 Kinetic Energy 10 1.15 Power 11 Exercise 1.1 12 Reference/Further reading 12 2 Introduction to chemistry 13 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Electrovalency and covalency 15 2.2.1 Covalent Bond 17 2.3 Elements and Compounds 18 2.4 Symbols and Formulae 19 2.5 Acids and bases 20 2.5.1 Acids 20 2.5.2 Bases 21 Exercise 2.1 22 References/Further reading 23 3 Effects of Chemicals and the Atmosphere on Materials 25 3.1 Introduction 25 3.2 Oxidation 25 3.2.1 Experiment: To Show that Oxygen (Or Air) and Water are Necessary for the Rusting of Iron 26 3.3 Electrolysis 27 3.4 Electrolytic Corrosion 28 3.4.1 Examples of Electrolytic Corrosion 30 3.4.2 Protection of Steel from Corrosion 31 3.5 Applications of Electrolysis 32 3.5.1 Electroplating 32 3.5.2 Extraction of Aluminium 32 3.6 Acid rain 33 References/Further Reading 33 4 Electricity 35 4.1 Introduction 35 4.2 Coulomb’s law 35 4.3 Electric current 36 4.4 Potential difference 36 4.5 Electromotive force (e.m.f.) 37 4.6 Ohm’s law 37 4.7 Electrical resistivity and conductivity 39 4.8 Resistors in Series/Parallel 39 4.8.1 Resistors in series 39 4.8.2 Resistors in parallel 40 4.9 Transformers 43 4.10 Power generation 44 4.11 Power distribution 45 4.12 Supply to small buildings 47 Exercise 4.1 48 Reference/Further reading 49 5 Introduction to Construction Technology 51 5.1 Introduction 51 5.2 Substructure and Superstructure 51 5.2.1 Soil investigation 52 5.3 Foundations 53 5.3.1 Settlement 54 5.4 Forms of Construction 55 5.5 The External Envelope 56 5.5.1 Functions of the External Envelope 57 5.5.2 Ground Floors 60 5.5.3 Cavity Walls 61 5.5.4 Suspended Timber Upper Floors 61 5.5.5 Roofs 61 References/Further Reading 61 6 Introduction to Building Services 63 6.1 Introduction 63 6.2 Cold Water Supply 63 6.3 Hot Water Supply 65 6.4 Central Heating Systems 65 6.5 Underfloor Heating Systems 66 6.6 Drainage Systems 67 6.6.1 Below‐ground Drainage System 67 6.6.2 Above‐ground Drainage System 68 6.7 Integration of Services into Building Design 68 References/Further Reading 72 7 Thermal Energy 1 73 7.1 Introduction 73 7.2 Temperature 73 7.2.1 Temperature Scales 74 7.3 Units of Heat 74 7.4 States of Matter 75 7.4.1 Changes in the Physical State 75 7.4.2 Experiment: The Physical States of Water 75 7.5 Expansion and Contraction of Solids 77 7.5.1 Linear Expansion 77 7.5.2 Experiment: Determination of Coefficient of Linear Expansion 78 7.5.3 Practical Examples of Expansion and Contraction 79 7.6 Heat Transfer 81 7.6.1 Conduction 81 7.6.2 Experiment: To Compare the Thermal Conductivity of Metals 84 7.6.3 Convection 84 7.6.4 Radiation 85 Exercise 7.1 86 References/Further Reading 86 8 Thermal Energy 2 (Including Humidity) 87 8.1 Introduction 87 8.2 Thermal Insulation 87 8.2.1 Experiment: To Compare the Thermal Insulation Values of Expanded Polystyrene, Vermiculite, Mineral Wool, Glass Fibre and Cork 88 8.3 Heat Transmission 90 8.3.1 Thermal Conductivity 90 8.3.2 Thermal Resistivity (r) 91 8.3.3 Thermal Resistance (R) 91 8.4 Thermal Transmittance 92 8.5 Heat Loss from Buildings 98 8.6 Temperature Drop Through Materials 102 8.7 Humidity 104 8.7.1 Measurement of Relative Humidity 105 8.8 Condensation 107 8.8.1 The Psychrometric Chart 108 8.8.2 Prevention of Surface Condensation 108 8.8.3 Interstitial Condensation 110 Exercise 8.1 116 References/Further Reading 117 9 Forces and Structures 1 119 9.1 Introduction 119 9.2 Force 119 9.2.1 Internal and External Forces 120 9.3 Bending 120 9.3.1 Deflection 122 9.4 Types of Loading 123 9.4.1 Dead Load 123 9.4.2 Imposed Load 123 9.4.3 Wind Load 123 9.4.4 Loading from other Effects 123 9.4.5 Point Load 123 9.4.6 Uniformly Distributed Load 125 9.4.7 Triangular Load 125 9.5 Stress and Strain 126 9.5.1 Stress 127 9.5.2 Strain 127 9.6 Elasticity 128 9.6.1 Experiment 1: Proof of Hooke’s Law 128 9.6.2 Experiment 2: Proof of Hooke’s Law 129 9.6.3 Factor of Safety 131 Exercise 9.1 132 References/Further Reading 133 10 Forces and structures 2 135 10.1 Moment of a force 135 10.1.1 Sign convention 136 10.2 Laws of equilibrium 139 10.3 Analysis of beams 139 10.3.1 Beam reactions 139 10.3.2 Shear force (S.F.) 144 10.3.3 Bending moment (B.M.) 149 10.4 Triangle of forces 156 10.4.1 Bow’s notation 159 10.4.2 Frames and roof trusses 161 Exercise 10.1 166 References/Further reading 169 11 Forces and structures 3 171 11.1 Introduction 171 11.2 Beams 171 11.2.1 Tension and compression in beams 171 11.2.2 Shear 172 11.2.3 Deflection 173 11.2.4 Lateral buckling 174 11.3 Reinforced concrete (R.C.) beams 175 11.3.1 Shear reinforcement 175 11.4 Steel beams 177 11.4.1 Bending 177 11.4.2 Plastic hinge 178 11.4.3 Shear 178 11.5 Timber joists 179 11.5.1 Failures in Timber Joists 180 11.5.2 Lateral buckling 181 11.6 Slabs 182 11.7 Columns 183 11.7.1 Slenderness ratio 183 11.7.2 Effective height of columns 184 11.7.3 Eccentric loading on columns 186 11.7.4 Steel columns 187 11.7.5 Reinforced Concrete Columns 188 11.8 Foundations 188 11.8.1 Strip foundation 189 11.8.2 Pad foundation 190 11.8.3 Other foundations 191 References/Further reading 192 12 Fluid mechanics 193 12.1 Introduction 193 12.2 Pressure of fluids at rest 193 12.3 Why do Liquids Flow? 196 12.4 Centre of pressure 197 12.5 The flow of a fluid 199 12.5.1 Flow rate 200 12.5.2 Bernoulli’s theorem 201 12.5.3 The venturimeter 204 12.5.4 Flow in pipes: Energy loss 205 12.5.5 Flow in Open Channels 206 Exercise 12.1 208 References/Further reading 210 13 Sound 211 13.1 Introduction 211 13.2 Frequency, wavelength and velocity of sound 212 13.2.1 Frequency (f) 212 13.2.2 Wavelength (λ) 212 13.2.3 Velocity (v) 212 13.3 Measurement of sound 214 13.3.1 Threshold values of sound 215 13.3.2 The Decibel Scale 215 13.4 Addition of Sound Levels 217 13.4.1 Approximate addition of Sound Levels 217 13.5 Transmission of sound in buildings 219 13.5.1 Noise 220 13.5.2 Requirements of Sound Insulation 220 13.5.3 Sound‐Insulation Techniques 221 13.5.4 Noise in a workplace 224 13.5.5 Measurement of Sound Insulation 224 13.6 Sound absorption 225 13.6.1 Reverberation 227 13.6.2 Reverberation time 227 13.6.3 Types of Sound Absorbers 231 13.7 Sound‐level Meter 232 Exercise 13.1 232 References/Further reading 233 14 Light 235 14.1 Introduction 235 14.2 Additive and Subtractive Colours 236 14.3 Measuring light 237 14.3.1 Angular measure 237 14.3.2 Solid angle 237 14.3.3 Luminous intensity (I) 238 14.3.4 Luminous flux (F) 238 14.3.5 Illuminance (E) 239 14.3.6 Luminance 239 14.4 Inverse Square Law of Illuminance 240 14.5 Lambert’s Cosine Law of Illuminance 241 14.6 Lamps and luminaires 243 14.7 Design of Interior Lighting 245 14.7.1 Light Output Ratio 246 14.7.2 Direct ratio 246 14.7.3 Room index 247 14.7.4 Reflection of light 247 14.7.5 Level of illuminance 247 14.7.6 Utilisation factor (UF) 249 14.7.7 Maintenance factor (MF) 249 14.7.8 Lumen Design Method 252 14.7.9 SHR 253 14.8 Light meter 258 14.9 Daylighting 258 14.9.1 Uniform sky 258 14.9.2 CIE Standard Overcast Sky 258 14.9.3 Daylight factor 259 Exercise 14.1 261 References/Further reading 263 15 Human Comfort 265 15.1 Introduction 265 15.2 Temperature 265 15.2.1 Air Temperature 266 15.2.2 Mean Radiant Temperature 267 15.2.3 Environmental Temperature 267 15.2.4 Dry Resultant Temperature 267 15.2.5 Activity 268 15.2.6 Clothing 268 15.3 Air movement 268 15.4 Humidity 269 15.5 Ventilation 269 15.6 Predicted Mean Vote 269 15.7 Noise 270 15.8 Lighting 271 References/Further Reading 272 16 Construction materials 273 16.1 Introduction 273 16.2 Bricks 274 16.2.1 Clay bricks 274 16.2.2 Size 274 16.2.3 Classification 275 16.2.4 Manufacture 275 16.2.5 Properties 275 16.2.6 Deterioration of brickwork 277 16.2.7 Environmental implications 278 16.2.8 COSHH 278 16.3 Aerated Concrete Blocks 279 16.3.1 Manufacture 279 16.3.2 Size 279 16.3.3 Properties 279 16.3.4 Environmental implications 280 16.4 Cement 280 16.4.1 Raw materials 281 16.4.2 Manufacture 281 16.4.3 Setting and hardening of cement 282 16.4.4 Constituents of Portland Cement 282 16.4.5 Types of cement 282 16.4.6 Compressive strength 283 16.4.7 Environmental implications 284 16.4.8 COSHH 284 16.5 Concrete 284 16.5.1 Raw materials 285 16.5.2 Manufacture of concrete 285 16.5.3 Concrete mix 285 16.5.4 Properties of Fresh Concrete 287 16.5.5 Properties of Hardened Concrete 289 16.5.6 Deterioration of concrete 290 16.5.7 Environmental implications 291 16.6 Metals 291 16.6.1 Ferrous metals 291 16.6.2 Non‐Ferrous Metal: Aluminium 295 16.7 Timber 296 16.7.1 Seasoning 297 16.7.2 Properties 298 16.7.3 Deterioration 299 16.7.4 Preservation 300 16.7.5 Environmental implications 300 16.8 Plastics 300 16.8.1 Raw Materials and Manufacture 301 16.8.2 Classification 301 16.8.3 Properties and uses 302 16.9 Glass 303 16.9.1 Properties 303 16.9.2 Types of glass 305 References/Further reading 306 17 Assignments 307 17.1 Assignments for Level 2 courses 307 17.1.1 Assignment No. 1 307 17.1.2 Assignment No. 2 307 17.1.3 Assignment No. 3 307 17.2 Assignments for Level 3/4 courses 308 17.2.1 Assignment No. 1 308 17.2.2 Assignment No. 2 309 17.2.3 Assignment No. 3 310 Appendix 1 Formulae for Example 8.2 313 Appendix 2 Solutions for Example 13.10 315 Appendix 3 Answers to exercises 317 Index 325

Read more less

Book SynopsisMulti-Party and Multi-Contract Arbitration in the Construction Industry provides the first detailed review of multi-party arbitration in the international construction sector. Highly practical in approach, the detailed interpretation and assessment of the arbitration of multi-party disputes will facilitate understanding and decision making by arbitrators, clients and construction contractors.Trade Review"Dr Dimitar Kondev's book on multi-party and multi-contract arbitration in the construction industry tackles a complex topic, which presents many hurdles in practice. Dr Kondev has successfully accomplished this difficult task. He leads the reader through the intricacies and pitfalls of this subject in an efficient and well-structured manner. He also takes a convincing stance on the most controversial issue and proposes pragmatic and workable solutions to the recurring problems that arise with respect to multi-party arbitration in construction disputes. This book might be of interest not only for practitioners specialised in construction arbitration but also for the arbitration community... In view of the foregoing, there is no doubt that this book is a must read for arbitration practitioners. Let us hope that Dr Kondev’s recommendations will be well received and implemented by the practitioners and drafters of international standard forms and arbitration rules. This would be a significant step-forward in enhancing dispute resolution in the construction industry." Fabrice Robert-Tissot, International Business Law Journal (RDAI 2018/1, pp 121-124) “This is the first book which deals with multi-party and multi-contract arbitration in the construction sector.… In his book, Dr Kondev makes an in-depth analysis of the legal regulation of this type of arbitration contained in the most popular institutional arbitration rules and the arbitration laws of different jurisdictions. The book also offers an up-to-date and thorough review of how multi-party and multi-contract arbitration is dealt with in the most widely used international standard forms of construction contract (such as the FIDIC books, NEC3, etc.) and some domestic standard forms (used mostly in Great Britain, the US and some Scandinavian countries)… The book also contains practical guidelines for drafting multi-party arbitration clauses… Because of the importance of the matters discussed in this treatise, it would be of great value to lawyers, arbitrators and academics in the field of international commercial arbitration.” Society and Law (5/2017, pp 111-112) "Complex arbitration disputes involving multiple parties and multiple contracts are both an evergreen – as demonstrated by the extensive literature on the subject – and a hot topic – confirmed, eg, by numerous amendments to arbitration rules in recent years... Given this background, is it possible to add anything new or meaningful? KONDEV has demonstrated that it definitely is. On the one hand, his study is clearly structured, well written, and thoroughly researched; this alone makes it stand out and merit a strong recommendation. On the other hand, KONDEV adds a specialist perspective to the debate, namely that of the construction industry... The author ‘attempted to bridge the gap between the theoretical proposals regarding multi-party arbitration and their practical application’ (pp 326-327). It is submitted that he fully succeeded. Anyone dealing with multi-party, multicontract issues in the construction industry will benefit from this new book – drafters of contracts or rules as well as counsel, arbitrators, or judges in pending proceedings." Johannes Landbrecht, 36 ASA Bulletin 1/2018 (March), p. 256 “Another publication on multi-party arbitration? Was that necessary, given that a lot has been written about this topic over the years already? It was. For at least two reasons. First, most of the existing contributions discuss the issue in a general context without regard to the peculiarities of disputes and specific contractual frameworks found in the construction industry. Second, many articles identify the numerous problems of multi-party arbitration without providing any self-contained practical solutions. Dimitar Kondev’s 408-page book fills these two gaps… For a number of reasons, Kondev’s book is of great value. It provides a useful overview of different approaches in arbitration rules, arbitration legislation and standard form contracts. It explains the importance of tailoring arbitration agreements to reflect the peculiarities of each project, the peculiarities of the underlying contracts, the peculiarities of the applicable arbitration rules and relevant national laws. Finally, the author addresses concerns and provides thoughts and ideas that are absolutely essential for drafting multi-party arbitration clauses. Not only, but in particular, the last two chapters of the book are very inspiring, even for experienced practitioners, and the various committees and working groups involved in the development of standard form contracts and arbitration rules.” Hein-Jürgen Schramke, Construction Law International 13 (1) (March 2018) “As surprising as it may sound, Multi-Party and Multi-Contract Arbitration in the Construction Industry appears to be the first published monograph dealing specifically with the topic of multi-party and multi-contract arbitration in the construction sector. [Dr Kondev's] dual background as practicing lawyer and scholar allows him to address with success the topic of this book from both theoretical and practical standpoints... Dr Kondev’s expertise and well researched approach makes this monograph a highly informative read. Dr Kondev’s insightful book will be of use first and foremost to construction practitioners who are looking for a comprehensive study of the difficulties raised by the multi-party and multi-contract nature of construction disputes. That book, however, should also appeal to general arbitration practitioners and academics looking to deepen their understanding of multi-party and multi-contract arbitration, as much of the insights transpose well into areas of arbitration practice other than construction." Dr. Remy Gerbay, ICC Dispute Resolution Bulletin, Issue 2 (2018), pp. 83-84 “Dr Kondev’s book provides a useful in-depth analysis of the three main legal sources of the regulation of multi-party arbitration: the arbitration agreement, applicable arbitration rules and arbitration laws… Dr Kondev’s clear analysis leads him to conclude that the current legal framework has largely failed to provide workable solutions for the construction sector. He suggests two ways in which this framework could be improved: through the contractual regulation of multi-party disputes and by amendments to the arbitration institutional rules. Of particular practical use, recognising that the drafting of multi-party arbitration clauses can be a daunting complex exercise, Dr Kondev considers in detail the drafting of such clauses. He provides clear, and sensible guidelines, as a checklist for the drafter. Overall Dr Kondev has achieved his aim: to contribute at the theoretical level and to produce a book with a clear practical approach to the problems discussed. His book is of interest to anyone involved or interested in international construction arbitration including in-house lawyers, arbitrators, private practitioners, academics and those involved in drafting international standard forms and arbitration rules. “ Marion Smith QC, 35 The International Construction Law Review, No. 3 (2018), pp. 359-360 Table of ContentsAbout the Author x Foreword xi Preface xiii Acknowledgements xv List of Abbreviations xvi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 General background and research problem 1 1.2 Scope of the book, limitations and literature review 4 1.2.1 Scope of the book 4 1.2.2 Limitations 4 1.2.3 Literature review 5 1.3 Sources used 6 1.4 Structure of the book 9 1.5 Aims and contribution of the book 10 2 Multi‐Party Arbitration in General 11 2.1 Terminology notes 11 2.1.1 Definition of multi‐party arbitration 11 2.1.2 Multi‐party and multi‐contract arbitration: divergent or similar concepts? 12 2.1.3 Group of contracts doctrine 14 2.2 Legal techniques introducing multi‐party arbitration 15 2.2.1 Single request for arbitration 16 2.2.2 Joinder 16 2.2.3 Intervention 16 2.2.4 Consolidation 17 2.3 Advantages of multi‐party arbitration 18 2.3.1 Avoids risk of inconsistent findings 18 2.3.2 Less time and fewer costs 19 2.3.3 Fewer factual errors 20 2.4 Obstacles to multi‐party arbitration 21 2.4.1 Consensual nature of arbitration 21 2.4.2 Arbitration as a two‐party setup 23 2.4.3 Arbitration as a confidential process 24 2.4.4 Setting aside proceedings and non‐recognition and / or non‐enforcement of arbitral awards 26 2.4.5 Practical difficulties 30 3 The Need for Multi‐Party Arbitration in the Construction Sector 31 3.1 Specifics of construction disputes and construction arbitration 31 3.2 Introduction to international standard form construction agreements 33 3.2.1 FIDIC Conditions of Contract 33 3.2.2 NEC contracts 36 3.2.3 ICC contracts 37 3.2.4 ENAA model forms 38 3.2.5 IChemE contracts 39 3.2.6 PPC International and SPC International 39 3.3 Contractual structures in construction projects 40 3.3.1 ‘Build‐only’ projects 40 3.3.2 ‘Design‐build’ or ‘turnkey’ projects 41 3.3.3 Construction management 43 3.3.4 Management contracting 44 3.3.5 ‘Design‐build‐operate’ (‘DBO’) model 45 3.3.6 Partnering and alliancing 46 3.4 Parties’ interests in multi‐party arbitration 46 3.4.1 Employer 46 3.4.2 Contractor 51 3.4.3 Subcontractor 52 3.4.4 Designer 53 3.4.5 Engineer 54 3.4.6 Suppliers 56 3.4.7 Technical consultants 56 3.4.8 Guarantors 56 3.4.9 Concluding remarks 58 4 Multi‐Party Arbitration Solutions under Arbitration Rules 60 4.1 ICC Rules 61 4.1.1 Multi‐contract claims and prima facie assessment 62 4.1.2 Joinder 67 4.1.3 Consolidation 69 4.2 CEPANI Rules 71 4.2.1 Multiple parties and multi‐contract claims 71 4.2.2 Joinder and intervention 73 4.2.3 Consolidation 75 4.3 LCIA Rules 77 4.4 UNCITRAL Rules 80 4.5 Swiss Rules 84 4.5.1 Prima facie test 84 4.5.2 Consolidation 84 4.5.3 Joinder and intervention 88 4.6 Rules adopted by the American Arbitration Association (‘AAA’) 90 4.6.1 Construction Industry Arbitration Rules (‘CIAR’) 90 4.6.2 ICDR Rules 92 4.7 Vienna Rules 94 4.7.1 Joinder 95 4.7.2 Consolidation 98 4.8 DIS Arbitration Rules 99 4.9 SCC Rules 100 4.10 DIA Rules 101 4.11 Arbitration rules in Asia 102 4.11.1 CIETAC Rules 102 4.11.2 SIAC Rules 106 4.11.3 HKIAC Rules 109 4.11.4 JCAA Rules 114 4.12 Concluding remarks regarding arbitration rules 115 5 Multi‐Party Arbitration Solutions under Arbitration Laws 121 5.1 UNCITRAL Model Law 122 5.2 The United Kingdom 124 5.3 The Netherlands 129 5.4 Belgium 131 5.5 New Zealand 132 5.6 Hong Kong 133 5.7 Canada 137 5.8 Australia 138 5.9 Other countries 139 5.10 Multi‐party arbitration in the United States 140 5.10.1 Legal framework 140 5.10.2 United States’ case law on multi‐party arbitration 146 5.11 Should arbitration laws deal with multi‐party arbitration? 158 5.12 Concluding remarks regarding arbitration laws 164 6 Contractual Solutions to Multi‐Party Arbitration 167 6.1 FIDIC Conditions of Contract 169 6.2 Blue Form 175 6.2.1 Clause 18(2) of the 1984 Blue Form 175 6.2.2 Use of the Blue Form in conjunction with the FIDIC Conditions of Contract 183 6.2.3 Commentary on clause 18(2) 189 6.2.4 Clause 18(8) of the 1991 Blue Form 201 6.2.5 Clause 18(10) of the 1998 Blue Form 205 6.2.6 Clause 18C(4) of the 2008 Blue Form 206 6.3 JCT Contracts 208 6.3.1 JCT 80 approach to multi‐party arbitration 209 6.3.2 Commentary on the JCT 80 approach 219 6.3.3 New JCT approach 222 6.4 ACA standard forms 223 6.5 Nec3 226 6.5.1 Main contract provisions 227 6.5.2 Subcontract provisions 229 6.5.3 Do NEC3 provisions create a self‐contained mechanism for joint adjudication? 230 6.5.4 Compatibility between the joint adjudication provisions and the dispute notification requirements 232 6.6 IChemE contracts 234 6.7 ICC contracts 237 6.8 PPC and SPC International 238 6.9 ENAA Model forms 240 6.10 AIA standard forms 242 6.11 ConsensusDocs 247 6.12 AB 92 and ABT 93 250 6.13 Concluding remarks regarding contractual approaches 252 7 Proposed Solutions 255 7.1 Jurisdictional approach 256 7.2 Abstract consensual approach 262 7.3 Proposed contractual solutions 264 7.3.1 IBA guidelines for Drafting International Arbitration Clauses 267 7.3.2 AAA Guide to Drafting Alternative Dispute Resolution Clauses for Construction Contracts 271 7.3.3 Drafting Multi‐Party Arbitration Clauses 273 7.3.4 Sample multi‐party arbitration clause 303 7.4 Institutional approach 313 7.4.1 How to create a workable multi‐party arbitration mechanism under arbitration rules? 315 7.4.2 Compatibility of arbitration agreements 319 7.4.3 Other circumstances 322 8 Conclusion 325 Table 1 Summary of Multi-Party Arbitration Provisions under the Reviewed Arbitration Rules 328 Table 2 Summary of Multi-Party Arbitration Provisions under Arbitration Laws 333 Appendix 1 Second Alternative Clause of Clause 20 of the FIDIC Subcontract 337 Appendix 2 Multi‐Party Arbitration Provisions under the Blue Form 351 Appendix 3 Multi‐Party Arbitration Clauses under the ENAA Model Form – International Contract for Process Plant Construction, 2010 and Related Subcontracts 355 Bibliography 358 Index 381

Read more less

Book SynopsisA groundbreaking book on the application of the economic and environmentally effective treatment of industrial wastewater Constructed Wetlands for Industrial Wastewater Treatment contains a review of the state-of-the-art applications of constructed wetland technology for industrial wastewater treatment. This green technology offers many economic, environmental, and societal advantages. The text examines the many unique uses and the effectiveness of constructed wetlands for the treatment of complex and heavily polluted wastewater from various industrial sources. The editor a noted expert in the field and the international author team (93 authors from 22 countries) present vivid examples of the current state of constructed wetlands in the industrial sector. The text is filled with international case studies and research outcomes and covers a wide range of applications of these sustainable systems including facilities such as the oil and gas industry, agro-industries, paper mills, phTable of ContentsSeries Foreword – Challenges in Water Management xvii List of Contributors xix Preface xxvii Acknowledgements xxix Introduction to Constructed Wetland Technology 1 Alexandros I. Stefanakis 1 From Natural to Constructed Wetlands 1 2 The Need for Sustainable Solutions 3 3 Constructed Wetlands or Conventional Systems – Pros and Cons 3 4 Classification of Constructed Wetlands 6 4.1 Free Water Surface Constructed Wetlands (FWS CWs) 7 4.2 Horizontal Subsurface Flow Constructed Wetlands (HSF CWs) 7 4.3 Vertical Flow Constructed Wetlands (VFCWs) 8 4.4 Floating Treatment Wetlands (FTWs) 9 4.5 Sludge Treatment Wetlands (STWs) 10 4.6 Aerated Constructed Wetlands 11 5 Design Considerations of Constructed Wetlands 11 6 Constructed Wetlands as a Sustainable Solution for the Industrial Sector 14 7 Scope of this Book 16 References 17 Part I Petrochemical and Chemical Industry 23 1 Integrated Produced Water Management in a Desert Oilfield Using Wetland Technology and Innovative Reuse Practices 25 Alexandros I. Stefanakis, Stephane Prigent and Roman Breuer 1.1 Introduction 25 1.2 Constructed Wetland for Produced Water Treatment 27 1.2.1 Location and Description 27 1.2.2 Weather Station 28 1.2.3 Chemical Analyses 30 1.3 Results and Discussion 32 1.3.1 Weather Data 32 1.3.2 Water Quality 32 1.3.3 Environmental Performance 35 1.4 Treated Effluent Reuse for Saline Irrigation 36 1.5 Conclusions 39 References 39 2 Constructed Wetlands Treating Water Contaminated with Organic Hydrocarbons 43 Martin Thullner, Alexandros I. Stefanakis and Saeed Dehestani 2.1 Introduction 43 2.1.1 Benzene Removal in Constructed Wetlands 44 2.2 MTBE Removal in Constructed Wetlands 48 2.3 Phenol Removal in Constructed Wetlands 51 2.4 Combined Treatment of Different Compounds 54 References 56 Part II Food and Beverage Industry 65 3 Aerated Constructed Wetlands for Treatment of Municipal and Food Industry Wastewater 67 A. Pascual, D. De la Varga, M. Soto, D. Van Oirschot, R.M. Kilian, J.A. Álvarez, P. Carvalho, H. Brix and C.A. Arias 3.1 Introduction 67 3.2 Aerated Constructed Wetlands 68 3.2.1 Oxygen Transfer at the Water–Biofilm Interface 69 3.2.2 Benefits of Artificial Aeration in Constructed Wetlands 70 3.2.3 Dissolved Oxygen Profile along CWs 71 3.2.4 TSS Removal 71 3.2.5 COD Removal 71 3.2.6 Nitrogen Removal 72 3.3 HIGHWET Project 72 3.3.1 KT Food Pilot Plant 73 3.3.2 Research Operational Plan of KT Food Treatment Plant 73 3.3.2.1 Campaign 1 77 3.3.2.2 Campaign 2 78 3.3.2.3 Campaign 3 80 3.3.2.4 Campaign 4 82 3.3.2.5 Campaign 5 84 3.3.3 Comparison of Results 85 3.4 Conclusions 87 Acknowledgements 88 References 88 4 Treatment of Wineries and Breweries Effluents using Constructed Wetlands 95 F. Masi, A. Rizzo, and R. Bresciani 4.1 Introduction 95 4.2 Wastewater Production and Characterization 96 4.2.1 Wineries 96 4.2.2 Breweries 96 4.3 Applications and Configurations 97 4.3.1 Wineries 97 4.3.1.1 Multistage CW with Nature-Based Composting as Pretreatment for Wastewater: An Italian Case Study 98 4.3.1.2 Multistage CW with Technological Composting as Pretreatment for Wastewater: A Spanish Case Study 99 4.3.1.3 Multistage CW with Technological Aerobic Reactor and Subsequent Composting on CW: A French Case Study 100 4.3.2 Breweries 101 4.4 Discussion and Conclusions 101 4.4.1 Advantages and Disadvantages of Different Multistage CW Treatment Plants 101 4.4.2 Future Perspectives of CW for Brewery Wastewater Treatment 103 References 103 5 Treatment of Effluents from Fish and Shrimp Aquaculture in Constructed Wetlands 105 YalçınTepeandFulyaAydın Temel 5.1 Introduction 105 5.1.1 Concerns in Aquaculture 105 5.2 Overview of Aquaculture and Effluent Treatment 107 5.2.1 Effluent Water Quality Considerations 108 5.3 Use of Constructed Wetlands for Treatment of Fish and Shrimp Aquaculture Effluents 112 5.3.1 Free Water Surface Constructed Wetlands (FWS CWs) 113 5.3.2 Subsurface Flow Constructed Wetlands (SFCWs) 114 5.3.3 Hybrid Systems (HS) 115 5.4 Conclusions 119 References 120 6 Evaluation of Treatment Wetlands of Different Configuration for the Sugarcane-Mill Effluent under Tropical Conditions 127 E. Navarro, R. Pastor, V. Matamoros and J.M. Bayona 6.1 Introduction 127 6.2 Modeling Water Consumption Minimization 130 6.2.1 First Approach to Linearity 131 6.2.2 A MILP Approach to the Problem 131 6.3 Type of Effluent and Pretreatment 133 6.3.1 Physical–Chemical Methods 133 6.3.2 Intensive Biological Processes 133 6.3.2.1 Suspended Bed Reactor 133 6.3.2.2 Fixed Bed Reactor 133 6.3.2.3 Fluidized Bed Reactor 134 6.3.3 Extensive Biological Processes 134 6.4 Constructed Wetlands (CWs) 135 6.4.1 Case Studies 135 6.4.1.1 India 135 6.4.1.2 Kenya 137 6.4.1.3 Mexico 137 6.4.1.4 South Africa 138 6.4.1.5 Thailand 138 6.4.2 Effects of Design and Operation on the COD, BOD and Nutrient Removal 139 6.4.3 Other Water Quality Parameters 140 6.4.3.1 Turbidity 140 6.4.3.2 Pigments 140 6.4.3.3 Sulfate 140 6.4.3.4 Nitrogen Removal 141 6.4.3.5 Phosphorus 141 6.5 Research Needs 141 Acknowledgements 141 References 142 7 Treatment of Effluents from Meat, Vegetable and Soft Drinks Processing using Constructed Wetlands 145 Marco Hartl, Joseph Hogan and Vasiliki Ioannidou 7.1 Treatment of Slaughterhouse and Meat Processing Wastewater 145 7.2 Treatment of Potato Washing Wastewater 150 7.3 Treatment of Molasses Wastewater 153 7.4 Treatment of Effluents from Coffee Processing 157 References 160 Part III Agro-Industrial Wastewater 163 8 Olive Mill Wastewater Treatment in Constructed Wetlands 165 F. Masi, A. Rizzo, R. Bresciani, Dimitrios V. Vayenas, C.S. Akratos, A.G. Tekerlekopoulou and Alexandros I. Stefanakis 8.1 Introduction 165 8.2 Wastewater Production and Characterization 166 8.3 Applications and Configurations 166 8.3.1 The Greek Experiences 168 8.3.1.1 Free Water Surface CWs 168 8.3.1.2 Horizontal Subsurface Flow CWs 170 8.3.1.3 Vertical Flow CWs 170 8.3.1.4 Hybrid Wetland Systems 171 8.4 Evaporation Plus Constructed Wetlands: An Italian Innovative Approach 172 8.5 Discussion and Conclusions 172 References 173 9 Dairy Wastewater Treatment with Constructed Wetlands: Experiences from Belgium, the Netherlands and Greece 175 C.S. Akratos, D. Van Oirschot, A.G. Tekerlekopoulou, Dimitrios V. Vayenas and Alexandros I. Stefanakis 9.1 Introduction 175 9.2 Brief Literature Review on Wetland Systems for Dairy Wastewater Treatment 176 9.3 Experiences from the Netherlands and Belgium 181 9.3.1 Wetland System Description 182 9.3.2 Operation 183 9.3.3 Results from the Netherlands 184 9.3.3.1 Experimental Projects 184 9.3.3.2 Stimulation of Denitrification through Recirculation of Effluent 185 9.3.3.3 Phosphorus Removal 185 9.3.4 Results from Belgium 187 9.3.4.1 System at Poppe, Eeklo 187 9.3.4.2 System at De Paep, Sint-Gillis Waas in Belgium 188 9.3.4.3 System at PDLT, Geel in Belgium 189 9.3.4.4 Aerated Wetland (FBA) at PDLT, Geel in Belgium 190 9.4 Experiences from Greece 192 9.4.1 First Experimental Project 192 9.4.2 Second Experimental Project 196 9.5 Conclusions 197 References 198 10 The Performance of Constructed Wetlands for Treating Swine Wastewater under Different Operating Conditions 203 Gladys Vidal, Catalina Plaza de Los Reyes and Oliver Sáez 10.1 Introduction 203 10.1.1 The Swine Sector and the Generation of Slurries 203 10.1.2 Characterization of Slurries 203 10.1.3 Environmental Effects of the Application of Slurry in Soils 205 10.1.4 Integrated Management for Treating Swine Slurry 205 10.1.5 Primary Treatment (Solids Removal) 207 10.1.6 Secondary Treatment (Organic Matter Removal) 207 10.1.6.1 Anaerobic Treatment Systems 207 10.2 Removal of Nutrients by Constructed Wetlands 207 10.2.1 Constructed Wetland (CW) 208 10.2.1.1 Macrophyte Species Used in Constructed Wetlands 209 10.2.1.2 Nitrogen Elimination Mechanisms in Constructed Wetlands 209 10.2.1.3 Incorporation into Plant Tissue (Assimilation) 212 10.2.1.4 Ammonium Sedimentation/Adsorption 212 10.2.1.5 Anammox (or Anaerobic Ammonia Oxidation) 213 10.3 Removal of Nutrients by Constructed Wetlands using Biological Pretreatments 213 Acknowledgements 216 References 216 Part IV Mine Drainage and Leachate Treatment 223 11 Constructed Wetlands for Metals: Removal Mechanism and Analytical Challenges 225 Adam Sochacki, Asheesh K. Yadav, Pratiksha Srivastava, Naresh Kumar, Mark Wellington Fitch and Ashirbad Mohanty 11.1 Sources of Metal Pollution and Rationale for Using Constructed Wetlands to Treat Metal-Laden Wastewater 225 11.2 Removal Mechanisms 226 11.2.1 Adsorption 226 11.2.2 Filtration and Sedimentation 226 11.2.3 Association with Metal Oxides and Hydroxides 227 11.2.4 Precipitation as Sulfides 227 11.2.4.1 Mechanism of the Process 228 11.2.4.2 Bacterial Sulfate Reduction in Constructed Wetlands 230 11.2.4.3 Carbon Source for Sulfate-Reducing Bacteria 231 11.2.5 Microbial Removal Processes 232 11.2.6 Plant Uptake of Metals in Constructed Wetlands 232 11.2.6.1 Metal Uptake by Aquatic Macrophytes 232 11.2.6.2 Metal Uptake by the Roots 233 11.2.6.3 Metal Uptake by the Shoots 233 11.2.6.4 Indirect Assistance in Metal Removal by Plants 233 11.2.6.5 Role of Plants in Removing Metals from Industrial Wastewater 234 11.2.7 Other Processes 235 11.3 Analytical Challenges 235 11.3.1 Background and Overview of Methods 235 11.3.2 Sequential Extraction Procedures and their Applicability to Wetland Substrates 237 11.3.3 State-of-the-Art Instrumental Methods 238 11.3.4 Advanced Analytical Techniques 239 References 241 12 A Review on the Use of Constructed Wetlands for the Treatment of Acid Mine Drainage 249 C. Sheridan, A. Akcil, U. Kappelmeyer and I. Moodley 12.1 What is Acid Mine Drainage? 249 12.2 Sources of AMD 250 12.3 Environmental and Social Impacts of AMD 251 12.3.1 Environmental Impacts 251 12.3.2 Social Impacts of AMD 253 12.4 Remediation of AMD 253 12.4.1 Constructed Wetlands 254 12.4.1.1 Constructed Wetland Configuration Types 254 12.4.1.2 Mechanism by which CWs Remediate Most AMD/ARD 254 12.4.1.3 Constructed Wetlands for Treating AMD Prior to 2000 255 12.4.1.4 Constructed Wetlands for Treating AMD Between 2001 and 2010 256 12.4.1.5 Constructed Wetlands for Treating AMD from 2010 to the Present 258 12.5 Summary 259 References 259 13 Solid Waste (SW) Leachate Treatment using Constructed Wetland Systems 263 K.B.S.N. Jinadasa, T.A.O.K. Meetiyagoda and Wun Jern Ng 13.1 The Nature of Solid Waste (SW) and SW Leachate 263 13.2 Characteristics of SW Leachate in Tropical Developing Countries 265 13.3 Treatment Methods for SW Leachate 267 13.3.1 Advantages of Constructed Wetlands for Leachate Treatment Under Tropical Climate 269 13.4 Experimental Methodology for Plant Species and CW Performance Evaluation 270 13.5 Effect of Plant Species on Leachate Components 273 13.5.1 Effect on Organic Compounds 273 13.5.2 Effect on Removal and Transformation of Nitrogen Compounds 276 13.6 Summary 279 References 279 Part V Wood and Leather Processing Industry 283 14 Cork Boiling Wastewater Treatment in Pilot Constructed Wetlands 285 Arlindo C. Gomes, Alexandros I. Stefanakis, António Albuquerque and Rogério Simões 14.1 Introduction 285 14.1.1 Cork Production and Manufacture 285 14.1.2 Cork Boiling Wastewater Characteristics 286 14.2 Cork Boiling Wastewater Treatment 289 14.2.1 Physico-Chemical Treatment 289 14.2.2 Biological Treatment 298 14.2.3 Sequential Treatment 299 14.3 Constructed Wetland Technology 300 14.3.1 Experimental Setup of Microcosm-Scale Constructed Wetlands 301 14.3.2 Experimental Results 302 14.4 Conclusions 304 Acknowledgements 305 References 305 15 Constructed Wetland Technology for Pulp and Paper Mill Wastewater Treatment 309 Satish Kumar and Ashutosh Kumar Choudhary 15.1 Introduction 309 15.2 Pulp and Paper Mill Wastewater Characteristics 310 15.3 Remediation of Pulp and Paper Mill Wastewater Pollution 311 15.4 Constructed Wetlands 312 15.4.1 Performance of CWs for Pulp and Paper Mill Wastewater Treatment 312 15.5 Conclusions 322 References 322 16 Treatment of Wastewater from Tanneries and the Textile Industry using Constructed Wetland Systems 327 Christos S. Akratos, A.G. Tekerlekopoulou and Dimitrios V. Vayenas 16.1 Introduction 327 16.1.1 Tannery Wastewaters 327 16.1.2 Azo Dye and Textile Industries 330 16.2 Discussion 332 16.3 Constructed Wetlands for Cr(VI) Removal: A Case Study 332 16.4 Conclusions 337 References 338 Part VI Pharmaceuticals and Cosmetics Industry 343 17 Removal Processes of Pharmaceuticals in Constructed Wetlands 345 A. Dordio and A.J.P. Carvalho 17.1 Introduction 345 17.2 Pharmaceutical Compounds in the Environment: Sources, Fate and Environmental Effects 348 17.3 Pharmaceuticals Removal in Constructed Wetlands 352 17.3.1 Removal Efficiency of Pharmaceuticals in CWS 352 17.3.2 Main Removal Processes for Pharmaceuticals in SSF-CWS 365 17.3.2.1 Abiotic Processes 365 17.3.2.2 Biotic Processes 367 17.3.3 The Role of SSF-CWS Components in Pharmaceuticals Removal 370 17.3.3.1 The Role of Biotic Components (Plants and Microorganisms) in Pharmaceuticals Removal 370 17.3.3.2 The Role of the Support Matrix in Pharmaceuticals Removal 381 17.4 Final Remarks 385 References 386 18 Role of Bacterial Diversity on PPCPs Removal in Constructed Wetlands 405 María Hijosa-Valsero, Ricardo Sidrach-Cardona, Anna Pedescoll, Olga Sánchez and Eloy Bécares 18.1 Introduction 405 18.2 Mesocosm-Scale Experiences 406 18.2.1 Description of the Systems 406 18.2.2 Sampling Strategy 406 18.2.3 Analytical Methodology 408 18.3 Pollutant Concentrations and Removal Efficiencies in Mesocosms CWs 409 18.4 Microbiological Characterization 409 18.5 Link between Microbiological Richness and Pollutant Removal in CWs 413 18.5.1 Microbial Richness and Conventional Pollutant Removal 413 18.5.1.1 Roots 413 18.5.2 Microbial Richness and PPCP Removal 414 18.5.2.1 Gravel 414 18.5.2.2 Interstitial Liquid 414 18.5.2.3 Roots 414 18.5.3 Effect of Physico-Chemical Parameters on Microbial Richness 416 18.5.3.1 Gravel 416 18.5.3.2 Interstitial Liquid 416 18.5.3.3 Roots 416 18.6 Mechanisms and Design Parameters Involved in PPCPs Removal 418 18.7 Conclusions 420 Acknowledgements 421 References 421 Part VII Novel Industrial Applications 427 19 Dewatering of Industrial Sludge in Sludge Treatment Reed Bed Systems 429 S. Nielsen and E. Bruun 19.1 Introduction 429 19.2 Methodology 431 19.2.1 Description of an STRB 431 19.2.2 Description of STRB Test-System 432 19.3 Treatment of Industrial Sludge in STRB Systems 434 19.3.1 Organic Material in Sludge 434 19.3.2 Fats and Oil in Sludge 434 19.3.3 Heavy Metals in Sludge 435 19.3.4 Nutrients in Sludge 436 19.3.5 Hazardous Organic Compounds in Sludge 436 19.4 Case Studies – Treatment of Industrial Sludge in Full-Scale and Test STRB Systems 437 19.4.1 Case 1: Treatment of Industrial Sewage Sludge with High Contents of Fat 437 19.4.2 Case 2: Treatment of Industrial Sewage Sludge with High Contents of Heavy Metal (Nickel) 438 19.4.3 Case 3: Treatment of Water Works Sludge 440 19.4.3.1 Feed Sludge and Resulting Filtrate Quality 442 19.4.3.2 Sedimentation and Capillary Suction Time 443 19.4.3.3 Sludge Volume Reduction and Sludge Residue Development 446 19.4.3.4 Filtrate Water Flow 447 19.5 Discussion and Conclusions 448 19.5.1 Industrial Sludge 448 19.5.2 Water Works Sludge 449 Acknowledgements 450 References 450 20 Constructed Wetlands for Water Quality Improvement and Temperature Reduction at a Power-Generating Facility 453 Christopher H. Keller, Susan Flash and John Hanlon 20.1 Introduction 453 20.2 Basis of Design 453 20.2.1 Design for Ammonia and Copper Reduction 454 20.2.2 Design for pH, Toxicity, and Specific Conductance 456 20.2.3 Design for Temperature Reduction 456 20.2.4 Process Flow and Final Design Criteria 458 20.3 Construction 458 20.4 Operational Performance Summary 459 20.4.1 Inflow and Outflow Rates and Wetland Water Depths 459 20.4.2 Ammonia 463 20.4.3 Copper 463 20.4.4 pH 463 20.4.5 Temperature 464 20.4.6 Whole Effluent Toxicity 466 20.4.7 Specific Conductance 466 20.5 Discussion 466 References 468 21 Recycling of Carwash Effluents Treated with Subsurface Flow Constructed Wetlands 469 A. Torrens, M. Folch, M. Salgot and M. Aulinas 21.1 Introduction 469 21.2 Case Study: Description 471 21.2.1 Pilot Vertical Flow Constructed Wetland 471 21.2.2 Pilot Horizontal Flow Constructed Wetland 471 21.2.3 Operation and Monitoring 472 21.3 Case Study: Results and Discussion 474 21.3.1 Influent Characterization 474 21.3.2 Effluent Quality for Recycling 477 21.3.3 Performance of the Constructed Wetland Pilots 478 21.3.3.1 Horizontal Flow Constructed Wetland 478 21.3.3.2 Vertical Flow Constructed Wetland 482 21.3.3.3 Comparison of Performances 486 21.4 Design and Operation Recommendations 488 21.4.1 Horizontal Flow Constructed Wetland 488 21.4.2 Vertical Flow Constructed Wetland 489 21.5 Conclusions 489 References 490 22 Constructed Wetland-Microbial Fuel Cell: An Emerging Integrated Technology for Potential Industrial Wastewater Treatment and Bio-Electricity Generation 493 Asheesh K. Yadav, Pratiksha Srivastava, Naresh Kumar, Rouzbeh Abbassi and Barada Kanta Mishra 22.1 Introduction 493 22.2 The Fundamentals of MFC and Microbial Electron Transfer to Electrode 495 22.3 State of the Art of CW-MFCs 496 22.3.1 Design and Operation of CW-MFCs 496 22.3.2 Performance Evaluation of Various CW-MFCs 497 22.4 Potential Industrial Wastewater Treatment in CW-MFCs 500 22.5 Challenges in Generating Bio-Electricity in CW-MFCs During Industrial Wastewater Treatment 502 22.6 Future Directions 503 Acknowledgements 504 References 504 23 Constructed Wetlands for Stormwater Treatment from Specific (Dutch) Industrial Surfaces 511 Floris Boogaard, Johan Blom and Joost van den Bulk 23.1 Introduction 511 23.2 Stormwater Characteristics 511 23.2.1 Stormwater Quality in Urban Areas 511 23.2.2 Industrial Stormwater Quality 513 23.2.3 Fraction of Pollutants Attached to Particles 513 23.2.3.1 Particle Size Distribution 515 23.2.4 Removal Efficiency 515 23.3 Best Management Practices of (Dutch) Wetlands at Industrial Sites 515 23.3.1 Amsterdam Westergasfabriekterrein 518 23.3.2 Constructed Wetland Oostzaan: Multifunctional High Removal Efficiency 518 23.3.3 Constructed Wetland Hoogeveen, Oude Diep 520 23.3.4 Cost 520 23.3.5 Choosing Best Location(s) of Wetlands on Industrial Areas 521 23.4 Innovation in Monitoring Wetlands 523 23.4.1 Innovative Determination of Long-Term Hydraulic Capacity of Wetlands 523 23.4.2 Innovating Monitoring of Removal Efficiency and Eco-Scan 525 23.5 Conclusions and Recommendations 525 23.5.1 Conclusions 525 23.5.2 Recommendations 527 References 527 Part VIII Managerial and Construction Aspects 529 24 A Novel Response of Industry to Wastewater Treatment with Constructed Wetlands: A Managerial View through System Dynamic Techniques 531 Ioannis E. Nikolaou and Alexandros I. Stefanakis 24.1 Introduction 531 24.2 Theoretical Underpinning 532 24.2.1 Constructed Wetlands – A Short Review 532 24.2.2 Constructed Wetlands: An Economic–Environmental Approach 533 24.2.3 Constructed Wetlands: An Industrial Viewpoint 534 24.2.4 CWs Through a CSR Glance 534 24.3 Methodology 536 24.3.1 Research Structure 536 24.3.2 The CSR-CWs Agenda 537 24.3.3 CSR-CWs Balanced Scorecard 537 24.3.4 CSR-CWs Balanced Scorecard System Dynamic Model 539 24.3.5 Some Certain Scenario Developments 540 24.4 Test of Scenarios and a Typology Construction for Decision Making 541 24.4.1 Scenario Analysis 541 24.4.1.1 The Proactive Industry – The Business Case Approach 541 24.4.1.2 Proactive Industry – The Ethical Case Approach 541 24.4.1.3 Reactive Industry – The Business Case Approach 543 24.4.1.4 Reactive Industry – The Ethical Case Approach 543 24.4.2 A Typology of Industry Decision Making in CSR-CWs Agenda 544 24.5 Conclusion and Discussion 545 References 546 25 A Construction Manager’s Perception of a Successful Industrial Constructed Wetland Project 551 Emmanuel Aboagye-Nimo, Justus Harding and Alexandros I. Stefanakis 25.1 Key Performance Indicators for Construction Projects 551 25.2 Function and Values of Constructed Wetlands 552 25.2.1 Constructed Wetland Components 553 25.3 Clear Deliverables of Project 554 25.3.1 Health and Safety Considerations in Construction Projects 555 25.3.2 Hazard Identification and Risk Screening 556 25.3.3 Securing the Project 556 25.4 Critical Points in Constructing Wetlands 556 25.5 Summary 559 References 560 Index 563

Read more less